IBM Presents OS/2 Software Hits 1995/OS-2_SW_HITS_2ND_EDITION_1995.ISO/i17/ur423843.dsk/CSDH.DFI/DFIG2MST.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1994-03-29 | 436KB | 18,084 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. View, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A view is a graphical representation of your network resources. The LAN Network
Manager program indicates the status of a resource by using different colors
and fill patterns for the graphical elements it displays.

The elements displayed in a view can include nodes, links, text, tackpoints,
and a background picture.

The LAN Network Manager program supports network level, segment level, and CAU
level views.

This is an example of a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Double-click, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double-click means to press and release the mouse button twice, quickly,
without moving the mouse.

Double-clicking on a node or link is a quick way to access information.  For
example, if you double-click on a segment, the Segment Information/Status
window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Text, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can add text to a view. For example, you can add a note, a user name, a
phone number, or the name of a city.

The LAN Network Manager program provides four text fields for each node or
link.  You can specify which of these text labels appear by selecting the
Display labels option from the View pull-down menu.

You can also enter text that the LAN Network Manager program does not associate
with a resource.  To add free text to the view, select the Add text/tackpoints
option from the Edit pull-down menu.

You can select free text individually.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Tackpoint, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A tackpoint is a graphical object in a view that creates a bending point in a
link. Tackpoints generally do not represent physical objects and are visible
only when the select function is used to select either tackpoints or the links
of which they are a part. A visible tackpoint is a small, white square at a
bend in a link.

You can add, delete, and move tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Using the keyboard to add tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use the keyboard to add tackpoints in a view, do the following:

  1. Select Add tackpoints  on the Edit pull-down menu. The mouse pointer
     changes to a tackpoint pointer when it is positioned over a link.

  2. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position in the link where you want the
     tackpoint. The link bends as you position the tackpoint. Press the
     spacebar.

  3. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view.

 This picture is an example of what a view looks like after you add tackpoints.

 You can exit Add Tackpoints by:

 o Pressing the Esc key.
 o Double-clicking mouse button 2.
 o Selecting Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Unavailable actions, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The choices in a pull-down menu from the action bar are sometimes in a muted
color, which means that they are not available.  This can also be true for
input fields in a window.

Possible reasons that an action bar choice or a field is unavailable include
the following:

 o You have not selected an object on which to perform the action. For example,
   if you do not select a segment on the Segments window, the choices from the
   Actions pull-down menu are not available.  After you select a segment, the
   choices are available.

   The same is true for objects in a view.  For example, if you do not select a
   node or link, the Profile option on the Actions pull-down menu is not
   available.

 o You have not entered data in a required field.  For example, if you are
   adding a Controlled Access Unit (CAU) definition on the Controlled Access
   Unit Definition window, the Add pushbutton is not available until you enter
   the CAU ID.

 o The LAN Network Manager program is not authorized to change the information
   in the field.  For example, if you are using an observing LAN Network
   Manager program to monitor network activity, you cannot change certain
   fields on a bridge's Configuration Parameters window.

 Help is always available for any action, whether or not the action is
 currently available. To access help, click and hold mouse button 1 on the
 option, then press F1. If you are using a keyboard, press F10 to move to the
 action bar, then use the arrow keys to select the option and press F1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Hop count for subnet, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The hop count is the number of node-to-node links you want to display for a
selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9.

For example, to see all the resources that are up to five links away from
Resource A, specify a hop count of 5.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Node, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A node is a graphical symbol used in a view to represent a resource or a group
of resources, such as a workstation or a LAN segment.

To see a description of the node symbols used in views, select Legend on the
Options pull-down menu, then select Symbol from the cascading menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Resource, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A resource is any component of your network that is managed by the LAN Network
Manager program.  Resources include segments, stations, bridges, and Controlled
Access Units (CAUs).

In a view of your network, a resource can be represented by either a node or a
link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Link, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A link is a graphical symbol used in a view to represent the bridge connection
between two nodes. The kind of link symbol used in the view indicates whether
the bridge is operating as a local bridge or a remote bridge:

 o If the bridge is a local bridge, the link is represented by a straight line.

 o If the bridge is a remote bridge, the link is represented by a jagged line.

 If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to
 that bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log.  After you
 display the event log, the link changes to a solid line.

 To see the link symbols used in views, select Legend on the Options pull-down
 menu, then select Symbol from the cascading menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Label, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A label is an identifier that the LAN Network Manager program associates with a
particular node or link. A label might be an address, an icon, or a name.

You can display or hide these labels at specific zoom levels by selecting
Display labels on the View pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Background picture, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A background picture is an image that you can add to a view. Background
pictures can be complex images, such as maps, floor plans, or school layouts.
Background pictures are OS/2(T) metafiles. You can add and delete, but not
modify, background pictures.

You can use the OS/2 Convert Picture File utility to convert other picture file
types (such as .PIF) to metafiles and include them in your views as background
pictures.

This is an example of a background picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Scroll bar, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A scroll bar is a narrow section of a view window that allows you to move the
view so you can see a part that is not currently displayed.

A view window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You can use the vertical
scroll bar (on the right side of the view window) to move the view display up
and down. You can use the horizontal scroll bar (at the bottom of the view
window) to move the view display left and right.

The slider box on the scroll bar indicates how much of the view is displayed.
When you first open a view, the entire view is displayed. Therefore, the
sliders fill both the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. If you zoom in on a
part of the view, the size of the sliders changes to indicate that the entire
view is not displayed.  To scroll to another part of the view, position the
mouse pointer on the slider and, while holding mouse button 1 down, move the
slider.  You can also click on the scroll bar arrows or use the arrow keys to
scroll through a view.

To scroll one screen at a time in any direction, click on the area between the
slider and the scroll bar arrows. You can also scroll using the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Path cost, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A value, maintained by each bridge, that indicates the relative length of the
path between a centrally-located bridge (the root bridge) and another bridge.

Each bridge's path cost is equal to the sum of the path cost increments of the
bridges between it and the root bridge, plus its own path cost increment.  The
path cost for the root bridge is zero.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Beaconing, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Beaconing is a state in which an adapter on the segment is repeatedly
transmitting a message that it is not receiving a normal signal. This indicates
a serious network problem, such as a broken cable, a power failure, or an
adapter inserted at the wrong speed.  The adapter continues to beacon until the
error is corrected or bypassed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Continuous carrier, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

On broadband networks, continuous carrier is a condition in which a carrier
signal is being constantly broadcast on a given frequency.  No further
information can be modulated on that frequency.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Soft error, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A soft error is an intermittent error on a network that causes data to have to
be transmitted more than once to be received.  A soft error affects the
network's performance but does not, by itself, affect the network's overall
reliability.  If the number of soft errors becomes excessive, reliability is
affected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Managed domain, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The managed domain is made up of the segment that the LAN Network Manager
program is on and all segments to which it is linked by bridges.  Network
management functions (such as adapter monitoring, tracing authorization, and
Controlled Access Unit (CAU) registration) are limited to this domain.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Weight Conditions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Weight is a measure of the number of soft errors that an adapter is
experiencing. When the ring error monitor (REM) receives a soft error report
from a station on the ring, this information is used to accumulate weight
against the reporting station and its nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN).
The weight accumulated for a particular station indicates the likelihood that
the station is causing excessive soft errors on the ring.  The REM compares the
accumulated weights for the adapters on the ring to a threshold value.

Pre-Weight-Exceeded Condition

The REM sends this notification when an adapter's accumulated weight exceeds
50% of the threshold value. This condition indicates that excessive soft errors
are causing a potential problem on the ring and might soon degrade network
performance.

Weight-Exceeded Condition

The REM initially sends this notification when an adapter's accumulated weight
reaches the threshold value. It periodically repeats this notification as long
as the adapter's accumulated weight exceeds 50% of the threshold value. This
condition indicates that the ring is experiencing a serious soft error problem,
which is significantly impacting network performance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Spanning-Tree Protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Spanning-tree protocol is used between bridges in a LAN to ensure that a single
path exists between any two stations in the network.

The IBM(T) Token-Ring Network uses the spanning-tree protocol called
single-route broadcast to maintain a single path between any two LAN segments
in the network for single-route broadcast messages used in route discovery.

Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 LANs use the spanning-tree protocol to allow only one
of two or more parallel bridges to forward frames.  If more than one parallel
bridge in an Ethernet domain is allowed to forward frames, the frames can loop
endlessly in the network.

If there are parallel IBM 8209 LAN Bridges between a Token-Ring Network and an
Ethernet network, the spanning-tree protocol is used to allow only one bridge
to forward frames at any one time. The bridge that is authorized to forward
frames is called the designated bridge, and the other parallel bridges are
called stand-by bridges.  The designated bridge enters the data forwarding
state, and the stand-by bridges remain in the blocking state. If the designated
bridge fails for any reason, the spanning-tree protocol causes a parallel
stand-by bridge to enter the forwarding state.

One bridge in the network (the root bridge) sends a message at a specified
interval (the hello time) to help maintain the domain awareness of designated
and stand-by bridges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Bridges exchange bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) to monitor the single-route
broadcast path and to adjust this path whenever conditions on the network
require it.  The information in the BPDUs, such as bridge ID and path cost,
enables the bridges in the network to do the following:

 o Determine which role a newly active bridge should assume

 o Determine whether a bridge is a parallel bridge or in a parallel path

 o Determine which one of two or more parallel bridges should have single-route
   broadcast active

 o Detect when the root bridge or a designated bridge has left the network

 o Reassign the bridge roles as necessary when bridges enter and leave the
   network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Limited mode operation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the LAN Network Manager adapter is unable to connect to the network and
communicate with the other resources, the LAN Network Manager program can still
run, but only with a subset of the functions available to it during normal
operation.  You can access historical data about the network from the database,
if such data exists, and you can perform other tasks that do not require direct
communication with the network, such as configuring system parameters and
manipulating resource definitions.  Functions that are not available to you in
limited mode are greyed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Ring Parameter Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ring parameter server provides the ring number to an adapter when the
adapter is attached to the ring, and sends a notification to one or more
network management programs when a new adapter has attached to the ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Ring Error Monitor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ring error monitor performs the following functions:

 o Compiles error statistics reported by adapters on the network

 o Analyzes the statistics to determine a probable cause of errors degrading
   ring operation

 o Updates status conditions for the network

 o Sends reports to indicate critical problems to the network management
   programs that have requested reports.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Configuration Report Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The configuration report server (CRS) sends notifications about the current
active configuration for each ring to the network management programs that
request reports.  The CRS reports changes in the nearest active upstream
neighbor (NAUN) addresses and active monitor on the ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Abbreviations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 API         application programming interface

 APPC        advanced program-to-program communications

 ASCII       American National Standard Code for Information Interchange

 CAU         controlled access unit

 CLIST       LAN Network Manager command list

 CRS         configuration report server

 CSMA/CD     carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

 CUA(T)      Common User Access(T)

 DLC         data link control

 DLL         dynamic link library

 DOS         disk operating system

 DSAP        destination service access point

 EGA         Enhanced Graphics Adapter

 KB          kilobyte

 K           kilobit

 LAN         local area network

 LLC         logical link control

 LU          logical unit

 Mbps        megabits per second

 NAUN        nearest active upstream neighbor

 NETBIOS     Network Basic Input Output System

 NMVT        network management vector transport

 OS/2(T) EE 1.3 Operating System/2(T) Extended Edition Version 1.3

 PC          personal computer

 PM(T)       Presentation Manager(T)

 PS/2(T)     Personal System/2(T)

 PU          physical unit

 REM         ring error monitor

 RI          ring in

 RO          ring out

 RPL         remote program loader

 RPS         ring parameter server

 RPU         remote program update

 RU          request/response unit

 SAA(T)      Systems Application Architecture(T)

 SAP         service access point

 SDLC        synchronous data link control

 SNA         Systems Network Architecture

 SPCS        service point command service

 SQL         Structured Query Language

 SSAP        source service access point

 SSCP        system services control point

 TCP/IP      Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

 UPM         User Profile Management

 VGA         Video Graphics Array

 VTAM(T)     Virtual Telecommunications Access Method(T)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. IBM Trademark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of IBM Corporation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Novell Trademark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trademark of Novell, Inc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Qualifier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A qualifier is a segment that contains an Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and to
which the LAN Network Manager program has a bridged path but no link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Object, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An object is an individual graphical unit in a view. Objects can be nodes,
links, and free text.

Background pictures, resource labels, and icons are not considered objects.
You cannot select or manipulate them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Region, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A region is a collection of objects or resources that you can select and
manipulate as a single unit. When you select a region, a selection box
surrounds all the objects in the collection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Selecting and deselecting objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To perform a task, you first select an object with the mouse, and then select
the task to apply to that object. You can select or deselect an object and
select or deselect a region of objects.

You can also use the keyboard to select and deselect an object.

Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object

To select a single object, move the mouse pointer to the object, and click
mouse button 1.

To deselect a single object, click mouse button 1 anywhere in the view except
on the selected object.

Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects

To select more than one object one at a time, press and hold down the Ctrl key
while you use the mouse to click on each object you want to select.

To deselect more than one object, one at a time, press and hold down the Ctrl
key while you use the mouse to click on each object you want to deselect.

If you want to deselect all the objects at one time, click mouse button 1
anywhere in the view except on a selected object.

To select a region in a view, use a selection box.

This is an example of selecting a region.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Selecting a region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a region in a view, use the region selection box. The region
selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object.
The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the
region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of
each side.

Using the mouse, you can do the following:

 o Create a selection box

 o Change the size of a selection box

 o Move a selection box.

 To remove the box at any time, click mouse button 1 while the mouse pointer is
 outside of the box.

 You can also use the keyboard to perform these actions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Creating a selection box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a selection box by dragging the mouse pointer, do the following:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region that you want to
     select.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. While holding down the mouse button,
     move the pointer to the opposite corner to create the box. Continue moving
     the mouse pointer until the box is the size you want.

  3. Release the mouse button when the box is the correct size.

 To create a selection box without dragging the mouse pointer, do the
 following:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region you want to select.

  2. Press mouse button 1.

  3. Move the mouse pointer to the opposite corner of the region you want to
     select.

  4. Hold down the Shift key, and press mouse button 1 to create the selection
     box.

 This is an example of creating a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Changing the size of a selection box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the selection box size by moving one or two sides of the box at
a time.

To move one side:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to a square in the middle of a side of the box.
     The mouse pointer changes to a sizing pointer.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move that
     side of the box.

 To move two sides of the box at once:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two
     sides meet.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the two
     sides of the box at once.

 This is an example of changing the size of a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Moving a selection box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move a selection box, do the following:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the inside of the box. The mouse pointer changes
     to a move pointer .

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the box
     in any direction.

  3. When the box is in the correct location, release the mouse button.

 This is an example of moving a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Using the keyboard to move the mouse pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use the keyboard to move the mouse pointer:

  1. Press Shift+Esc to switch to the system icon.
  2. Select Keyboard moves pointer from the pull-down menu.
  3. Use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer.

 The following is a list of the mouse pointer movements and the keys used to
 make those movements:

 Movement      Key
 Up            Up arrow
 Down          Down arrow
 Right         Right arrow
 Left          Left arrow

 To move the mouse pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any
 of the cursor movement keys.

 If Scroll Lock is on, the cursor movement keys scroll the window instead of
 moving the mouse pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Using the keyboard to create a selection box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a region in a view, use the region selection box. The region
selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object.
The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the
region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of
each side.

Using the keyboard, you can do the following:

 o Create a selection box

 o Change the size of a selection box

 o Move a selection box.

 To remove the box at any time, move the mouse pointer outside the selection
 box, and press the spacebar.

 This is a selection box that surrounds three nodes and two links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. Creating a selection box with the keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a selection box with the keyboard, select Keyboard moves pointer from
the system icon menu.

Then, do one of the following:

 o Press and hold down the Shift key, and then use the cursor movement keys to
   move the mouse pointer to create the selection box.

 o Use the cursor movement keys to move the mouse pointer to one corner of the
   region you want to select, and press the spacebar. Move the mouse pointer to
   the opposite corner, press and hold down the Shift key, and press the
   spacebar to create a selection box.

 This is an example of creating a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Changing the size of a selection box with keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the keyboard, you can change the size of the selection box by moving one
or two sides at a time.

To move one side:

  1. Place the mouse pointer on a square on one side of the box.
  2. Press and hold down the Shift key.
  3. Move the mouse pointer to change the size of the box.

 To move two sides of the box at once:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two
     sides meet.

  2. Press and hold down the Shift key.

  3. Move the mouse pointer to move the two sides of the box at once.

 This is an example of changing the size of a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Moving a selection box with keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the selection box with the keyboard, do the following:

  1. Place the mouse pointer inside the box.  The mouse pointer changes to a
     move pointer .

  2. Press and hold down the Shift key.

  3. Move the selection box to the new location.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Using the keyboard to select and deselect objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the keyboard to select and deselect one or more objects. You can
select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects.

Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object

To select a single object, use the cursor movement keys to move the pointer to
the object, and press the spacebar.

To deselect a single object, use the cursor movement keys to move the pointer
to the selected object, and press the spacebar again.

Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects

To select a region in a view, use a selection box.

To select more than one object, one at a time, use the cursor movement keys to
move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key
while you press the spacebar. Repeat this until you finish selecting all the
objects you want to select.

To deselect more than one object, one at a time, use the cursor movement keys
to move the mouse pointer to each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key
while you press the spacebar to deselect each object.

To deselect all the objects at one time, use the cursor movement keys to move
the mouse pointer anywhere in the view except on a selected object.  Then press
the spacebar to deselect the objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Scrolling using the keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the keyboard to scroll one line at a time or one screen  at a time.
To scroll one line at a time, use the cursor movement keys. To scroll one
screen at a time, use Page Up, Page Down, Ctrl+Page Up (left), or Ctrl+Page
Down (right). If the Keyboard moves mouse pointer option is in effect, put
Scroll Lock on (press the Scroll Lock key) to use the cursor movement keys to
scroll.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Selecting options with keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select an option from a pull-down menu, press the F10 key or the Alt key to
access the action bar, and then do one of the following:

 o Type the underscored letter of the option that you want to select.

 o Press the cursor up key (), the cursor down key (), the cursor right key
   (), or the cursor left key () to highlight the option you want to select,
   and then press Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Selecting a pushbutton with keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a pushbutton on a window, do one of the following:

 o Press the Ctrl key and the underscored letter of the pushbutton you want to
   select.

 o Tab to the pushbutton that you want to select, and then press Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Using Accelerator Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An accelerator key is a function key or a combination of keys that invokes an
action.  Accelerator keys for the LAN Network Manager functions are shown
beside the choices on the pull-down menus.

These accelerator keys can be used in navigating and manipulating the LAN
Network Manager windows:

 F1             Displays general help for the window if no field is selected or
                contextual help if a field is selected.

 F10            Switches to or from the action bar.

 Cursor movement keys Move the cursor through the window.

 Tab key        Moves the cursor through the fields on a window.

 Home           On a pull-down menu, moves to the first item in the menu.

                On a window that allows data entry, moves the cursor to the
                first character in the data entry field.

 End            On a pull-down menu, moves to the last item in the menu.

                On a window that allows data entry, moves the cursor to the
                last character in the data entry field.

 Esc            On a pull-down menu or on a help window, closes that window. On
                a window that accepts data entry, activates the Cancel
                pushbutton.

 Page Up        Scrolls the contents of a window up one page. Shift+F7 performs
                the same action.

 Page Down      Scrolls the contents of a window down one page. Shift+F8
                performs the same action.

 Underscored letter Selects a choice on the action bar or a pull-down menu.

 Alt+F4         Closes the current window and returns to the previous window.

 Alt+F5         Restores a window to its original size and location on the
                display screen.

 Alt+F6         Switches between a help window and a program window.

 Alt+F7         Allows you to move the window to a different location on the
                display, using the cursor movement keys.

 Alt+F8         Allows you to change the size of the window using the cursor
                movement keys.

 Alt+F9         Minimizes a window.

 Alt+F10        Maximizes a window.

 Alt+Esc        Switches to the next program, including full-screen programs.

 Alt+Spacebar   Switches to or from the system menu. Shift+Esc performs the
                same action.

 Ctrl+Esc       Switches to the OS/2(T) task list.

 Ctrl+Underscored letter Selects a pushbutton on the current window.

 Shift+F7       Scrolls the contents of a window up one page. Page Up performs
                the same action.

 Shift+F8       Scrolls the contents of a window down one page. Page Down key
                performs the same action.

 Shift+F10      Displays help for help from within any help window.

 Shift+Esc      Switches to or from the system menu. Alt+Spacebar performs the
                same action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help to use one of the following functions:

 Using help
                To display information about the types of help that are
                available for the LAN Network Manager program.

 General help
                To display information about the content of the window from
                which you requested help.

 Keys help
                To display a list of the accelerator keys and their functions.

 Help index
                To display an alphabetical list of the help information that is
                available for the LAN Network Manager program.

 Product Information
                To display copyright and version information for the LAN
                Network Manager program.

 Specific help information (contextual help) is also available for entry
 fields.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about the types of help that are available for the LAN
Network Manager program, select Using help on the Help pull-down menu.

The Using help option describes the different help facilities and explains how
to use them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. General help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about the content of the window from which you requested
help, select General help on the Help pull-down menu.

The General help option provides general information about how the window
functions in the LAN Network Manager program.  This option also displays
information that describes any fields and pushbuttons that are in the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the accelerator keys and their functions, select Keys help
on the Help pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display an alphabetical list of the help information that is available for
the LAN Network Manager program, select Help index on the Help pull-down menu.

To display help for a topic from the help index, use the scroll bar to move to
the topic that you want to select, and then double-click mouse button 1.  You
can also select a topic with the cursor movement keys (, ) and then press
Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Product Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display copyright and version information for the LAN Network Manager
program, select Product Information on the Help pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Contextual help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about a specific entry field or item, place the cursor
on the item and either select the Help pushbutton or press the F1 key.
Contextual help explains the purpose of the item and provides information about
the possible values for the item.

You can access contextual help if your cursor is on any of the following items:

 o A choice on the action bar.

 o Any selection field, selection list, or entry field. These fields include
   selection fields in pull-down menus and in pop-up windows.

 o A message.

 If contextual help is not available for the item on which the cursor is
 located, the general help for the window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAN Network Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the LAN Network Manager Version 1.1 licensed program, part number
74F5538.  The LAN Network Manager program operates under the Operating System/2
Version 1.3 and Operating System/2 Version 2.0 licensed programs.

(C) Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1992.  All rights
reserved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. Keyboard moves mouse pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move the mouse pointer with the keyboard, click on the system icon (located
in the left-hand corner of the title bar of a view) and then select Keyboard
moves pointer on the pull-down menu. A check mark is displayed next to the
option to indicate that it is in effect. This option remains in effect until
you turn it off. To turn this option off, place the mouse pointer on the
option, and click mouse button 1.

Because the mouse pointer movement keys usually move the scroll bars in the
view, if you select this option and want to use the arrow keys to move the
scroll bar, press the Scroll Lock key.

If you want to use the keyboard for mouse pointer movement for every view you
display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Hide frame controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To hide all frame controls for the window, select Hide frame controls, on the
pull-down menu for the system icon (located in the left-hand corner of the
title bar of a view). Frame controls are:

 o The action bar
 o The minimize and maximize arrows at the right corner of the title bar of the
   window
 o The title bar
 o The scroll bars.

 Hide frame controls does not hide the system icon.

 Hide frame controls remains in effect until you close the view or until you
 turn the option off by selecting it again.

 If you want these controls hidden for every view you display, press and hold
 the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all
 views, press and hold the Shift key, and reselect the option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. Hide scroll bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To hide the scroll bars for this window, select Hide scroll bars, on the system
menu located in the title bar of a view. Hide scroll bars remains in effect for
all future occurrences of this view until you turn it off.  To turn this option
off, reselect it.

If you want scroll bars hidden for every view you display, press and hold the
Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views,
press and hold the Shift key, and reselect the option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Main window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can access help for the following views of your local area network (LAN):

 Network level view
      This level displays the entire LAN, including all the segments and the
      bridges that connect them.

 Segment level view
      This level displays an entire segment, including the devices that are
      directly attached to the segment.

 CAU level view
      This level displays an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and its
      attached devices.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Status of alerts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alert status area displays the word Alert if a new alert has been logged
since you last viewed the event log.  The alert message remains in the window
until you open the event log.  You can open the event log by double-clicking on
the alert message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. View Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The LAN Network Manager program displays status and configuration information
about your local area network (LAN) in a view. You can monitor network activity
at the following levels:

 Network level
                Displays a high-level representation of the segments and
                bridges of your network.

 Segment level
                Displays a representation of the stations and resources on a
                selected segment.

 CAU level
                Displays a representation of the stations and resources
                attached to a selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
                (CAU).

 The color of a node or link indicates its status.  Any change in the color of
 a node indicates a corresponding change in status.

 If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that
 node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display
 the event log, the fill pattern changes to solid.

 If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to
 that bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log.  After you
 display the event log, the link changes to a solid line.

 The first time you start the LAN Network Manager program, the view displays
 only the local segment.  When you define bridges, these bridges are not
 immediately represented in the view, but you can link them in the Bridges
 window The first time you link a bridge, the LAN Network Manager program
 updates the view and displays the bridge as a link connecting the nodes at
 each end of the bridge. The LAN Network Manager program maintains the bridge's
 position in the view each subsequent time that you start the program, although
 the status of the bridge is represented as Unknown until you link it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Status description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The LAN Network Manager program indicates the status of a node or link by its
color.  If the status of a node changes, the color of the node also changes to
indicate the new status.

The LAN Network Manager program associates the colors it uses in a view with
the following status categories:

 Non selectable
                There is only a logical connection between resources, not a
                physical link that can be selected and managed.

 Normal
                The node or link is functioning properly.

 Severity 1
                The node or link is not responding.  Manual intervention is
                required to restore normal operation.

 Severity 2
                The performance of the node or link is degraded.

 Inactive
                The node is defined to the LAN Network Manager program, but the
                logical connection is closed.

 Unknown
                The LAN Network Manager program is unable to determine the
                status of the node or link.

 Downstream error
                The node is operational, but one or more of the node's
                downstream resources is in Severity status.

 You can use the default colors set by the LAN Network Manager program, or you
 can set the colors associated with these statuses yourself. To change the
 colors, select Color on the Legend pull-down menu.

 For a table that lists the categories of problem severity and the LAN Network
 Manager errors that are associated with them, see Using LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Network Level View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The network level view is the main window of the LAN Network Manager program.
This window displays a graphical representation of the segments and bridges
that make up your local area network (LAN). Segments are represented by nodes,
and bridges are represented by links.

The color of a resource indicates its status. Any change in the color of a
resource indicates a corresponding change in status.

If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that
node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display
the event log, the pattern changes to solid.

If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to that
bridge has been logged since you last displayed the event log.  After you
display the event log, the link changes to a solid line.

Double-clicking on a node or a link is a quick way to access the
Information/Status window for that segment or bridge.

You can also open a view of a segment from the network level view.

Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the symbol
shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window.

The status area, at the bottom of the window, displays the following
information from left to right:

 o The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter and the local segment.

 o The status of the host connection.

 o The status of alerts that have been logged since you last displayed the
   event log.

 o The status of the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Opening a segment level view ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From the network level view, there are two ways to generate a view of a
segment:

 o Select the segment in the view, and then select Segment level or Segment
   level-hide CAU from the View pull-down menu.

   If you select Segment level, the view displays all stations and IBM(T) 8230
   Controlled Access Units (CAUs) attached directly to the segment.  Each CAU
   is represented by a node, and the stations that are attached to the segment
   through the CAU are not displayed.  The CAU level view is available by
   double-clicking on the CAU and selecting the View pushbutton.

   If you select Segment level-hide CAU, the view displays all stations on that
   segment, whether or not the stations are attached to the segment through a
   CAU.  The CAU itself is not represented as a node, but the CAU adapters are
   displayed, in addition to the stations that are attached to the segment
   through the CAU. The CAU level view is not available from this view.

 o Double-click on the segment.  The Segment Information/Status window is
   displayed.  Select the View pushbutton.  The view that is displayed does not
   hide CAUs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Status of the Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter, of the current segment, or of
the viewed IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) varies, depending on
whether the resource is connected to an IBM Token-Ring Network or an IBM PC
Network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Possible Statuses for the IBM Token-Ring Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to an IBM(T) Token-Ring
Network, one of the following statuses appears in the status area. If the
status is anything other than normal, soft error, or wrapped, the LAN Network
Manager options that involve communications on the LAN might be disrupted.

 Normal
             The LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to the network, and
             there are no problems.

             This status can also appear if a fault that occurs on the ring
             causes the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to remove the
             source of the fault from the ring.

 Soft error
             An intermittent error on the network is causing data to be
             retransmitted.

 Wrapped
             The Token-Ring segment is now using the backup path.

 Beaconing
             An adapter has sent a frame that indicates a serious ring problem,
             such as a broken cable.

 Data lost
             The LAN Network Manager program cannot receive incoming frames,
             log errors, log bridge-performance counter reports, or process and
             log configuration changes as fast as they occur. Some information,
             including error information and error recovery information, will
             be lost. Until the message disappears, the LAN Network Manager
             program stops receiving data.

             To recover from this state, do one or more of the following:

             o Increase the database-resynchronization timer and the age-out
               timer.

             o Reduce the number of bridges that are sending bridge-performance
               notifications or increase the bridge-performance notification
               interval for several bridges.

             o Turn soft-error reporting off.

               This is a temporary condition.

 Adapter closed
             The LAN Network Manager adapter has closed.

 Wire fault
             There is a break or a short in a segment of the LAN Network
             Manager adapter's cable.

 Initializing
             The LAN Network Manager program is initializing. This status
             occurs at startup and indicates that the LAN Network Manager
             adapter is being opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Possible Statuses for the IBM PC Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the LAN Network Manager adapter is connected to an IBM(T) PC Network(T),
one of the following statuses appears in the status area. If the status is
anything other than normal, the LAN Network Manager options that involve
communications on the LAN might be disrupted.

 Normal
             There are no problems on the network.

 No carrier
             A carrier signal is not being broadcast on a given frequency. In
             the absence of such a carrier, no information can be modulated on
             that frequency.

 Continuous carrier
             A carrier signal is being constantly broadcast on a given
             frequency. No further information can be modulated on that
             frequency.

 Data lost
             The LAN Network Manager program cannot receive incoming frames,
             log errors, log bridge-performance counter reports, or process and
             log configuration changes as fast as they occur. Some information,
             including error information and error recovery information, will
             be lost. Until the message disappears, the LAN Network Manager
             program stops receiving data.

             To recover from this state, do one or more of the following:

             o Increase the database-resynchronization timer and the age-out
               timer

             o Reduce the number of bridges that send bridge-performance
               notifications or increase the bridge-performance notification
               interval for several bridges.

               This is a temporary condition.

 Adapter closed
             The adapter has closed.

 Initializing
             The LAN Network Manager program is initializing. This status
             occurs at startup and indicates that the LAN Network Manager
             adapter is being opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. Status of the Host Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section of the status area in the main window of the LAN Network Manager
program indicates the status of the host connection the last time the LAN
Network Manager program attempted to send an alert to the NetView(T) host or a
command was received from the NetView host.  If the host link has gone down
since communication was last established, the host status continues to indicate
that the host link is up until another alert is sent.

The status of the host connection can be:

 o Host link up
 o Running host command
 o Host link down

 If you have not configured a host connection, the status area displays Host
 link down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Status of the LAN Network Manager program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section of the status area in the main window of the LAN Network Manager
program indicates the status of the program. Possible status messages for the
program include:

 o Starting LNM
 o Restarting LNM
 o Opening network view
 o Opening segment view
 o Opening CAU view
 o Refreshing configuration
 o Creating view
 o Recreating view
 o Saving view.

 If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager
 program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh
 configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status
 change.  To update the view with this new configuration information, select
 Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. Segment Level View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The segment level view provides an expanded view of a particular LAN segment.

This window displays a graphical representation of the stations that are
attached to the selected segment, including their statuses. These stations can
represent workstation adapters, IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs), and
bridges.  The other segments to which the bridges are connected are also
represented in the view.

If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level from the View
pull-down menu, the view displays all the stations and CAUs that are attached
directly to the segment.  Each CAU is represented by a node, and the stations
that are attached to the segment through the CAU are not displayed.

If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU from the
View pull-down menu, the view displays all the stations that are on that
segment, whether or not the stations are attached to the segment through a CAU.
The CAU itself is not represented as a node, but the CAU adapters are
displayed, in addition to the stations that are attached to the segment through
the CAU.

Double-clicking on a node or a link is a quick way to access the
Information/Status window for that station or bridge.

You can also open a view of a CAU from the segment level view.

The color of a resource indicates the status of the adapter installed in that
resource.  Any change in the color of a resource indicates a corresponding
change in status.

If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that
node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display
the event log, the fill pattern changes to solid.

Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the symbol
shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window.

The status area, at the bottom of the window, indicates:

 o The status of the viewed segment.  This information appears on the left and
   varies, depending on whether the segment is a Token-Ring segment or a PC
   Network segment.

 o The status of the LAN Network Manager program, indicating that the program
   is refreshing the configuration information for the stations, for example.
   This information appears on the right.

 The greyed lines that connect the resources in the view represent only the
 logical relationships between the resources.  They are not links and do not
 provide any status information.  These lines cannot be selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Opening a CAU level view ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From the segment level view, there are two ways to generate a view of an IBM(T)
8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU):

 o Select the CAU, and then select CAU level on the View pull-down menu.

 o Double-click on the CAU.  The CAU Information/Status window is displayed.
   Select the View pushbutton.

 If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU on the
 View pull-down menu, you cannot select a CAU.  In this case, do one of the
 following before trying to generate a CAU level view:

 o Close the view and reopen it by selecting Segment level on the View
   pull-down menu.

 o Use the Find function to locate the CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. CAU Level View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CAU level view displays a graphical representation of an IBM(T) Controlled
Access Unit (CAU) and the Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs) that are connected to
it.  Up to four LAMs can be connected to a CAU. The view also displays the
stations that are attached to the LAM ports.

To view status information for an object, double-click on the object. Depending
on the object selected, one of the following appears:

 o Station Information/Status window

 o Segment Information/Status window

 o Bridge Information/Status window

 o CAU Information/Status window (if you double-click on the top of the CAU)

 o CAU Module Details window (if you double-click on a LAM).

 When the CAU Level View window is displayed, the LAMs are positioned in the
 window according to the port number to which they are attached on the CAU.
 These port numbers are displayed to the left of each LAM.  If you have LAMs
 attached to port numbers 1 and 4, the window displays the CAU at the top, then
 a LAM, then 2 blank spaces, then another LAM. If you change the physical
 arrangement of your LAMs, you can also move the LAMs in the view to reflect
 this new arrangement.

 If a station is attached to a lobe and the lobe is disabled, a circle with a
 slash through it appears over the lobe receptacle. If the lobe receptacle is
 not in use but is disabled, an X appears over the lobe receptacle.

 The color of a resource reflects its status. Any change in the color of a
 resource indicates a corresponding change in status.

 If the fill pattern of a node is hatched, an event or alert pertaining to that
 node has been logged since you last displayed the event log. After you display
 the event log, the pattern changes to solid.

 If a link is represented by a dashed line, an event or alert pertaining to
 that link has been logged since you last displayed the event log.  After you
 display the event log, the link changes to a solid line.

 Use Legend, on the Options pull-down menu, to display or change the default
 shapes, line types, and colors displayed in this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Moving a LAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you change the physical arrangement of your Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs),
you can also move the LAMs in the view to correspond to this new arrangement.

To move a LAM to another position, do the following:

  1. Select the LAM you want to move by pressing mouse button 2.

  2. Select the new position of the LAM by pressing mouse button 2.

     If the selected position currently contains a LAM, the LAN Network Manager
     program displays a message to confirm that you want to swap these two
     LAMs.

     If the selected position is currently empty, the LAN Network Manager
     program displays a message to confirm that you want to move the LAM.

 You can also move a LAM by doing the following:

  1. Select the LAM you want to move by pressing mouse button 2.

  2. While holding the mouse button down, move the mouse pointer to the new
     position of the LAM.

  3. Release mouse button 2.

     If the selected position currently contains a LAM, the LAN Network Manager
     program displays a message to confirm that you want to swap these two
     LAMs.

     If the selected position is currently empty, the LAN Network Manager
     program displays a message to confirm that you want to move the LAM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select
Print, on the File pull-down menu. When you select Print, the Print Device
Level View window is displayed.  In this window, you can specify print options
and the print destination.

While you are printing, the Print pull-down choice changes to Stop printing.
You can stop the print by selecting Stop printing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print Device Level View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select
Print, on the File pull-down menu.

This window contains the following field:

 Destination
                A scrollable list of the possible print destinations.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Print
                To close the window and print the view.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Printer setup
                To specify more print options, such as the type of form to use,
                the print quality, and form-feed control.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Select object types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types,
on the Edit pull-down menu. The Select Items window appears.

You can select one or more of the following types of objects:

 o Lobes
 o Segments
 o Bridges
 o Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs)
 o Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

 Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the
 objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects,
 then deselect the objects you do not want selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. Select Items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types,
on the Edit pull-down menu.

In this window, select one or more of the following:

 o Lobes
 o Segments
 o Bridges
 o Lobe Attachment Modules (LAMs)
 o Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

 Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the
 objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects,
 then deselect the objects you do not want selected.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Select
                To close this window and cause the specified object types to be
                selected.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Lobes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the lodes in the view, select Lobes, on the Select Items window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the segments in the view, select Segments, on the Select Items
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the bridges in the view, select Bridges, on the Select Items
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAMs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the Lobe Attachment Modules in the view, select LAMs, on the
Select Items window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select the IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the view, select CAU, on
the Select Items window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the labels to display on the CAU level view, select Display labels,
on the View pull-down menu.

When you select Display labels, the Display Labels window is displayed.  Select
the types of labels you want to display on the current CAU level view. If you
deselect a label, you hide the label in the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Display Labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide on the CAU level
view. Selecting an item displays it; deselecting it hides it.

You can select one or more of the following labels:

 LAM numbers
                To display the number associated with each Lobe Attachment
                Module.

 Segment numbers
                To display the 3-digit number associated with each segment.

 Bridge numbers
                To display the 1-digit number that is specified in the bridge
                program.  This number is often used to differentiate between
                two parallel bridges that connect the same segments.

 Bridge names
                To display the user-defined names of the bridges that are
                attached to the IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU).  The
                bridge name is specified on the Bridge definition window.

 Warning: If you are displaying a CAU with many bridges, displaying labels
 might clutter the screen and make it hard to read.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To display the selected labels.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select System to use one of the following functions:

 System parameters
      To display or change the system parameters.

 Secure system
      To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access.

 Restart
      To stop the LAN Network Manager program and start it again.

 Exit
      To stop the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> System Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about the LAN Network Manager adapter, select System
parameters, on the System pull-down menu.

The System Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. System Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about the LAN Network Manager adapter, select System
parameters, on the System pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
             The 12-digit hexadecimal address and the symbolic name (1-16
             characters), if one is defined, that identifies the adapter.

 LAN segment number
             The 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies the LAN segment to
             which the adapter is attached.

 LAN type
             The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. The LAN
             type can be either Token-Ring Network or PC Network(T).

 Group address
             The address that represents the group of logically related
             adapters to which the adapter belongs. An application can send a
             single message to a group address, and all adapters with that
             group address receive the message.

 Functional addresses
             A hexadecimal group address representing all the functional
             addresses available in the adapter. An adapter can have up to 31
             functional addresses. A list box contains the names of the
             functions associated with the adapter, such as active monitor, LAN
             error monitor, or configuration report server. Scroll through the
             list to view the functions in the list box.

 Microcode level of adapter
             The microcode level of the adapter.

 LAN Network Manager level
             The version of the LAN Network Manager program that is running.

 Current adapter
             Whether the adapter is a primary or alternate adapter.

             A primary adapter uses standard (default) mapping between adapter
             shared RAM, adapter ROM, and designated memory segments. The
             primary adapter is usually designated as adapter 0 on the LAN
             Profile Configuration menu of the OS/2(T) Communications Manager
             program.

             An alternate adapter uses alternate (not standard or default)
             mapping between adapter shared RAM, adapter ROM, and designated
             memory segments. The alternate adapter is usually designated as
             adapter 1 on the LAN Profile Configuration menu of the OS/2
             Communications Manager program.

 Current reporting link
             Whether the reporting link is controlling or observing. A network
             can have more than one controlling LAN Network Manager program if
             the controlling LAN Network Manager programs do not attempt to
             establish links with the same bridges. Each bridge can have up to
             4 reporting links (0-3).

             Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program can perform the
             following tasks:

             o Remove stations from a local or remote LAN segments
             o Set soft-error reporting options for remote segments
             o Change the bridge configuration parameters
             o Remove unauthorized trace tools.

               If the LAN Network Manager program is controlling, the reporting
               link can change bridge-configuration parameters and disable or
               enable bridge functions. Reporting link 0 is a controlling LAN
               Network Manager program. Reporting links 1-3 are observing LAN
               Network Manager programs.

 Current host connection
             The type of host connection:

    o None (if there is no host connection)
    o OS/2
    o NetView/PC(T).

 Comments
             The comments that have been entered on the Miscellaneous
             Parameters window.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the system parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> System Parameters Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the System Parameters window, to use the following
functions:

 Adapter parameters To change adapter information, such as the number of data
                link control (DLC) links and the adapter used for the next
                startup of the LAN Network Manager program.

 Bridge parameters To change the bridge parameters, such as the automatic
                bridge link and the reporting link status.

 Host parameters To specify the type of host connection to be used for the next
                startup of the LAN Network Manager program.

 Miscellaneous parameters To change the following parameters: LAN name,
                response time-out, tracing authorization, adapter monitoring,
                automatic retry on beaconing, adapter monitoring, configuration
                monitor, and maximum events in event log.

 Access control parameters To change the parameters that are associated with
                adapter access on the network and with LAN asset management
                that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs).

 Alert Filters  To define or delete alert filters or to set user filters for
                alerts that are sent to the host.

 Security Parameters To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN
                Network Manager program.

 LAN Station Manager options To specify what type of LAN Station Manager
                information, if any, to save in the LAN Network Manager
                database.

 LNM user interface options To specify the user interface to use the next time
                the LAN Network Manager program is started.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change information for the LAN Network Manager adapter, select Adapter
parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. For
example, you can specify the number of data link control (DLC) links that are
required by the LAN Network Manager program, or you can select which adapter to
use the next time the LAN Network Manager program is started.

The Adapter Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. Adapter Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display or change the parameters of the LAN Network Manager adapter, select
Adapter parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters
window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The LAN Network Manager adapter's hexadecimal address and
                user-defined name (if one is defined).

 Universal address
                The LAN Network Manager adapter's universally administered
                address, which is permanently encoded in the adapter at the
                time of manufacture.

 NAUN address/name
                The adapter address of the nearest active upstream neighbor
                (NAUN) and the user-defined adapter name of the nearest active
                upstream neighbor (if one is defined.  This applies to a
                Token-Ring Network only.

 DLC link stations obtained at startup
                The number of data link control (DLC) link stations that were
                obtained when the adapter was opened during startup of the LAN
                Network Manager program.

 DLC link stations for next startup or restart
                The number of data link control link stations that the LAN
                Network Manager program should attempt to obtain at the next
                startup or restart of the LAN Network Manager program.

 Adapter used current
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program is currently using the
                primary or alternate adapter.

 Adapter used for next startup or restart
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program should use the primary
                or alternate adapter the next time the LAN Network Manager
                program is started or restarted.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DLC link stations for next startup or restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify how many data link control (DLC) link stations (0-255) are to be
requested when you start or restart the LAN Network Manager program. LAN
Network Manager requires one link station for each bridge link. The total
required by the LAN Network Manager program is no less than the number of
bridges that will be defined as automatically linked.  However, this number
cannot exceed 255.  The default is 2.

The number of link stations that are defined for the adapter in the OS/2
Communications Manager limits the number of link stations that are available to
the LAN Network Manager program.  The number that is defined in the
Communications Manager program accommodates all applications in the workstation
that use the adapter, such as the LAN Network Manager program, Remote Data
Services, NETBIOS, and Host Communications through a network adapter.  If
another application requests link stations before the LAN Network Manager
program does, LAN Network Manager might not be able to obtain the number of
link stations that you defined in the Adapter Parameters window.  To enable the
LAN Network Manager program to obtain the link stations that it needs, do one
or more of the following:

 o Increase the maximum number of link stations for the adapter (in the LAN
   feature profiles of Communications Manager for OS/2 Version 1.3 or in the
   LAN Adapter and Protocol Support of Communications Manager for OS/2 Version
   2.0).

 o Reconfigure the other applications to use fewer link stations.

 o Shut down the other applications.

 For example, assume that the maximum number of link stations that are defined
 for the adapter (in the LAN feature profiles of Communications Manager) is
 200.  Then assume that the number of DLC link stations for next startup or
 restart is 200 and that the LAN Network Manager program is running on the same
 workstation as a LAN server that requires 32 link stations.  If you start the
 LAN Network Manager program before you start the LAN server, the LAN Network
 Manager program uses all the link stations, and the LAN server will not be
 able to start.  If you start the LAN server first, the LAN Network Manager
 program can start, but it will not be able to link to more than 168 bridges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter used for next startup or restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify which adapter (primary or alternate) the LAN Network Manager program is
to use at next startup or restart. The primary adapter is usually designated as
adapter 0 on the LAN Profile Configuration menu in the OS/2 Communications
Manager.  The alternate adapter is usually designated as adapter 1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the parameters associated with bridge operation, select Bridge
parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. For
example, you can specify parameters such as the automatic bridge link and the
reporting link status.

The Bridge Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. Bridge Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the parameters that pertain to the bridges within the managed
domain, select Bridge parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System
Parameters window. This window contains the following fields:

 Automatic bridge link
                Whether the automatic bridge link is active or inactive.

 Auto-link time interval
                The time, in minutes, that the LAN Network Manager program
                should wait between attempts to link to bridges that are
                defined to be automatically linked.

 Reporting link status current
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program is currently defined as
                controlling or observing.

 Reporting link status for next startup or restart
                Which reporting link the LAN Network Manager program should use
                the next time it is started or restarted.

 Password
                The password for the selected reporting link.

 Records in Bridge Performance Table per bridge; current maximum
                The current maximum number of records per bridge in the
                bridge-performance table.

 Records in Bridge Performance Table per bridge; maximum for next startup or
 restart
                The maximum number of records per bridge in the bridge
                performance table for the next time the LAN Network Manager
                program is started or restarted.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Automatic bridge link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether to activate the automatic bridge link, which causes the LAN
Network Manager program to attempt to maintain a communication link with any
defined bridge with Automatic bridge link set to Yes. The LAN Network Manager
program tries to re-establish a link at the interval you specify.

Select Inactive if you do not want the LAN Network Manager program to try to
re-establish a link when communication with a bridge is lost, regardless of the
bridge's Automatic bridge link setting. You can also set the link to Inactive
to isolate a particular ring for problem determination. This prevents the
bridges from automatically relinking.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Auto-link time interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of minutes (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program is to
wait between attempts to link defined bridges with Automatic bridge link set to
Yes.

The default is 4 minutes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Reporting link status for next startup or restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the reporting link to use for the next startup or restart of the LAN
Network Manager program.

Select one of the following:

 o Controlling (the default)
 o Observing 1
 o Observing 2
 o Observing 3.

 A controlling reporting link authorizes the LAN Network Manager program to
 change bridge-configuration parameters and to disable and enable bridge
 functions.

 An observing reporting link authorizes the LAN Network Manager program to
 perform all network management functions except those restricted to the
 controlling link. The restricted functions include:

 o Removing adapters from a ring

 o Changing certain bridge configuration parameters, such as those affecting
   frame forwarding, single-route broadcast, and enabled functional addresses.

 o Enabling or disabling certain bridge functions

 o Sending registration requests to Controlled Access Units (CAUs).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Reporting link status password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the password of the selected reporting link. The password must match
the bridge's password for this reporting link.  If the passwords do not match,
the LAN Network Manager program cannot link to any bridges.

The initial reporting link password for the LAN Network Manager program and for
the bridge is 00000000.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Maximum records for next startup or restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum number of records (1-9999) per bridge to maintain in the
bridge-performance table at the next startup or restart of the LAN Network
Manager program.  If the maximum is exceeded, the LAN Network Manager program
writes the next entry over the oldest record for that bridge. The maximum
number of entries in the bridge performance table is equal to the maximum
number of records per bridge multiplied by the maximum number of bridges that
have been linked with performance notification turned on.

Use the CHKDSK command to ensure that you have adequate disk space before
setting this number to a very large value or requesting performance
notifications from a large number of bridges.

Requesting a large reduction in the number of records per bridge can cause a
temporary delay, during which the OS/2 Database Manager reorganizes the
database to reflect the new value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Host parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the host connection (if any) to use for the next startup of the LAN
Network Manager program, select Host parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu
of the System Parameters window.

The Host Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Host Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the host connection for the next startup or restart of the LAN
Network Manager program, select Host parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu
of the System Parameters window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Current host connection
                The type of host connection, if any, that is currently defined.

 Current service point name
                The service point name, if OS/2(T) is currently defined as the
                type of host connection.

 Host connection for next startup or restart
                The type of host connection to establish the next time the LAN
                Network Manager program is started or restarted.

 OS/2 service point name
                The service point name used by the NetView(T) program, if OS/2
                is defined as the host connection for the next startup or
                restart.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Host connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the type of host connection for the next startup or restart of the LAN
Network Manager program.  You can specify one of the following:

 o None

 o OS/2

   If you select an OS/2 connection, enter a name in the OS/2 service point
   name field.

 o NetView/PC.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Service point name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you select an OS/2 host connection on the Host Parameters window, enter a
service point name.  This name is the physical unit (PU) name assigned in the
VTAM major node for this OS/2 station to communicate with the NetView host. It
should be defined as the PU in the SNA Base Profile configuration of the OS/2
Communications Manager.

The service-point name can be 1-8 characters, in any combination of the letters
A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $, and %. You can type letters
in lowercase, but the LAN Network Manager program converts all lowercase
entries to uppercase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Miscellaneous parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change other parameters associated with the operation of the LAN Network
Manager program, select Miscellaneous parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu
of the System Parameters window. For example, you can change parameters such as
response time-out, tracing authorization, adapter monitoring, automatic retry
on beaconing, and the maximum number of events in the event log.

The Miscellaneous Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Miscellaneous Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define miscellaneous parameters for the LAN Network Manager program, select
Miscellaneous parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System
Parameters window.

This window contains the following fields:

 LAN name
                The name of the local LAN segment.

 Response timeout (ss)
                The time, in seconds, that the LAN Network Manager program
                waits for a response before timing out when communicating with
                an adapter or device on a remote LAN segment.

 Tracing authorization
                The adapters that are authorized for tracing.

 Auto retry on beaconing
                Whether the adapter automatically attempts to reopen when the
                ring is beaconing.

 Retry interval
                The interval, in minutes, at which the adapter attempts to
                reopen when the ring is beaconing.

 Number of retries
                The maximum number of times that the adapter attempts to reopen
                when the ring is beaconing.

 Adapter monitoring
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors those adapters
                that are defined to be monitored.

 Retries before monitor alert
                The maximum number of times that the LAN Network Manager
                program sends a test frame to a station without receiving a
                response before generating an alert.

 Configuration monitor age-out
                The time, in days, that the LAN Network Manager program allows
                an inactive adapter to remain in the database.

 Configuration monitor resync
                The time, in hours and minutes, that the LAN Network Manager
                program waits between resynchronizations.

 Current maximum events in event log
                The maximum number of events that can currently be maintained
                in the event log.

 Maximum events in event log for next startup or restart
                The maximum number of events that can be maintained in the
                event log the next time the LAN Network Manager program is
                started or restarted.

 Comments
                Your comments about the LAN Network Manager adapter.  The
                comments are displayed on the System parameters window.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAN name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the name of the LAN for which the parameters are displayed. This name
can be sent to the NetView host as a resource name and used as a resource name
in alert details. The name you specify is effective when you select the Set
pushbutton.

The LAN name can be 1-8 characters in any combination of the letters A-Z, the
numbers 0-9, and the characters @, $, %, and #.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Response timeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of seconds (6-99) that the LAN Network Manager program waits
to receive a response from an adapter on a remote LAN segment before timing
out.

The default is 6 seconds.

In the case of bridge adapters, if the first adapter in the bridge definition
is on the remote segment, the LAN Network Manager program makes up to four
attempts to communicate with the bridge.  First, the program sends a frame to
the adapter on the remote segment. If it does not receive a response within the
specified time period, the program sends another frame.  If it still receives
no response within the specified time period, the LAN Network Manager program
attempts to communicate with the adapter on the local segment. If it receives
no response within the specified time period, the program sends another frame.
If it still receives no response within the specified time period, the LAN
Network Manager program generates an alert.  Given this, it could take up to 4
times the number of seconds that you specify in the Response timeout field
before the LAN Network Manager program generates an alert.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tracing authorization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify which adapters are allowed to trace on the network, for that portion of
the network that the LAN Network Manager program controls, by selecting one of
the following:

 All
                To allow all adapters to trace. This is the default.

 None
                To not allow any adapter to trace, even if an adapter is
                defined as authorized to trace. The LAN Network Manager program
                removes adapters that attempt to trace.

 Stations defined to trace
                To allow only the adapters defined as authorized to trace to do
                so. The LAN Network Manager program removes adapters that
                attempt to trace if they are not defined to do so.

 Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program can authorize tracing for the
 portion of the network that it controls. The LAN Network Manager program
 recognizes only IBM Token-Ring Network trace and performance adapters (or
 compatible adapters) as trace adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Auto retry on beaconing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically tries to reinsert
onto the ring when it detects a beaconing condition during initialization.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Retry interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of minutes (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program waits
before trying to insert onto the ring after it detects a beaconing condition.
The default is 1 minute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Number of retries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum number of times (1-99) that the LAN Network Manager program
tries to open its adapter on a beaconing ring before completing initialization.
If the maximum number is exceeded, the LAN Network Manager program completes
initialization and runs with a limited set of functions on the beaconing ring.
The default is 3 times.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter monitoring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether to activate adapter monitoring. The default is Active.

You can monitor any adapter within the managed domain that responds to test
frames sent to the null service access point (SAP) of the the logical link
control (LLC) sublayer.

When the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted, it polls each
adapter that is defined to be monitored. The first time an adapter responds,
the LAN Network Manager program logs an event that indicates that the adapter
is responding. If an adapter does not respond, the LAN Network Manager program
continues to poll the adapter until it reaches the number of retries specified
on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. If the adapter still does not respond,
the LAN Network Manager program logs an alert to indicate that the adapter is
not responding. If the adapter responds as expected during polling, no action
is taken.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Retries before monitor alert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of consecutive times (4-99) that the LAN Network Manager
program sends a test frame to a station without receiving a response before it
generates an alert. If adapter monitoring is set to Inactive, the LAN Network
Manager program ignores this value. The default is 4 times.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Configuration monitor age-out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of days (7-999) that an adapter can remain inactive. The LAN
Network Manager program periodically checks for any adapters that have been
inactive for longer than the time you specify as the age-out time interval. Any
such adapters are deleted from the database-configuration table. The default is
90 days.

If you enter a short interval in this field, the database-configuration table
is verified more often. If you enter a long interval, too many records might
accumulate in the database for unused adapters.

If an adapter is moved from one segment to another, the adapter remains in the
database as being on both segments, until the age-out time interval expires for
the previous segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Configuration monitor resync ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of hours and minutes (00:01-99:59) that pass before the LAN
Network Manager program resynchronizes the segment. Resynchronization enables
the LAN Network Manager program to maintain an accurate network configuration
by querying each adapter or bridge and updating the database tables with
current information. The default is 01:00 (1 hour).

The resynchronization process can be time-consuming for a large network.
Performance degrades if you specify a frequent interval.

The IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program, Version 1.1, does not support all
the subvectors that are transmitted by the LAN Network Manager program when it
resynchronizes the segment. If an adapter that uses the universal-address
subvectors is on a segment linked by a bridge that uses Version 1.1 of the
bridge program, the resynchronization process ends when that adapter is
reached, and the configuration information for that segment will be incomplete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Maximum events in event log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum number of events (1-2000) that the LAN Network Manager
program writes to the event log before it writes over the oldest entry in the
log. The default is 200 events.  This value takes effect the next time the LAN
Network Manager program is started or restarted.

Requesting a large reduction in the number of events in the event log can cause
a temporary delay, during which the OS/2 Database Manager reorganizes the
database to reflect the new value.

To reduce the number of events that the LAN Network Manager program writes to
the event log, you can filter events as the program receives them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify any comments about the LAN Network Manager adapter. You can enter up to
40 characters, including blanks.

If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data
definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field.  Read the
LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility.

Comments that you enter in this window appear on the System Parameters window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Access control parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the parameters that are associated with adapter access on the network
and with LAN asset management that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs), select Access control parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
System Parameters window.

The Access Control Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Access Control Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the parameters that are associated with adapter access on the network
and with LAN asset management that uses IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs), select Access control parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
System Parameters window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Access control
                Whether access control is active.

 Adapter address is unauthorized
                Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if
                an adapter with an unauthorized address enters the LAN.

 Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time
                Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if
                an adapter either enters the network during an unauthorized day
                or time or is on the network during an unauthorized day or
                time.

 Adapter has moved
                Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if
                an adapter that is attached to a CAU moves.

 Adapter is in an undefined bridge
                Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program take action if
                an undefined bridge enters the LAN.

 Disable the lobe
                Whether to have the LAN Network Manager program disable the
                lobe to which the adapter is attached if any of the conditions
                selected above are encountered.

 Controlled Access Unit password
                The password for the CAU.

                Only a LAN Network Manager program with a valid password can
                register with and perform actions on a CAU. A LAN Network
                Manager program that is not registered can only display
                information about the CAU.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Access control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether access control is Active or Inactive.

When access control is inactive and an adapter enters the network, the LAN
Network Manager program records information about that adapter in the database,
whether the adapter is defined or not. In this case, the LAN Network Manager
program considers all adapters to be authorized to access the network.

When access control is active, however, the LAN Network Manager program
verifies that the address of the new adapter is in the database.  Adapter
addresses that are not in the database are unauthorized.  If the LAN Network
Manager program detects an unauthorized adapter, it generates an alert.
Depending on the parameters that you set in the Access Control Parameters
window, the program can also automatically attempt to remove the adapter in the
following cases:

 o An adapter with an unauthorized address enters the network.
 o An adapter enters the network during an unauthorized day or time.
 o An adapter enters the network at an unauthorized location.
 o An undefined bridge enters the network.

 Define all bridge adapters and adapters of critical resources before you
 activate access control.  If you do not, the LAN Network Manager program might
 remove an adapter that you need.  For example, suppose you activate access
 control, and then link to a bridge without first configuring the bridge
 adapters.  If the near adapter is on the local segment, it is authorized.
 However, the LAN Network Manager program considers the far adapter
 unauthorized. Therefore, the far adapter is removed.  If the adapter is
 removed, the link to the bridge is lost.  The LAN Network Manager program can
 no longer manage the remote segment.  If neither adapter is on a managed
 segment, then both adapters are removed.

 To authorize a station adapter, you can add the adapter's address to the
 database by using the Add station function to add a definition or by
 deactivating access control and allowing or forcing the LAN Network Manager
 program to resynchronize the ring containing the adapter.

 To authorize the adapters of a bridge, add both adapter addresses to the
 database by using the Add bridge function to define the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter address is unauthorized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter with an adapter
address that is not listed in the LAN Network Manager database, select Adapter
address is unauthorized, on the Access Control Parameters window. An adapter is
not authorized if its address is not in the configuration table or
station-definition table.

To authorize an adapter, you can add the adapter's address to the database by
using the Add station function to add a definition or by deactivating access
control and allowing or forcing the LAN Network Manager program to
resynchronize the ring containing the adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that enters the
network at an unauthorized time or on an unauthorized day of the week, select
Adapter is on at an unauthorized day/time, on the Access Control Parameters
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter has moved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that enters the
network in an unauthorized location, select Adapter has moved, on the Access
Control Parameters window.

This field is valid only for adapters that are attached to an IBM 8230
Controlled Access Unit (CAU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter is in an undefined bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program remove any adapter that does not have
an address listed in the bridge-definition table, select Adapter is in an
undefined bridge, on the Access Control Parameters window.

A bridge is considered to be an unauthorized (undefined) bridge if an adapter's
functional address identifies it as a bridge adapter but the adapter address is
not listed in the bridge-definition table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Disable the lobe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program disable the lobe of the IBM 8230
Controlled Access Unit (CAU) to which the adapter causing the access violation
is attached, select Disable lobe, on the Access Control Parameters window. If
the unauthorized adapter is not on a CAU and you select this option, the
adapter is removed with a force-remove command.

If you do not select this option, a force-remove frame is used to remove
unauthorized adapters that try to enter the network. Nothing prevents the
adapter from reinserting itself into the ring. If you have not selected any
conditions for adapter removal, this field is ignored.

If you select this option, enter a valid password in the Controlled Access Unit
password field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Controlled Access Unit password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have selected Disable the lobe, on the Access Control Parameters window,
enter the password that the LAN Network Manager program sends to the IBM 8230
Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

Only a controlling LAN Network Manager program with a valid password can
register with and perform actions on a CAU. The password must be 1-8 characters
with no blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define or delete alert filters or to set user filters for alerts that are
sent to the host, select Alert filters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
System Parameters window. You can also change the name and status of a filter
that is defined in a dynamic link library (DLL).

The Alert Filters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Alert Filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define, change, or delete filters for alerts that are sent to the host,
select Alert filters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters
window.

The alert filters are listed in the order in which they are processed, not in
the order in which they are defined. If a user-defined filter is currently
active, the status, dynamic link library (DLL) name, and routine name of the
filter are displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Block/Pass
           Whether the specified alert is blocked (Block) or passed (Pass) to
           the host.

 Alert ID
           The identifier assigned to the alert by the resource that sent it.
           The alert ID is not equivalent to the message number used by the LAN
           Network Manager program. See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a
           complete list of alerts that the LAN Network Manager program
           generates from the alert IDs.

 Resource name
           The resource that reports the alert.

 Alert type
           The type and severity of the alert.

 User defined filter
           The name of the current user-filter program that is active, if you
           specify one.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the alert filters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert Filters Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Alert Filters window, to use the following functions:

 Add filter
                To define a filter, based on alert action, alert selection
                criteria, and resource name.

 Change filter
                To change whether the alert that is defined by the filter is
                passed or blocked.

 Delete filter
                To delete a filter that you defined.

 Set user filter
                To specify the name of a dynamic link library (DLL) and the
                routine used in the DLL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add or Change filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a filter or to change the definition of an existing filter, select Add
filter or Change filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters
window.

If you select a filter first, the Actions pull-down menu shows Change filter as
the option. If you do not select a filter, the Actions pull-down menu shows Add
filter as the option. If you change a filter definition, the only parameter you
can change is the alert action.

The Define Filter window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. Define Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define a new alert filter, select Add filter, on the Actions pull-down menu
of the Alert filters window. A controlling LAN Network Manager program can
define a filter to block or pass an alert to the host. The LAN Network Manager
program processes alert filters in the following order:

  1. Filters with an alert ID and a resource name
  2. Filters with an alert ID only
  3. Filters with a resource name and an alert type
  4. Filters with a resource name only
  5. Filters with an alert type only
  6. User-defined filters.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Alert Action
                Whether the filter being defined will pass or block alerts.

 Resource name
                The name of the resource associated with the alert.

 Alert selection criteria
                The type of alerts to block or pass.

 See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a complete list of alerts generated
 by the LAN Network Manager program.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To add the filter as defined.  The window remains open,
                allowing you to add another definition.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Indicate whether the specified alert is passed to the host (Pass) or blocked
(Block).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the hexadecimal number (8 digits) that is assigned to the alert by the
resource that sent it. The alert ID is not equivalent to the message number
used by the LAN Network Manager program.

The following list displays both the message numbers that are used by the LAN
Network Manager program and the corresponding alert IDs for those numbers:

 Message Number           Alert ID

 DFIPD030                 CEAE5DC1

 DFIPD101                 A9998C16

 DFIPD107                 1A56BAAE

 DFIPD107                 57D16A21

 DFIPD120                 CDB6621F

 DFIPD123                 6D3EF9A1

 DFIPD180                 EEB676C8

 DFIPD183                 91C0A9A7

 DFIPD187                 EE64FB52

 DFIPD188                 68882FCE

 DFIPD202                 2102FCEB

 DFIPD203                 2F36696E

 DFIPD204                 698CCD51

 DFIPD209                 EB61E14F

 DFIPD209                 F5DD263E

 DFIPD212                 3BA03B60

 DFIPD212                 D2E24978

 DFIPD213                 DA7BC09D

 DFIPD213                 9394369E

 DFIPD215                 A676B230

 DFIPD222                 59F32622

 DFIPD222                 EB1D6ABB

 DFIPD306                 608A29AF

 DFIPD323                 F4CB43B4

 DFIPD326                 4F605FC5

 DFIPD327                 56B7ED4B

 DFIPD352                 3CDEF8F5

 DFIPD354                 C1A08052

 DFIPD355                 F7A377AE

 DFIPD356                 668E036D

 DFIPD399                 Extracted from fields within the Alert Transport NMVT
                          vector.

 DFIPD436                 EA97F09A

 DFIPD437                 D74CA4C5

 DFIPD439                 FFF92DB9

 DFIPD441                 E4D9B8CF

 DFIPD443                 B6ED5F5D

 DFIPD444                 CCC2FBEA

 DFIPD445                 F6AD6C18

 DFIPD446                 5E83BF69

 DFIPD447                 0F01EBF6

 DFIPD448                 0F319213

 DFIPD449                 B7446B1E

 DFIPD990                 37ABBCFF

 See the LAN Network Manager Reference for a more detailed list of the alerts
 that the LAN Network Manager program generates from the alert IDs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Resource name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the resource that is associated with the alert. You can specify the
following resources:

 LANMGR
                The name of a LAN network management application, such as the
                LAN Network Manager program.

 LAN name
                The name of the managed domain of the LAN management
                application.

 Ring0xxx
                The segment number of a Token-Ring segment, where xxx is the
                segment number.

 CBUS0xxx
                The segment number of a PC Network segment, where xxx is the
                segment number.

 Bridge name
                The name of the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert selection criteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the type of alerts to block or pass to the host. Whether the selected
alerts are blocked or passed is determined by what you enter in the Alert
action field.

To specify the type of alert to block or pass, select one of the following:

 All alerts
                All the alerts that are associated with the resource that you
                specify in the Resource name field.

 Alert ID
                Only those alerts having the specified ID.

 Permanent alerts
                Alerts that indicate that the adapter that is the source of the
                problem requires external intervention to recover from the
                error.

 Temporary alerts
                Alerts that indicate that the problem is temporary and that the
                adapter will recover.

 Performance alerts
                Alerts that indicate that the performance of the adapter that
                is the source of the problem has been degraded.  The adapter is
                responding more slowly than the established, normal response
                time.

 Impending alerts
                Alerts that indicate that the adapter that is the source of the
                problem might encounter a critical error soon.

 Unknown alerts
                Alerts for which the LAN Network Manager program cannot
                determine the severity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Change filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change whether the alert (defined by the filter) is blocked or passed,
select Change filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters
window. You cannot change any other parameters.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Change
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete all the selected filters, select Delete filter, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Alert filters window.

The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
deletes any filters.

This choice is not available if you do not select any filters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Set user filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the name of a routine that acts as an alert filter, select Set user
filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window. You can also
set the program status to Active or Inactive. See the LAN Network Manager
Reference for information about a sample user-written alert filter.

The Set User Filter window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Set User Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the name of a routine that acts as an alert filter, select Set user
filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Alert filters window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Program status
                Whether the user-defined filter is active.

 Dynamic link library
                The name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the
                routine.

 Routine name
                The name of the routine that acts as the alert filter.

 See the LAN Network Manager Reference for information about a sample
 user-written alert filter.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Program status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether to pass control to the specified routine before an alert is
forwarded to the host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Dynamic link library ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the name (1-8 characters) of the dynamic link library (DLL) that
contains the routine that acts as the alert filter. Do not enter the file
extension (.DLL). This DLL must be in the LM11 directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Routine name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the name (1-31 characters) of the routine that you want to use as an
alert filter.  This routine should be contained in the DLL that you specify in
the Dynamic link library field.

If you set this routine to active, the routine determines whether the LAN
Network Manager program blocks certain alerts or passes them to the host.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Security parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN Network Manager program,
select Security parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System
Parameters window.

The Security Parameters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Security Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable or disable security parameters for the LAN Network Manager program,
select Security parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the System
Parameters window.

If you enable password security, the LAN Network Manager main window is not
displayed at startup.  Instead, the LAN Network Manager icon appears. You then
enter a user ID and password at the following times:

 o The first time that you select the LAN Network Manager program

 o Each time that you access the LAN Network Manager program after selecting
   Secure system.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Disable security
                To disable password security.

 Enable security
                To enable password security.

 Group ID
                The group ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in
                OS/2(T).

 User ID
                The user ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in
                OS/2.

 Password
                The valid password for this user ID.

 If you enable password security, you can also activate the security measures
 immediately by selecting Secure system from the System pull-down menu.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Disable security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To disable password security for the LAN Network Manager program, select
Disable security, on the Security Parameters window.

If you disable password security, the LAN Network Manager program displays the
LAN Network Manager main window after the copyright panel closes during
startup.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Enable security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable password security for the LAN Network Manager program, select Enable
security, on the Security Parameters window.

If you enable password security, the LAN Network Manager main window is not
displayed at startup. Instead, the LAN Network Manager icon appears. You then
enter a user ID and password at the following times:

 o The first time that you select the LAN Network Manager program

 o Each time that you access the LAN Network Manager program after selecting
   Secure System.

 Note:  If you are using OS/2 Version 2.0 and also using the security feature
 of the LAN Network Manager program, set the LAN Network Manager program up so
 that its minimized icon appear on the desktop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> User ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the ID of a user who has access to the LAN Network Manager program. The
user ID must exist in the group ID LANETMGR. If password security has been
enabled at some time during the current session, this field displays the last
user ID for which password security was set.

Your system administrator must use OS/2 User Profile Management Services to
create the group ID LANETMGR and add to this group all of the user IDs
permitted to access the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the password that is defined for this ID in OS/2 User Profile
Management. If the user ID does not require a password, leave this field blank.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Logon LAN Network Manager Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Logon LAN Network Manager window is displayed if you try to access the LAN
Network Manager program after the security measures are activated.

This window contains the following fields:

 Group ID
                The group ID, as defined in User Profile Management Services in
                OS/2(T).

 User ID
                The ID of a user who has access to the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Password
                The password that is defined for this ID in OS/2 User Profile
                Management.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 OK
                To log on to the LAN Network Manager program with the specified
                user ID.

 Cancel
                To close this window without logging on to the LAN Network
                Manager program.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or contextual help for
                a field if the cursor is in a field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAN Station Manager Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify what type of LAN Station Manager information, if any, you want to
save in the LAN Network Manager database, select LAN Station Manager options,
on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window.

The LAN Station Manager Options window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. LAN Station Manager Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify what type of LAN Station Manager information, if any, you want to
save in the LAN Network Manager database, select LAN Station Manager options,
on the Actions pull-down menu of the System Parameters window. This information
is saved for every station (in the LAN Network Manager program's managed
domain) that is running the LAN Station Manager program.  If you select both
fields and if there are a large number of stations that are running LAN Station
Manager, the information that is saved can use a significant amount of disk
space.

This window contains the following fields:

 Personal computer information
                To store information about the workstation, such as the type
                and serial number.

 LAN adapter attachment data
                To store attachment data about the adapter, such as the wall
                faceplate number.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LNM user interface options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the user interface to use the next time the LAN Network Manager
program is started, select LNM user interface options, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the System Parameters window.

The LNM User Interface Options window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. LNM User Interface Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the user interface to use the next time the LAN Network Manager
program is started, select LNM user interface options, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the System Parameters window.

This window contains the following field:

 Graphical interface
                To use the LAN Network Manager program with the interface
                provided by the graphics facility the next time the program is
                started.

 Textual interface
                To use the base LAN Network Manager windows without using the
                interface provided by the graphics facility the next time the
                LAN Network Manager program is started.

 To apply the new interface option, select Exit to stop the LAN Network Manager
 program, and then start the program again. Any changes you make on this window
 will not be applied if you Restart.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Secure system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access when you
leave the LAN Network Manager workstation without shutting down the program,
select Secure System, on the System pull-down menu. The LAN Network Manager
program prompts you to confirm your decision before it activates the security
measures.

This option is not available if security is disabled. You can enable security
on the Security Parameters window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Secure system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To protect the LAN Network Manager program from unauthorized access when you
leave the LAN Network Manager workstation without shutting down the program,
select Secure System, on the System pull-down menu.

This option is not available if security is disabled. You can enable security
on the Security Parameters window.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 OK
                To activate the security measures and iconize the LAN Network
                Manager program.

 Cancel
                To close this window without activating the security measures.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restart the LAN Network Manager program, select Restart, on the System
pull-down menu. During a restart, the LAN Network Manager adapter momentarily
closes and then re-opens.  In addition:

 o All bridges are unlinked and are not relinked unless Automatic bridge link
   is specified in the Bridge Definition window and autolink is set to active
   on the Bridge Parameters window.

 o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter
   used, or maximum events in the event log) are applied.

   Any changes you make on the LNM User Interface Options window are not
   applied if you Restart. To apply the new interface option, select Exit to
   stop the LAN Network Manager program, and then start the program again.

 o The local segment is resynchronized.

 o All Soft-error reporting options set before the restart are lost.

 The adapter closing is a logical closing, which does not affect the adapter
 communications of any other applications.

 The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
 restarts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Restart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To restart the LAN Network Manager program, select Restart, on the System
pull-down menu. During a restart, the LAN Network Manager adapter momentarily
closes and then re-opens.  In addition:

 o All bridges are unlinked and are not relinked unless Automatic bridge link
   is specified in the Bridge Definition window and autolink is set to active
   on the Bridge Parameters window.

 o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter
   used, or maximum events in the event log) are applied.

   Note:  Any changes you make on the LNM user interface parameters window are
   not applied if you Restart.  To apply the new interface option, select Exit
   to stop the LAN Network Manager program, then start the program again.

 o The local segment is  resynchronized.

 o All Soft-error reporting options set before the restart are lost.

 The adapter closing is a logical closing, which does not affect the adapter
 communications of any other applications.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 OK
                To restart the LAN Network Manager program.

 Cancel
                To close this window without restarting the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Help
                To display extended help for this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To stop the LAN Network Manager program and terminate all network management
operations, select Exit, on the System pull-down menu.

The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
stops.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To stop the LAN Network Manager program and terminate all network management
operations, select Exit, on the System pull-down menu.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 OK
                To exit the LAN Network Manager program.

 Cancel
                To close this window without exiting the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Help
                To display extended help for this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select File, from a view, to use one of the following functions:

 Save
      To save the view.

      This option is not available for the CAU level view.

 Print
      To print or plot a copy of the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To save a new view or save modifications to a view that you previously saved,
select Save, on the File pull-down menu.

If you save a network level view, the view is saved with a file name of
NET.VIE.

If you save a segment level view, the view is saved with a file name of
SEGxxx.VIE, where xxx indicates the segment number.

If this view has already been saved, a message is displayed to warn you that
this view will overwrite the existing one.

If you recreate the view or refresh the configuration, the LAN Network Manager
program automatically overwrites the save file. This option is not available
for the CAU level view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select
Print, on the File pull-down menu. When you select Print, the Print Options
window appears.  In this window, you can specify print options and the print
destination.

While you are printing, the Print pull-down choice changes to Stop printing.
You can stop the print by selecting Stop printing.

If you move the view, change the size of the view, or change an object in the
view, the view window will not show the changes until the print is completed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print or plot a copy of the displayed portion of the current view, select
Print, on the File pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Destination
                A scrollable list of the possible print destinations.

 Fill Nodes
                Whether the nodes should be filled when the view is printed.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Print
                To close the window and print the view with the specified
                options.

 Printer Setup
                To specify more print options, such as the type of form to use,
                the print quality, and form-feed control.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Fill Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want the inside area of the node symbol filled in with color or a
pattern when you print the view, select the Fill Nodes check box, on the Print
Options window. The pattern or color with which a node is filled indicates its
status or its type.

If you do not need this type of information, you can save printing time by not
filling the nodes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Destination ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this window, select one of the listed destinations to indicate where you
want the print output sent. Each destination is a printer or plotter that is
defined to the OS/2(T) program through Print Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Printer Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this window, select the printer options, such as paper size, orientation,
and other options that are supported by the printer.

This window is provided by the OS/2 Print Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit, from a view, to use the following functions:

 Undo
      To cancel the last edit change you made to the view since you opened or
      saved it.

 Undo last x changes
      To cancel the most recent series of editing changes that you made to the
      view.

 Select object types
      To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text, or
      tackpoints) in the current view.

 Deselect all
      To deselect everything that you selected in the view, including objects
      or a region.

 Select objects in region
      To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text,
      tackpoints) in the region within a selection box.

 Add background picture
      To add a background picture to the view.

 Delete background picture
      To remove a background picture from the view.

 Add text/tackpoints
      To add text or tackpoints to the view.

 Stop adding text/tackpoints
      To exit Add text/tackpoints mode.

 Delete text/tackpoints
      To remove text or tackpoints from the view.

 Modify text
      To change text that you have added to the view.

 Move
      To move a selected object (node, text, or tackpoints) or a selected
      region of objects into another location in the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cancel the most recent editing change you made to the view, select Undo, on
the Edit pull-down menu. Undo displays the most recent editing function. For
example, if Move was your last editing change, the choice on the Edit pull-down
menu is Undo move.

You can continue to use Undo to step backwards through the editing changes you
made to the view and cancel each change.

Undo cancels only those changes that you made to the view by using the options
from the Edit pull-down menu. You cannot select Undo until you make an editing
change to the view.

Undo does not cancel editing changes after you save a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Undo last x changes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cancel the most recent series of editing changes that you made to the view,
select Undo last x changes, on the Edit pull-down menu. The x in the menu
choice indicates the number of changes that you can undo.  At any given time,
the LAN Network Manager program recalls a maximum of 20 editing changes.

If you zoom in on the view and select Undo last x changes, you cancel all the
editing changes to the entire view, whether or not the affected objects are
visible in the area to which you zoomed.

You cannot select Undo last x changes until you make at least one editing
change to the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Select object types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types,
on the Edit pull-down menu. The Select Object Types window appears.

You can select one or more of the following types of objects:

 o Nodes
 o Links
 o Free Text
 o Tackpoints.

 Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the
 objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects,
 and then deselect the objects you do not want selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Select Object Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of objects in the view, choose Select object types,
on the Edit pull-down menu.

In this window, select one or more of the following:

 o Nodes
 o Links
 o Free Text
 o Tackpoints.

 Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of the
 objects in a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects,
 then deselect the objects you do not want selected.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Select
                To close this window and cause the specified object types to be
                selected.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the nodes in the view, select Nodes, on the Select Object Types
window. When you select nodes, you automatically select any text that the LAN
Network Manager program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the links in the view, select Links, on the Select Object Types
window. When you select links, you automatically select any text that the LAN
Network Manager program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Free Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the text in the view, select Free Text, on the Select Object
Types window. This selects the text that you have added to the view, not the
text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the tackpoints in the view, select Tackpoints, on the Select
Object Types window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Deselect all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To deselect everything that you selected in the view, including objects and
regions, select Deselect all, on the Edit pull-down menu. Deselect all is not
available unless you have selected one or more objects or a region.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Select objects in region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of the objects in a defined region, select a region
in the view, and then choose Select objects in a region, on the Edit pull-down
menu.

The Select Objects in Region window appears.  You can select one or more of the
following from the specified region:

 o Nodes
 o Links
 o Free Text
 o Tackpoints.

 Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of
 objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region,
 then deselect the individual objects that you do not want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Select Objects in Region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select one or more types of the objects in a defined region, select a region
in the view, and then choose Select objects in a region, on the Edit pull-down
menu.

In this window, choose one or more types of objects to select from the selected
region.

You can choose the following from the specified region:

 o Nodes
 o Links
 o Free Text
 o Tackpoints.

 Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of
 objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region,
 then deselect the individual objects that you do not want.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Select
                To close this window and cause the specified object types to be
                selected.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the nodes in the specified region, select Nodes, on the Select
Objects in Region window. When you select nodes, you automatically select any
text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the links in the specified region, select Links, on the Select
Objects in Region window. When you select links, you automatically select any
text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Free text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the text within the specified region, select Free Text, on the
Select Objects in Region window. This selects the text that you added to the
view, not the text that the LAN Network Manager program provides for resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select all the tackpoints in the selected region, select Tackpoints, on the
Select Objects in Region window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add background picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a background picture to a view, select Add background picture, on the
Edit pull-down menu. The Add Background Picture window appears.  This window
allows you to select the background picture you want to add to the view. Any
valid OS/2(T) metafile can be added as a background picture.

You can create a selection box in which to add the background picture.

If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the
center of the view. The picture is placed inside the selection box and behind
all view information.  When the picture is initially placed, it will be
selected, and you can move or change the size of the selection box at this
time.  After you complete any adjustments to the picture, click inside the
selection box to deselect the picture and add it to the view.  After you add
the background picture, you cannot directly select it or otherwise manipulate
it.

You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view,
or with Delete background picture.

You can add only one background picture to a view. To use a different
background picture, first remove the current picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Add Background Picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a background picture to a view, select Add background picture, on the
Edit pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Open filename
                The search criteria for a list of possible background pictures.

 Type of file
                The type of file for a list of possible background pictures.

 Drive
                The drive that the LAN Network Manager program searches for the
                file name.

 File
                The list of possible files that meet the search criteria.

 Directory
                The list of possible directories in the specified drive.

 Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or
 double-click on the name of the background picture.

 You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view,
 or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a
 background picture.

 You can add only one background picture to a view.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To close this window and cause the specified background picture
                to be added to the view.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Open filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the file name of the background picture or enter search criteria.  You
can use an asterisk (*) as a wildcard in your search criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Type of file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a type of file from the list or use the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the drive, or select a drive from the list, to specify which drive the
LAN Network Manager program searches for the file that you specify in the Open
filename field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a file from the list of files that satisfies the search criteria in the
Open filename field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a subdirectory from the list of subdirectories in the current directory
on the current disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Delete background picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove a background picture that you have added to a view, select Delete
background picture, on the Edit pull-down menu.

You can also remove a background picture with Undo if you have not saved the
view. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture.

Delete background picture is available only when a view has a background
picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add text/tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add text or tackpoints to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit
pull-down menu. A cascading menu is displayed.

Select one of the following from the cascading menu:

 o Free Text
 o Tackpoints.

 Select the location in the view in which to place the object.

 To exit Add text/tackpoints mode, do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key
 o Double-click mouse button 2
 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Free Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add text to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu,
and then select Free Text from the cascading menu.

When you select Free Text, the pointer changes into an I-beam pointer:

To identify where you want to add the new text, move the I-beam pointer to the
location, and click mouse button 1 or press the spacebar. The Add Text window
appears.

You remain in Add text until you do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu.

 You can remove text by using Undo, if you have not saved the changes, or
 Delete text/tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Add Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add text to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu,
and then select Free Text from the cascading menu.

This window contains the following field:

 Text
                The text to be added to the view.

 When you select Free Text, the mouse pointer becomes an I-beam pointer.  The
 text is added where you position the I-beam pointer. To add more text, move
 the I-beam pointer to the end of the text or to a position below it.  Then
 click mouse button 1 or press the spacebar. This window appears again.

 To exit Add text entirely, first select Cancel to remove the window, then do
 one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2
 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To add the text to the view where you positioned the I-beam
                pointer.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter up to 511 characters of text, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Add tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add tackpoints to a view, select Add text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down
menu, and then select Tackpoints from the cascading menu. You can use
tackpoints to bend the links in your views.

When you select Add tackpoints, the mouse pointer changes to an illegal pointer
until you move the pointer over a link. Then the pointer changes into a
tackpoint pointer .

To add tackpoints:

  1. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position on the link where you want the
     tackpoint.

  2. Click mouse button 1, and drag the mouse to position the tackpoint. The
     link bends as you move the tackpoint.

  3. When the tackpoint is in the correct position, release the mouse button to
     set the tackpoint in place.

  4. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view.

 The following is an example of a view with two links, each containing a single
 tackpoint. The tackpoints are represented by small, white squares. Tackpoints
 are not normally visible unless the links they are contained in are selected.

 You remain in Add tackpoints until you do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding text/tackpoints from the Edit pull-down menu.

 You can also use the keyboard to add tackpoints.

 After you add a tackpoint, you can move it or delete it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Moving and deleting tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select a tackpoint, first select the link it is in. A tackpoint appears in
the link as a white square. Then select the tackpoint you want to manipulate.
This deselects the link and leaves only the tackpoint selected.  You can then
manipulate the tackpoint.

To move a tackpoint, select it, click and hold mouse button 2, and drag the
mouse until you move the tackpoint to its new location.

To delete a tackpoint, do one of the following:

 o Select the tackpoints individually or all at once, and delete them by
   selecting Delete text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu.

 o Select Undo add, on the Edit pull-down menu, to delete the tackpoints you
   added, one at a time, beginning with the most recently added one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Stop adding text/tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To exit Add text/tackpoints mode, select Stop adding text/tackpoints, on the
Edit pull-down menu.

You can also exit Add text/tackpoints mode by pressing the Esc key or
double-clicking on mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Delete text/tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To remove text or tackpoints that you added to a view, select the text or
tackpoint, and then select Delete text/tackpoints, on the Edit pull-down menu.

You can delete text or tackpoints individually, or you can delete all the text
or tackpoints in a selected region.

If you accidentally delete one or more objects from a view, you can retrieve
them in one of the following ways:

 o Select Undo clear/delete, on the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the
   deletions, one by one, beginning with the most recent.

 o Select Undo last x changes, on the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the latest
   series of editing changes you have made to the view. At any given time, the
   LAN Network Manager program recalls a maximum of 20 editing changes.

 o Select Close from the system menu and do not save the editing session.  This
   cancels all the editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the
   view.

 You can delete only text that you have added to the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Modify text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To revise existing text that you added, select Modify text, on the Edit
pull-down menu.

To modify text, first select the text you want to modify.

The Modify text window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Modify Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To make changes to existing text that you added, select the text you want to
modify, and then select Modify text, on the Edit pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Text
                The text to be modified.
 You can type over the existing text or add more text.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Modify
                To change the selected text.

 Cancel
                To close this window without modifying the text.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter your changes to the text.  You can enter or change up to 511 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move a selected object or a selected region of objects to a different
location in a view, select Move, on the Edit pull-down menu. To use Move, first
select an object or a region.

You can move nodes, text, and tackpoints, individually or all at once in a
selected region. The two methods for moving objects or regions are:

 o Using Move

 o Dragging the object or region with mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Moving an object by selecting move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move an object by selecting Move from the pull-down menu:

  1. Select the object or region that you want to move.

  2. Select Move from the Edit pull-down menu. A box appears around the
     selected object or region, with a move pointer inside it.

  3. Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the object or region of
     objects.  The box moves with the mouse pointer. To move the mouse pointer
     and selection box, use either the mouse or the mouse pointer movement keys
     on the keyboard.

  4. When you have the box at the new location, either click mouse button 2 or
     press the spacebar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Moving an object by dragging it ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To move an object by dragging it:

  1. Position the mouse pointer on the object or region you want to move. Press
     and hold down mouse button 2. A box appears around the object or region,
     with a move pointer inside it.

  2. While holding down the button, drag the box to the new location.

  3. Release the mouse button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View to use the following functions:

 Segment level
      To view all the stations and IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs)
      attached directly to a segment.  Stations attached to the segment through
      a CAU are not displayed.

 Segment level-hide CAU
      To view all the stations on the selected segment, whether or not the
      stations are attached to a CAU.

 CAU level
      To view a selected CAU and the stations that are attached to it. This
      option is not available from the network level view or from a CAU level
      view.

 Zoom
      To magnify or reduce a specific area of the view. This option is not
      available from a CAU level view.

 Find
      To locate a node or link in a view.

 Subnet
      To display all the resources that are attached up to 9 links away from a
      specific node. This option is not available from a segment level view or
      from a CAU level view.

 Show all
      To redisplay all objects hidden by Subnet. This option is not available
      from a segment level view or from a CAU level view.

 Refresh configuration
      To display all resources in the view, showing any new configuration
      information.

 Refresh status
      To update the view with current information for a selected node or link.

 Recreate view
      To have the LAN Network Manager program recreate the view according to
      its own layout facility. This option is not available from a CAU level
      view.

 Display labels
      To specify which text labels to display at a specific zoom level or on a
      specific CAU level view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a view of all the stations and IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs) that are directly attached to the segment, select a segment, and then
select one of the following:

 o Segment level, on the View pull-down menu

 o The View pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 The Segment Level View window is displayed.  Stations that are attached to the
 segment through a CAU are not displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment level-hide CAU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a view of all the stations on the selected segment, whether or not
the stations are attached to the segment through an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled
Access Unit (CAU), select a segment, and then select Segment level-hide CAU, on
the View pull-down menu.

The Segment Level View window is displayed.

If you select Segment level-hide CAU, the primary-in (PI) and primary-out (PO)
adapters of the CAU are displayed, in addition to the station adapters that are
attached to the CAU.  If you select the PI or PO adapter of the CAU, the
Profile function and the Resource information/status function show only station
information for that adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a view of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the
stations that are attached to it, select the CAU, and then select one of the
following:

 o CAU level, on the View pull-down menu

 o The View pushbutton, on the CAU Information/Status window.

 The CAU Level View window is displayed.

 If you open a segment level view by selecting Segment level-hide CAU on the
 View pull-down menu, you cannot select a CAU.  In this case, do one of the
 following before trying to generate a CAU level view:

 o Close the view and reopen it by selecting Segment level on the View
   pull-down menu.

 o Use the Find function to locate the CAU.

 This option is not available from the network level view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Zoom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To magnify or reduce a specific area of the view, select Zoom, on the View
pull-down menu. A cascading menu displays the following actions:

 Zoom in
                To magnify a specific area in a view.

 Zoom out
                To widen your perspective of a view.

 Zoom to fit
                To adjust the view to display all objects.

 Undo zoom
                To return the view to its configuration prior to the last Zoom.

 Subnet and Find automatically perform zooms.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Zoom in ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To magnify a selected region in the view, select the region and select Zoom, on
the View pull-down menu. Then select Zoom in, on the cascading menu. This is
what a view looks like when you select a region and then zoom-in on it.

When you zoom in on a region, resource labels that were not displayed to you at
the higher level might appear. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource
names, that you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels,
on the View pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Zoom out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To widen your perspective of a view, select a region and select Zoom, on the
View pull-down menu. Then select Zoom out, on the cascading menu. Zoom out
quadruples the display area of the view. This is what a view looks like when
you zoom-out on it. The white box shows where the information in the original
zoom is located in the new zoom.

When you zoom-out on a view, resource labels that appeared at the lower level
might not display. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, you
want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, on the View
pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Zoom to fit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To adjust the view to display all objects, select Zoom, on the View pull-down
menu. Then select Zoom to fit, on the cascading menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Undo zoom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To return the view to its configuration prior to the last zoom, select Zoom, on
the View pull-down menu. Then select Undo zoom, on the cascading menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a node or a link in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu.
When you select Find, the Find window is displayed.

Use the Find function to search for a resource according to segment number,
bridge name, Controlled Access Unit ID, adapter address, or adapter name. To
narrow the scope of the search, you can enter information in more than one
search field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a node or a link in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu.
Enter the segment number, the bridge name, the Controlled Access Unit (CAU) ID,
or the adapter address or adapter name of the resource to be located.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment number
                The number of the segment that you want to locate.

 Bridge name
                The name of the bridge that you want to locate.

 CAU ID
                The identifier of the CAU that you want to locate.

 Adapter address or name
                The address or name of the adapter that you want to locate.

 To narrow the scope of the search, you can enter information in the Segment
 number field and either the CAU ID field or the Adapter field.  This is
 useful, for example, if the same adapter address is present on more than one
 segment and you want to restrict the search to a particular segment. When you
 enter information in a search field, invalid search combinations become
 unavailable.

 When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the resource, and
 that resource is selected. The view level that appears varies according to the
 following criteria:

 o If you are locating a segment, the network level view is displayed.

 o If you are locating a bridge, the network level view is displayed.

 o If you are locating a station:

       - If the station is unique and the station is attached to a CAU, the CAU
         level view is displayed.

       - If the station is unique and the station is not attached to a CAU, the
         segment level view is displayed.

       - If the station exists on more than one segment, a window is displayed
         which allows you to select the segment.

 o If you are locating a CAU, the segment level view is displayed.

 If the resource is not found, an error message is displayed.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To search according to the information that you specified in
                the search fields.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number of the segment you want to locate.

If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the
Adapter field or in the CAU ID field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts
its search for the adapter or CAU ID to the segment that you specify in this
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the name of the bridge that you want to locate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) that you want
to locate.  The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal digits of the CAU's
primary-output (PO) adapter address.

If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the
Segment number field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts its search for
the CAU ID to the specified segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the address or name of the adapter that you want to locate. The adapter
address (12 hexadecimal digits) can be the universally administered address or
the locally administered address.

If you enter information in this field and also enter information in the
Segment number field, the LAN Network Manager program restricts its search for
the adapter to the specified segment.

If you do not limit the scope of the search and the adapter address is found on
more than one segment, a window is displayed from which you can select one
segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate an adapter in a view, select Find, on the View pull-down menu. If the
LAN Network Manager program locates the adapter address on more than one
segment, the Find Adapter window is displayed.

Select the view that you want to display from the list box.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 View
                To display the view that you selected from the list box.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Subnet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all resources that are located a specific number of links (or hop
count) from the selected node, select a node, and then select Subnet, on the
View pull-down menu.

Subnet displays a subset of your network by displaying resources that are part
of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want to display a
subset of your network if your network is large and if there is only a
particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate.

When you select Subnet, the Subnet window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Subnet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all resources that are located a specific number of links (or hop
count) from the selected node, select a node, and then select Subnet, on the
View pull-down menu.

Subnet displays a subset of your network by displaying resources that are part
of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want to display a
subset of your network if your network is large and if there is only a
particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate.

This window contains the following field:

 Hop count
                The number of node-to-node links to display.

 For example, if you request a subnet of Resource A with a hop count of 2, you
 see every resource attached up to two links away from Resource A, but no other
 resources.

 Following is an example of a subnet with a hop count of 2.

 When you redisplay resources, you see any changes that indicate status
 updates.

 The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the view as it
 was before Subnet, select Show all, in the View pull-down menu.

 You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Subnet
                To redisplay the view with the specified number of node-to-node
                links.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Hop Count ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From the list, select the number of node-to-node links to display for the
selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9.

For example, to see all resources up to 5 links away from Resource A, select 5
in the Hop Count field on the Subnet window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Show all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To redisplay all objects that you hid from the view by using the Subnet option,
select Show all, on the View pull-down menu.

Show all displays the Network Level View at the current zoom level with the
Subnet area centered. Select from the zoom functions to return to your desired
zoom level.

Show all does not redisplay objects that you delete from the view with Delete
text/tackpoints. Objects that you delete from the view are permanently removed
when you save the edit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. Refresh configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all resources in the view, with any new configuration information,
select Refresh configuration, on the View pull-down menu.

When you refresh configuration, the LAN Network Manager program automatically
saves the view.

When you refresh configuration, the LAN Network Manager program automatically
saves the view. The program also maintains the current zoom level after you
refresh configuration.  However, if you zoom in on a view and then refresh
configuration, the Undo option is unavailable.

If you select Refresh configuration from a Subnet view, the LAN Network Manager
program displays the network level view at the current zoom level, centering on
the Subnet area.

To have the LAN Network Manager program dynamically update the view as new
configuration information becomes available, select Automatic configuration
refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select On from the cascading
menu. This option remains in effect until you turn it off.

If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager
program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh
configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status
change.  To update the view with this new configuration information, select
Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu.

If an adapter has entered the network since you last refreshed the
configuration, the LAN Network Manager program places the new adapter at the
bottom of the view area. To change the position of a resource in the view, you
can move the object yourself or you can have the LAN Network Manager program
incorporate the object in the view by recreating the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Refresh status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To update the view with any new status information for a node or link, select
the node or link, and then select Refresh status, on the View pull-down menu.
To refresh the status information for more than one object at a time, select a
collection of objects first.

If a resource goes into an error condition that should have been resolved, but
the status of the resource is not updated in the view, you can use Refresh
status to manually update the status for that resource.  This can occur, for
example, if a monitored adapter on a segment does not respond and then you
change the definition of the adapter so that it is no longer monitored.  The
LAN Network Manager program never receives a recovery notification for this
adapter, even if the adapter is operating normally.

This option updates the status for only those resources that are already
represented in the view.  If any adapters have entered the network since you
last refreshed the configuration of the view, you must first select Refresh
configuration, on the View pull-down menu, to display the status of the new
adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Recreate view ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To have the LAN Network Manager program recreate the view according to its own
layout facility, select Recreate view, on the View pull-down menu. This option
deletes any customization that you have done, including background pictures and
the placement of resources you have rearranged yourself.

Recreate view also shows any new status and configuration information.

If you recreate the view, the LAN Network Manager program automatically saves
the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify the labels to display at a specific zoom level, select Display
labels, on the View pull-down menu. The LAN Network Manager program provides
the text and icons that are displayed.

When you select Display labels, the Display Labels window is displayed.  Select
the types of labels you want to display at the current zoom level. If you
select a type of label, you display it for the current zoom level and each
zoom-in level beyond the current level. If you deselect a type of label, you
hide it for all zoom levels.

Save the view before you close it. Then, the labels automatically appear every
time you zoom in to the saved zoom level or to a level beyond that.

When you reduce the size of the window, the zoom level decreases. Therefore,
you might not see the labels you requested.

If you are displaying a view of a large communication network, displaying
labels can clutter the screen and make it hard to read, unless the window is
maximized or unless you zoom in on a particular area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Display Labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide at this zoom level.
Selecting an item displays it; deselecting it hides it.

You can select one or more of the following node labels:

 Segment number
                To display the 3-digit number associated with each segment.

 CAU ID/Node type
                To display the identifier associated with each IBM(T) 8230
                Controlled Access Unit (CAU) and the segment type and speed
                associated with each segment.

 Adapter address
                To display the locally administered adapter address for each
                station. This selection does not affect the network level view.

 Adapter name
                To display the user-defined adapter name for each station.
                This selection does not affect the network level view.

 Icon
                To display any icons that are associated with the objects in
                the view.  The icons for each type of object are shown  in the
                Legend - symbols window.

 You can select one or more of the following link labels:

 Bridge name
             To display the user-defined name of the bridge, which is specified
             on the Bridge Definition window.

 Bridge type
             To display the 4-digit number that indicates the type of bridge.
             Values for the bridge type are:

             x001
                         Bridge connecting two Token-Ring segments

             x002
                         Bridge connecting two CSMA/CD LANs

             x003
                         Bridge connecting Token-Ring to CSMA/CD

             x004
                         Bridge connecting Token-Ring to 3174-Peer.

                         If x = 0, the bridge is a local bridge; if x = 8, the
                         bridge is a remote bridge.

 Bridge number
             To display the 1-digit number that is specified in the bridge
             program.  This number is often used to differentiate between two
             parallel bridges that connect the same segments.

 Not used
             Reserved for future use.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To display the selected labels.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options, from a view, to use the following functions:

 Automatic configuration refresh
                To specify whether the view is automatically refreshed with
                current configuration information.

 Legend
                To display or change the symbols that indicate the types of
                resources and the colors that indicate their statuses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Automatic configuration refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify whether you want the LAN Network Manager program to dynamically
refresh the view each time new configuration information becomes available,
select Automatic configuration refresh, on the Options pull-down menu.

From the cascading menu, set automatic configuration refresh On or Off  The
default setting is On.

Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time
required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the
refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Automatic configuration refresh on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set automatic configuration refresh on, select Automatic configuration
refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select On from the cascading
menu.

Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time
required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the
refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Automatic configuration refresh off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set automatic configuration refresh off, select Automatic configuration
refresh from the Options pull-down menu, and then select Off from the cascading
menu.

If automatic configuration refresh is not active and the LAN Network Manager
program receives new configuration information for an object, a Refresh
configuration message appears in the status area to notify you of the status
change.  To update the view with this new configuration information, select
Refresh configuration from the View pull-down menu.

Depending on the size of your network and its level of activity, the time
required to refresh the view can be considerable, and the frequency of the
refreshes can affect the performance of the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. Legend ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the symbols and colors that are used to represent nodes, links, and
status in views, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. A cascading menu
is displayed.

Select from among the following options:

 Color
                To change one or more of the status colors used in the view.

 Symbol
                To change one or more of the node symbols used in the view.

 Change all to default
                To return the colors and symbols to their defaults.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display or change the colors that are used to indicate statuses in the view,
select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Color, on the
cascading menu. The Legend - colors window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. Legend - colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display or change the colors that are used to indicate statuses in the view,
select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Color, on the
cascading menu.

This window contains a scrollable list of statuses and their associated colors.

Select a status from the list that you want to change, and then select the
Change pushbutton.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changes and display the view with the new colors.

 Change
                To specify a new color for the selected status. The Legend -
                change color window appears.

 Default
                To restore the settings to the default colors. This option
                deletes any customization that you have done to the colors.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Legend - change color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify a new color for the selected status, select the Change pushbutton,
on the Legend - colors window.

Use the three scroll bars to adjust the New color.  For example, to set the New
color to blue, adjust Red and Green to 0 and Blue to 255. For yellow, adjust
Red and Green to 255 and Blue to 0.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Change
                To apply the new color.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Symbol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display or change the symbols that are used to indicate the types of node in
the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Symbol, on
the cascading menu. The Legend - symbols window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. Legend symbols ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display or change the symbols that are used to indicate the types of node in
the view, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Symbol, on
the cascading menu. This window contains a scrollable list of resources and
their associated symbols.

Select a symbol that you want to change from the list and then select the
Change pushbutton.

You cannot change the following symbols:

 o The star that represents the bridges that have been defined but never linked

 o The straight line that represents a local bridge

 o The jagged line that represents a remote bridge

 o The circle with a slash through it that represents a lobe that is in use but
   has been disabled

 o The X that represents a lobe receptacle that is not in use and has also been
   disabled.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changes and display the view with the new
                symbols.

 Change
                To specify a new symbol for the selected resource. The Legend -
                change symbol window is displayed.

 Default
                To restore the settings to the default symbols.  This option
                deletes any customization you have done.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Legend - change symbol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify a new symbol for the node type that you selected on the Legend -
symbols window, select a symbol from the scrollable list, and then select the
Change pushbutton.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Change
                To apply the new symbol.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Change all to default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To return the colors and symbols to the defaults set by the LAN Network Manager
program, select Legend, on the Options pull-down menu. Then select Change all
to default, on the cascading menu.

This option deletes any customization you have done to the symbols.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions to use the following functions:

 Resource information/status
                To display information for selected resources.

 Profile
                To display the profile for a selected object.

 Test segment
                To test a selected segment for data-transfer capability.

 Segment status details
                To display error information and the status for the selected
                segment.

 Link bridge
                To attempt to link to the selected bridge.

 Unlink bridge
                To unlink from the selected bridge.

 Add definition
                To add a definition for a bridge, a station, or Controlled
                Access Unit (CAU).

 Change definition
                To change a definition for a bridge, a station, or CAU.

 Delete definition
                To delete the definition for a selected bridge, station, or
                CAU.

 CAU code update
                To update the microcode in a CAU. This option is not available
                from the network level view or from a segment level view that
                you generate by selecting Segment level-hide CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Resource information/status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information for a selected resource, select a resource, and then
select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu.

From the network level view, you can display information about:

 o Segments
 o Bridges

 From the segment level view or from the CAU level view, you can display
 information about:

 o Other segments
 o Bridges
 o IBM 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs)
 o Stations


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Segment Information/Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information for a segment, select the segment, and then select
Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment number
                The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the selected segment.

 Segment status
                The last known status of the selected segment.

 Segment type
                The type and transmission speed of the selected segment.

 Linked bridges
                The number of bridges on this segment that are currently linked
                to the LAN Network Manager program.

 Ring utilization
                The percentage that is being used of the total
                data-transmission capacity of the segment.

                This information is available only if a station on the ring is
                currently managed by the LAN Network Manager program and has
                installed the LAN Station Manager program, the hardware that
                supports the ring-utilization parameter, and either Extended
                Services 1.0 (ES 1.0), for OS/2(T), or LAN Support Program 1.2
                or higher, for DOS.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 View
                To display a view of the selected segment.

 Test
                To test the selected segment for data-transfer capability.

 Status details
                To display error information and the status for the selected
                segment.

 Events
                To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for
                the selected segment.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window, with any updated information.

 Next
                To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next
                selected object.  This pushbutton is not available if you have
                not selected more than one object or if the Resource
                Information/Status window for the last selected object is
                currently displayed.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Bridge Information/Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information for a bridge, select the bridge, and then select
Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
             The user-assigned name, as defined on the Bridge definition
             window.

 Bridge number
             The 1-digit hexadecimal number that is specified in the bridge
             program configuration file.

 Bridge status
             The last known status of the selected bridge. The statuses are:

             o Normal
             o Not linked
             o Link busy

 LAN segment 1
             The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the first segment to which the
             bridge is attached.

 Adapter 1
             The 12-digit hexadecimal number of the bridge adapter attached to
             the first LAN segment.

 LAN segment 2
             The 3-digit hexadecimal number of the second segment to which the
             bridge is attached.

 Adapter 2
             The 12-digit hexadecimal number of the bridge adapter attached to
             the second LAN segment.

 Automatic link
             Whether this bridge links automatically.  This is defined on the
             Bridge definition window.

 Performance notification
             The interval (in minutes) at which the bridge sends performance
             information.  This is defined on Performance Data window.

 Comments
             Additional information about the bridge.  This is defined on the
             Bridge definition window.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Link
                To attempt to link to the selected bridge.

 Unlink
                To unlink from the selected bridge.

 Profile
                To display the profile for the selected bridge.

 Events
                To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for
                the selected bridge.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window, with any updated information.

 Next
                To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next
                selected object.  This pushbutton is not available if you have
                not selected more than one object or if the Resource
                Information/Status window for the last selected object is
                currently displayed.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Station Information/Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information for a station, select the station, and then select
Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter name
                The name assigned to the adapter in the station definition.

 Adapter address
                The 12-character hexadecimal address of the adapter.

 NAUN name
                The name assigned to the adapter of the nearest active upstream
                neighbor (NAUN).

 NAUN address
                The 12-character hexadecimal address of the adapter of the
                nearest active upstream neighbor.

 Adapter status
                The current status for the adapter.

 Monitored
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors this station
                as a critical resource. This is defined on the Station
                Definition window.

 Trace
                Whether this adapter is authorized to gather trace
                e information. This is defined on the Station Definition
                window.

 CAU ID
                If the adapter is connected to an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access
                Unit (CAU), the ID of the CAU. This is defined on the Station
                Definition window or obtained from the CAU.

 Lobe receptacle number
                If the adapter is connected to a CAU, the lobe receptacle
                number to which it is attached. This is defined on the Station
                Definition window or obtained from the CAU.

 Lobe attachment module
                If the adapter is connected to a CAU, the number of the
                attachment module to which it is connected. This is defined on
                the Station Definition window or obtained from the CAU.

 Authorization time
                The days and times this adapter is authorized to be on the
                network.  This is defined on the Station Definition window.

 Comments
                User comments entered on the Station Definition window.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Profile
                To query the station for its parameters and status information.

 Remove
                To remove this station from the network.  This pushbutton is
                available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network
                Manager program.

 Events
                To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for
                the selected station.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window, with any updated information.

 Next
                To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next
                selected object.  This pushbutton is not available if you have
                not selected more than one object or if the Resource
                Information/Status window for the last selected object is
                currently displayed.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. CAU Information/Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information for an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select
the CAU, and then select Resource information/status, on the Actions pull-down
menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Access unit ID
             The ID of the access unit.

 Access unit status
             The last known status of the CAU.  The statuses are:

             o Normal
             o Wrap RO
             o Wrap RI
             o Wrap RI/RO
             o Inactive.

 LAN segment number
             The number of the segment to which this CAU is attached.

 Access unit location
             Location information supplied by the user.

 Number of attached modules
             The number of lobe attachment modules on this CAU.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 View
                To display a view of the CAU and its attached devices.

 Profile
                To query the CAU for its parameters.

 Code update
                To update the microcode in the CAU.

 Events
                To display the Event log window with all events and alerts for
                the CAU.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window, with any updated information.

 Next
                To display the Resource Information/Status window for the next
                selected object.  This pushbutton is not available if you have
                not selected more than one object or if the Resource
                Information/Status window for the last selected object is
                currently displayed.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. Test segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To test a segment for data-transfer capability, select the segment, and then
select one of the following:

 o Test segment, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Test segment, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window

 o The Test pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 The LAN Network Manager program responds with the results of the test when it
 is complete. If the test fails, examine the event log for indications of the
 problem.

 This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating
 with limited function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. Segment status details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment,
and then select one of the following:

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window

 o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 Status details are available for segments whose status is:

 o Beaconing
 o Continuous carrier
 o Soft errors.

 Status details are not available for segments that are:

 o Normal
 o Wrapped
 o Unknown.

 If the segment you selected is experiencing soft errors, the Soft Error
 Conditions window is displayed.

 If the segment you selected is beaconing, the Beaconing Error Conditions
 window is displayed.

 If the segment you selected is experiencing a continuous carrier, the Carrier
 Error Condition window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. Soft Error Conditions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment,
and then select one of the following:

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window

 o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 If the segment you selected is experiencing soft errors, the Soft Error
 Conditions window is displayed and lists the first 10 adapters encountered
 that are experiencing soft errors on that segment at the time of request.

 This window contains the following fields:

 LAN segment number/type
                The number and type of the Token-Ring segment that is reporting
                the soft error condition.

 LAN segment status
                The status of the LAN segment that is reporting the soft error
                condition.

 Adapter
                The address and name (if defined) of each adapter that is
                experiencing soft errors. A maximum of 10 adapters are
                displayed.

 NAUN
                The address and name (if defined) of the nearest active
                upstream neighbor (NAUN) for each of the adapters listed for
                the segment.

 Errors
                The error count for the adapter. One asterisk (*) next to the
                error count value indicates that an adapter is in
                pre-weight-exceeded condition. Two asterisks (**) next to the
                error count value indicate that an adapter is in
                weight-exceeded condition.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with any updated information.

 Profile
                To display the profile of the selected station.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. Beaconing Error Conditions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment,
and then select one of the following:

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window

 o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 If the segment you selected is beaconing, the Beaconing Error Conditions
 window is displayed.

 This window contains the following fields:

 LAN segment number/type
             The number and type of the Token-Ring segment that is reporting
             the beaconing error condition.

 LAN segment status
             The status of the LAN segment that is reporting the beaconing
             error condition.

 Beaconing station
             The address and name (if defined) of the adapter that is
             beaconing.

 NAUN station
             The adapter address and name (if defined) for the nearest active
             upstream neighbor (NAUN) of the beaconing adapter.

 Beacon type
             The type of beacon reported. There are four types of beaconing:

             X'0001'
                            Recovery mode set

             X'0002'
                            Signal loss error

             X'0003'
                            Streaming signal that is not a claim-token frame

             X'0004'
                            Streaming signal that is a claim-token frame or
                            intermediate detection of hard error.

 For more information about beaconing, read the IBM Token-Ring Network
 Architecture Reference.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Profile
                To display the profile of the selected station.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. Carrier Error Condition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display error information and the status for a segment, select the segment,
and then select one of the following:

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Segment status details, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Segments window

 o The Status details pushbutton, on the Segment Information/Status window.

 If the segment you selected is experiencing carrier conditions, the Carrier
 Error Conditions window is displayed.

 This window contains the following fields:

 LAN segment number/type
                The segment number and type of the PC Network(T) segment that
                is reporting the carrier error condition.

 LAN segment status
                The status of the PC Network(T) segment that is reporting the
                carrier error condition.

 Adapter
                The address and name (if defined) of the adapter that is
                reporting the carrier error condition.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Profile
                To display the profile of the selected station.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. Add definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a definition for a bridge, station, or IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access
Unit (CAU), select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu. A cascading
menu is displayed.

Select one of the following:

 o Add station
 o Add bridge
 o Add CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. Change definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the definition for the selected bridge, station, or Controlled Access
Unit (CAU), select an object, and then select Change definition, on the Actions
pull-down menu. Depending upon the type of object selected, one of the
following is displayed:

 o Station definition
 o Bridge definition
 o Controlled Access Unit definition.

 From the network level view, you can change only a bridge definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. Station Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a station definition, do one of the following:

 o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu, and then select Add
   station from the cascading menu.

 o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration
   List window.

 o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window.

 o Select an undefined adapter from the Stations window or the Configuration
   List, and then select Change definition on the Actions pull-down menu.  When
   the Station Definition window is displayed, the LAN Network Manager program
   fills in the adapter address.

 To change an existing definition, do one of the following:

 o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions
   pull-down menu.

 o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions
   pull-down menu of the Configuration List window.

 o Select a station, and then select Change definition, on the Actions
   pull-down menu of the Stations window.

 If you are changing a station definition, you cannot change both the adapter
 address and the adapter name.

 When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Station
 Definition window appears.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter name
                The symbolic name assigned to the adapter.

 Adapter address
                The hexadecimal address (12 digits) assigned to the adapter.

 Monitor this adapter
                Whether the adapter is monitored by the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Authorize tracing
                Whether the adapter is authorized to trace.

 CAU ID
                The ID of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), if any,
                to which this adapter is attached.

 Lobe attachment module
                The number of the lobe attachment module to which this adapter
                is attached.

 Lobe receptacle number
                The number of the lobe receptacle to which this adapter is
                attached.

 Time
                The start and end times for the time period that this adapter
                is authorized to access the network.

 Days
                The start and end days for the time period that this adapter is
                authorized to access the network.

 Comments
                Your comments about this adapter.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add or Change
                To add or change the definition for this station.  When you
                add, the window remains open, allowing you to add another
                definition. When you change, the definition is changed, and the
                window closes.

                If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this
                pushbutton reads Add.  If you selected Change definition to
                enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the adapter name (1-16 characters). The adapter name can be any
combination of A-Z, 0-9, @, #, $, and %. To avoid confusion between the adapter
name and the hexadecimal address, do not assign a name that is 12 characters
that are a combination of numbers and the letters A-F.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the adapter address (12 hexadecimal digits).  The adapter address can be
the universally administered address or a locally administered address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Monitor this adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want the LAN Network Manager program to monitor this
adapter. The default setting is No.

If you select Yes, also set Adapter monitoring on the Miscellaneous Parameters
window to Active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Authorize tracing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether this adapter is authorized to enter the network as a
frame-tracing tool. The default setting is No.

If you select Yes, also set Tracing authorization on the Miscellaneous
Parameters window to All or to Stations defined to trace.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the identifier (8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU) to which the station is attached. The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal
digits of the CAU's primary-output (PO) adapter address.

If you enter data in this field, also specify the lobe receptacle number and
the lobe attachment module.

If Access control is Active, the CAU ID is verified. If Access control is not
Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU.

If the ID of the CAU to which the station is attached matches the CAU ID in the
station's definition, the station is allowed network access.  If the ID is not
authorized, the station might be denied network access, depending on the
parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Lobe receptacle number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the receptacle number (1-20) of the lobe on the IBM 8230 Controlled
Access Unit (CAU) on which the station resides. This field is not available
unless you enter a CAU ID.

If Access control is Active, the lobe receptacle number is verified. If Access
control is not Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU.

If the number of the lobe receptacle to which the station is attached matches
the lobe receptacle number in the station's definition, the station is allowed
network access. If the number is not authorized, the station might be denied
network access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control
Parameters window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Lobe attachment module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the lobe attachment module (1-4) on the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU) to which the station is attached. This field is not available unless you
enter a CAU ID.

If Access control is Active, the lobe attachment module is verified. If Access
control is not Active, this field is updated with information from the CAU.

If the lobe receptacle module to which the station is attached matches the lobe
receptacle module in the station's definition, the station is allowed network
access. If the module is not authorized, the station might be denied network
access, depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control
Parameters window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Time authorized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From the list box, select the start and end times for the time period during
which the adapter is authorized to access the network, or use the  and 
cursor movement keys to scroll through the possible values. The default start
time is 0000. The default end time is 2400.

To prevent access for an address that is already in the LAN Network Manager
database, specify 0000 for both the start and end times.

If Access control is Active, the time is verified.  If the time is within the
start and end times, the station is allowed network access. If the time is not
within the start and end times, the station might be denied network access,
depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Days authorized ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the start and end days for the time period during which the adapter is
authorized to access the network.  Select the days from the list box or use the
 and  cursor movement keys to scroll through the possible values. The default
start day is Sunday. The default end day is Saturday.

If Access control is Active, the day is verified.  If the day is within the
start and end days, the station is allowed network access. If the day is not
within the start and end days, the station might be denied network access,
depending on the parameters you specified on the Access Control Parameters
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter your comments about this station. You can enter up to 40 characters in
any combination of letters, numbers, and characters (including blanks). The LAN
Network Manager program does not try to interpret these characters.

If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data
definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field.  Read the
LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility.

Comments that you enter in this window appear in the Station Profile window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. Controlled Access Unit Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a definition for an IBM(T) Controlled Access Unit (CAU), do one of the
following:

 o Select Add definition from the Actions pull-down menu, and then select Add
   CAU, on the cascading menu.

 o Select Add CAU definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled
   Access Units window.

 To change an existing definition, do one of the following:

 o Select a CAU, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down
   menu.

 o Select a CAU, and then select Change CAU definition, on the Actions
   pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

 If you are changing a CAU definition, you cannot change the CAU ID.

 When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Controlled
 Access Unit Definition window appears.

 This window contains the following fields:

 CAU ID
                The ID of the CAU.

 CAU location
                The physical location of the CAU.

 Attachment module
                Which attachment module you want to define.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add or Change
                Define the selected attachment module or change attachment
                module information. The Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition
                window appears.

                If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this
                pushbutton reads Add.  If you selected Change definition to
                enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the identifier (8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU). The CAU ID is the last 8 hexadecimal digits of the CAU's primary-output
(PO) adapter address. If you are changing a CAU definition, you cannot change
the CAU ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU location ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the location (1-8 characters) of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU). This is the physical location of the CAU, such as the room number of a
wiring closet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add/Change definitions for attachment module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the attachment module (1-4) that you want to define. When you select
the Add or Change pushbutton, the Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition window
appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add or change the definition of a lobe attachment module, select an
attachment module, and then select the Add or Change pushbutton, on the
Controlled Access Unit Definition window.

Also, you can select Show/Change lobe definition on the Actions pull-down menu
of the Lobe Attachment Module x Details window.

The Controlled Access Unit Lobe Definition window appears. This window displays
the current lobe definition for the selected lobe attachment module.

Type the building and room number for up to 20 lobes. Use the down cursor
movement key () to move forward through the fields and the up cursor movement
key () to move backward through the fields.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add or Change
                To add or change the definition of the attachment module and
                close the window.

                If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this
                pushbutton reads Add.  If you selected Change definition to
                enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. Bridge Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a bridge definition, do one of the following:

 o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu, then select Add bridge
   from the cascading menu.

 o Select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

 To change an existing definition, do one of the following:

 o Select a bridge, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down
   menu.

 o Select a bridge, and then select Change definition, on the Actions pull-down
   menu of the Bridges window.

 If you are changing a bridge definition, you cannot change the bridge name.

 When you select either Add definition or Change definition, the Bridge
 Definition window appears.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name of this bridge.

 Bridge adapters
                The names or addresses of the adapters for this bridge.

 Automatic bridge link
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links to
                this bridge.

 Comments
                Your comments about this bridge.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add or Change
                To add or change the definition of this bridge.  When you add,
                the window remains open, allowing you to add another
                definition. When you change, the definition is changed, and the
                window closes.

                If you selected Add definition to enter this window, this
                pushbutton reads Add.  If you selected Change definition to
                enter this window, this pushbutton reads Change.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the name (1-8 characters) of the bridge. The bridge name can be a
combination of A-Z, 0-9, @, #, $, and %. The character string `Unknown' is not
valid for this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge adapters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the adapter names or addresses for the adapters of this bridge.

You cannot change the information in the bridge adapter fields if the bridge is
linked.

An adapter name is a user-defined name (1-16 characters) for the adapter. You
can define an adapter name on the Station Definition window. An adapter address
is the hexadecimal number (12 digits) that identifies a LAN adapter.  This
address can be the universally defined address or the locally administered
address for the adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Automatic bridge link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links the bridge
when a new bridge definition is added, when an existing bridge definition is
changed, and when the LAN Network Manager program is started or restarted. The
LAN Network Manager program logs a message that indicates whether the link is
successful or unsuccessful.

If you select Yes for automatic bridge link on this window, also select Active
for Automatic bridge link on the Bridge Parameters window.

If the LAN Network Manager program is not able to link, or if the link is
terminated, the LAN Network Manager program tries to re-establish the link
every n minutes, where n is the retry-time interval value defined on the Bridge
Parameters Window. The LAN Network Manager program logs a message when the link
is established.

To stop the LAN Network Manager program from attempting to establish a link
with a bridge, select No. If you select No, the bridge is not linked
automatically or relinked if the bridge link is terminated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter your comments about this bridge. You can enter up to 40 characters in any
combination of letters, numbers, and characters (including blanks). The LAN
Network Manager program does not try to interpret these characters.

If you plan to use the transfer utility to back up and restore your data
definitions, do not use the double-quote character (") in this field.  Read the
LAN Network Manager Reference for more information about the transfer utility.

Comments that you enter in this window appear in the Bridge Profile window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the definition of a selected bridge, station, or IBM(T) Controlled
Access Unit (CAU), select the object, and then select Delete definition, on the
Actions pull-down menu. When you delete a bridge, the line that represents the
bridge is removed from the view.

You cannot delete definitions for bridges to which the LAN Network Manager
program is linked or for CAUs with which the LAN Network Manager program is
registered.

From the network level view, you can delete only bridge definitions.

Deleting a bridge, station, or CAU definition does not delete the profile
information for that object from the LAN Network Manager database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU code update ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To update the microcode for selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs), select the CAU, and then select one of the following:

 o CAU code update, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Update enable, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units
   window.

 This option is available if you select one or more CAUs and if all CAUs that
 are selected are registered to this LAN Network Manager program.

 The Controlled Access Unit Update Enable window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. Controlled Access Unit Update Enable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To update the microcode for selected IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs), select the CAU, and then select one of the following:

 o CAU code update, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o Update enable, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units
   window.

 This option enables the CAU for updates but does not load the program file
 into the CAU.  Also, the option enables a CAU under one of the following
 conditions:

 o The CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager program.

 o The CAU is not registered with any LAN Network Manager program, and the CAU
   has detected the need for a microcode update.

 Under either of these conditions, the CAU then initiates the program update
 from the loader device.

 This window contains the following fields:

 File name
                The name of the program to be loaded, including the path and
                extension.

 Loader address or name
                The adapter name or address of the loader device.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Enable
                To close this window and update the microcode in the CAU.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the name (1-24 characters) of the file that you want to load into the IBM
8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU). Include path and extension information in
the name. If you do not enter a path, the LAN Network Manager program searches
its current directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Loader address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the adapter address or the name of the loader device that contains the
program to be loaded. If you enter a name, that name must be defined in the LAN
Network Manager database.

This field is optional. However, if this field is left blank, the Controlled
Access Unit (CAU) attempts to find the requested file in a device that has a
functional address of RPU. If the CAU does not find this device, it sends an
alert to all LAN Network Manager programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the profile for resource, select the resource, and then select
Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu. Depending on the type of resource you
select, one of the following is displayed:

 o Bridge Profile
 o Station Profile
 o CAU Profile

 From the network level view you can display only bridge profiles.

 This option is not available if LAN Network Manager program is operating in
 limited mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. Bridge Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display status information about a bridge, select the bridge, and then
select one of the following:

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Profile pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
             The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Bridge version information
             The version of the bridge program.  The number displayed is the
             value returned from the bridge and contains 13 characters as
             follows:

             Characters 1-2
                         Common version identifier

             Characters 3-4
                         Common release identifier

             Characters 5-6
                         Common modification identifier

             Characters 7-13
                         Licensed Program number

 Bridge type
             The type of bridge.  Values for this parameter are:

             x001
                         Bridge connecting two Token-Ring segments

             x002
                         Bridge connecting two CSMA/CD segments

             x003
                         Bridge connecting a Token-Ring to a CSMA/CD segment

             x004
                         Bridge connecting a Token-Ring to a 3174-Peer segment.

                         If x = 0, the bridge is a local bridge; if x = 8, the
                         bridge is a remote bridge.

 Routing information
             The route that the LAN Network Manager program is using to
             communicate with the bridge.  If this field is blank, there is no
             route used to communicate with this bridge (the bridge is attached
             to the local segment of the LAN Network Manager program).

 Bridge number
             A user-defined value that uniquely identifies a bridge among those
             bridges that span the same two LAN segments, so that parallel
             bridges can be distinguished.

 Automatic bridge link
             Whether the LAN Network Manager program automatically links to
             this bridge.

 LAN segment type
             The type of port defined by the port identifier.  Possible types
             are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer.

 LAN segment number
             The number of the LAN segment connected to the bridge port.

 Adapter address
             The address of the bridge adapter that is attached to the LAN
             segment.

 Adapter name
             The user-defined name for the adapter address.

 Comments
             Additional information about the bridge, as defined on the Bridge
             Definition window.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to modify the bridge parameters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Bridge Profile window, to use the following functions:

 Configuration parameters
                To display and change bridge configuration parameters.

 SRTB parameters
                To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging
                parameters.  This option is available only if the selected
                bridge is an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge.

 Reporting link parameters
                To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager
                programs that are linked to the bridge and to change the
                reporting link passwords that access the bridge.

 Performance data
                To display performance data for the selected bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Configuration parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display and change the configuration parameters,such as the bridge number,
the automatic link status of the bridge, and the hop-count limit of the bridge,
select Configuration parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge
Profile window.

The Configuration Parameters window is displayed.

If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only
the Automatic bridge link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. Configuration Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display and change the configuration parameters for the bridge, select
Configuration parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile
window.

Parameters that are not relevant to the selected bridge are unavailable.
Bridge aging time, for instance, is greyed out if the bridge does not contain a
transparent-bridging database.

Warning: Changes to bridge configurations might adversely affect the network.
Verify any changes with your network administrator.  If you change the bridge
number or the LAN segment number, relink to the bridge.

If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only
the Automatic bridge link field.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Bridge number
                The user-defined value that uniquely identifies a bridge among
                those bridges that span the same two LAN segments, so that
                parallel bridges can be distinguished.

 Automatic bridge link
                Whether autolink is active for the bridge.  If it is active,
                the LAN Network Manager program tries to maintain a
                communication link with the bridge management server.

 Largest frame size
                The size (in bytes) of the largest frame that is forwarded by
                the bridge or a particular port. This value might be either the
                largest frame that can be transmitted on an attached LAN
                segment or the buffer size restrictions. All-routes broadcast
                frames use 17801 bytes.

 Frame forwarding status
                The frame-forwarding status of the route.

 Single-route broadcast mode
                Whether the bridge is configured for automatic forwarding of
                single-route broadcast traffic.

 Bridge aging time
                The number of seconds, in 10 second increments, used for aging
                out a dynamic entry on the bridge's filtering database after
                its last use.

 Bridge maximum transit time
                The maximum time, in seconds, that can elapse between the
                reception and transmission of a forwarded frame.  Frames held
                by the bridge longer than this time are discarded.

 LAN segment type
                The type of port that defined is by the port identifier.
                Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and
                3174-Peer.

 LAN segment number
                The 3-digit hexadecimal number (001-FFF) of the LAN segment
                connected to the bridge port.

 Single-route broadcast (setting for port)
                Whether the port is enabled to accept and forward single-route
                broadcast frames when the Single-route broadcast parameter is
                set to manual at the bridge-level.

 Hop count limit
                The number of bridges that a frame can traverse.

 Early Token Release
                Whether Early Token Release (ETR) is enabled for the Token-Ring
                port of the bridge when the ring is operating at 16 Mbps.

 Locally administered adapter address or name
                The locally administered address that the bridge should use the
                next time the bridge is restarted.

 Parameter server
                The status of the parameter server in the bridge.

 Error report server
                The status of the error monitor server in the bridge.

 Configuration report server
                The status of the configuration monitor server in the bridge.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Apply
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Filter Definitions
                To view and update the filter definitions that control the
                filter function of the bridge.  This pushbutton is available
                only if the selected bridge is an IBM(T) 8209 LAN Bridge.

 Forwarding  Parameters
                To view and update parameters and databases that are related to
                the various frame-forwarding options, such as message filtering
                and protocol conversion.  This pushbutton is available only if
                the selected bridge is an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the identifier in the bridge-program configuration file. The bridge
number distinguishes one parallel bridge from another. Parallel bridges connect
the same two LAN segments. The bridge number is 1 hexadecimal digit.

If you change this value, relink the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Frame forwarding status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge forwards frames between the LAN segments that it
connects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Single-route broadcast mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether:

 o The bridge determines the single-route broadcast setting for each of the
   bridge adapters (Automatic). This prevents having several copies of a frame
   on the same LAN segment by controlling the specific route that a frame can
   take.

 o The LAN Network Manager program specifies the single-route broadcast setting
   for each of the bridge adapters (Manual).

 You can change the single-route broadcast mode setting for one or both bridge
 adapters. The bridge adapters can have different single-route broadcast
 settings. If the Single-route broadcast field is set to No for a bridge
 adapter, single-route broadcast frames do not pass through the bridge.

 Broadcast frames are not affected by the single-route broadcast setting and
 can pass through any bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAN segment number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies each of the LAN segments
connected by the bridge.

If you change either of these numbers, relink the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Single-route broadcast (setting for port) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether single-route broadcasting is active for each segment.

If you select No, single-route broadcast frames do not pass through the bridge
to that segment.

When you change the setting for the port, the LAN Network Manager program
attempts to change the mode.  The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge does not allow the LAN
Network Manager program to change the single-route broadcast mode for the
bridge.  In this case, you receive message DFIPD456, with a return code of 7.
The setting for the port is changed, but it might be changed back by the
bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Hop count limit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum number of bridges (1-7) through which a frame can pass on
the way to its destination.

If the number of bridges the frame has traversed before getting to the current
one is greater than or equal to the hop-count limit for that port, the frame is
not forwarded on this route.

Hop count applies to all broadcast frames except single-route broadcast frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Early Token Release ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether Early Token Release (ETR) is enabled for each segment. This
field applies only to Token-Ring segments with a transmission speed of 16
megabits per second (Mbps).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Locally administered adapter address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the address or name to use the next time the bridge is restarted for
each LAN adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Parameter server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the parameter-server function of the bridge is enabled.  If you
do not enable this function, no adapter insertion reports are generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Error report server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the error-report-server function of the bridge is enabled.  If
you do not enable this function, the ring error monitor does not report ring
errors to the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Configuration report server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the configuration-report-server (CRS) function of the bridge is
enabled.  If you do not enable this function, the bridge does not generate
nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge aging time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of seconds, in 10 second increments, used for aging out a
dynamic entry on the bridge's filtering database after its last use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge maximum transit time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between the reception and
transmission of a forwarded frame.  Frames held by the bridge longer than this
time are discarded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. Filter Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the filter definitions that control the filter function of the
bridge, select Filter definitions, on the Configuration Parameters window.
There are two types of filters that you can define:

 o Address range filters

   These filters prevent the frames that are originated by specific LAN
   stations from traversing the bridge.  You can filter according to the source
   address, the destination address, or both.  You can also specify the low and
   high address values of the address range for which you want to filter.

 o Criteria range filters

   These filters prevent frames of a particular type from traversing the bridge
   or allow only a particular type to get through.  You can specify the low and
   high address values of the filtering range.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                A user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 LAN segment number
                The number of the LAN segment connected to the bridge port.

 LAN segment type
                The type of port that is defined by the port identifier.
                Possible types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and
                3174-Peer.

 Address range filter definitions
                The frame-filtering characteristics of the identified port.
                Frames with source or destination addresses within the
                specified ranges are discarded by the bridge.  A value of
                X'000000000000' in both the high and low ranges of a filter
                nullifies that filter.

 Source address low
                The low source address for the address range filter.

 Source address high
                The high source address for the address range filter.

 Destination address low
                The low destination address for the address range filter.

 Destination address high
                The high destination address for the address range filter.

 Criteria range filter definition
                The filter characteristics of the identified port.  A value of
                X'0000' in both the high and low ranges of a filter value
                nullifies that filter.

 Filter offset
                The byte offset in the medium access control (MAC) information
                field of the 2-byte value to be compared against the filter
                ranges.  If the value of the 2-byte field is outside both sets
                of ranges, the frame is discarded. The range is 0-100.

 Range 1 low
                The low value of range 1.

 Range 1 high
                The high value of range 1.

 Range 2 low
                The low value of range 2.

 Range 2 high
                The high value of range 2.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

                This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a
                field.  The pushbutton is also not available if you are using
                an observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Source address low ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Source address low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the
hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the low end of the range of source
addresses.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Source address high ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Source address high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the
hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the high end of the range of source
addresses. range filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Destination address low ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Destination address low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify
the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the low end of the range of
destination addresses. range filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Destination address high ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Destination address high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify
the hexadecimal address (12 digits) that is the high end of the range of
destination addresses. address range filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Filter offset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Filter offset, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the byte
offset in the medium access control (MAC) information field of the 2-byte value
to be compared against the filter ranges.  If the value of the 2-byte field is
outside both sets of ranges the frame is discarded. The range is 0-100.  The
default is 0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Range 1 low ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Range 1 low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary
value (0-FFFF) that is the low end of range 1.  The default is 0. If the 2
bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are less
than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Range 1 high ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Range 1 high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary
value (0-FFFF) that is the high end of range 1.  The default is 0. If the 2
bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are
greater than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Range 2 low ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Range 2 low, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary
value (0ndash.FFFF) that is the low end of range 2.  The default is 0. If the 2
bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are less
than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Range 2 high ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In Range 2 high, on the Bridge filter definitions window, specify the binary
value (0-FFFF) that is the high end of range 2.  The default is 0. If the 2
bytes of information located at the offset into the information field are
greater than this value, the frame is discarded (not forwarded).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. Forwarding Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view and change the spanning-tree parameters, select Forwarding Parameters,
on the Configuration Parameters window. The spanning-tree protocol is used by
Token-Ring segments for single-route broadcast messages that are used in the
route-discovery process.  Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 LANs also use the protocol to
allow only one of two or more parallel bridges to forward frames.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Bridge maximum age
                The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the MAX
                Age parameter of the bridge when it is the root or is
                attempting to become the root.

 Bridge hello time
                The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the
                minimum time interval for the bridge to send bridge protocol
                data units (BPDUs) when it is the root or is attempting to
                become the root.

 Bridge forward delay
                The spanning-tree parameter that defines, in seconds, the time
                that the root bridge or the bridge that is attempting to become
                the root bridge spends in the learning state or the listening
                state.

 Bridge priority
                The spanning-tree parameter that defines the bridge priority
                within the spanning-tree hierarchy.

 LAN segment type
                The type of port defined by the port identifier.  Possible
                types are Token-Ring, Ethernet, PC Network(T), and 3174-Peer.

 LAN segment number
                The number of the LAN segment that is connected to the bridge
                port.

 Port priority
                A spanning-tree parameter that defines the port priority of the
                identified port.

 Path cost
                The spanning-tree parameter that defines the contributed cost
                of the identified port to the total path cost to the root
                bridge.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

                This pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a
                field.  This pushbutton is also not available if you are using
                an observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values. This pushbutton is not available if
                you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge maximum age ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the time (6-40 seconds) that defines the MAX Age parameter of the bridge
when it is the root or is attempting to become the root.  The default value is
20 seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge hello time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the minimum interval (1-10 seconds) for the bridge to send bridge
protocol data units (BPDUs) when it is the root or is attempting to become the
root. The default value is 2 seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge forward delay ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the time (4-30 seconds) that the root bridge or the bridge attempting to
become the root bridge spends in one of the following:

 o The listening state, while moving from the blocking state to the learning
   state
 o The learning state, while moving from the listening state to the forwarding
   state.
 The IBM 8209 LAN Bridge can operate in any of the following states:

 Blocking
                The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames and
                does not participate in the exchange of bridge protocol data
                units (BPDUs).

 Learning
                The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames and
                does not participate in the exchange of BPDUs.  If the bridge
                is attached to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment, it updates
                its database with the medium access control (MAC) addresses of
                the stations on that segment.

 Listening
                The bridge does not forward single-route broadcast frames, but
                it does monitor the exchange of BPDUs, in case it becomes
                necessary for the bridge to enter the forwarding state.

 Forwarding
                The bridge forwards single-route broadcast frames and
                participates fully in the exchange of BPDUs.

 The default value is 15 seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number (0-65535) that defines the bridge priority within the
spanning-tree hierarchy.  The default value is 32768.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Port priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number (0-255) defines the port priority of the identified port.  The
default value is 128.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Path cost ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number (0-65535) that defines the contributed cost of the identified
port to the total path cost to the root bridge. The default value for
Token-Ring segments (4 Mbps) is 250. The default value for Token-Ring segments
(16 Mbps) is 63. The default value for Ethernet segments is 100. The path cost
increment is added to the value of the designated cost parameter for the root
port and is used in bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted from this
bridge port.

Automatic single-route broadcast uses the path cost to choose the shortest
parallel path between two LAN segments (the path with the lowest path cost) for
the single-route broadcast path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SRTB parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging parameters for
the bridge, select SRTB parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge
Profile window.

The SRTB Parameters window is displayed.

These parameters apply only to the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge, which enables the
connection of a Token-Ring segment with an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment.  The
8209 bridge supports both the source-routing method of routing data (used in a
Token-Ring environment) and the transparent-bridging method of routing data
(used in an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 environment).  The SRTB parameters affect
the way that the bridge converts the format of data frames as it passes them
from one network environment to another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. SRTB Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display and change the Source-Routing Transparent Bridging parameters for
the bridge, select SRTB parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge
Profile window.

These parameters apply only to the IBM(T) 8209 LAN bridge, which enables the
connection of a Token-Ring segment with an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 segment.  The
8209 bridge supports both the source-routing method of routing data (used in a
Token-Ring environment) and the transparent-bridging method of routing data
(used in an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 environment).  The SRTB parameters affect
the way that the bridge converts the format of data frames as it passes them
from one network environment to another.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 TCP/IP address conversion
                Whether Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
                (TCP/IP) addresses are converted when they are passed from a
                Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network.

 Dual mode multicast conversion
                Whether the bridge transmits two multicast frame formats (one
                in Ethernet Version 2 format and one in IEEE 802.3 format) for
                each frame with a group or broadcast address that is forwarded
                from the Token-Ring Network when Automatic mode selection is
                enabled.

 Use general broadcast frames
                Whether the bridge forwards a frame to the Token-Ring segment
                as an all-routes broadcast frame when the destination address
                is not in the filtering database for a Token-Ring Network.

 Broadcast address conversion
                Whether the bridge converts the all-stations broadcast address
                in a Token-Ring Network frame to the all-stations broadcast
                address of an Ethernet frame.

 IPX support
                Whether bridge support for the Novell Internetwork Packet
                Exchange(T) (IPX(T)) protocols is enabled.

 Automatic mode selection
                Whether the bridge converts an incoming frame to a format for
                the outbound LAN traffic.

 Mode priority
                Whether frames being sent to CSMA/CD LANs should be converted
                to an Ethernet Version 2 mode or an IEEE 802.3 mode.

 Forward LLC traffic
                Whether the bridge should forward non-TCP/IP traffic from a
                Token-Ring Network to an Ethernet Version 2 network.

 Enabled SAPs for LLC traffic
                The service access points (SAPs) for which IEEE 802.3 logical
                link control (LLC) traffic is forwarded when Forward LLC
                traffic is enabled.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Static Entries
                To display the list of static entries for the selected bridge.

 Mapped Addresses
                To display the list of translated addresses for bridges that
                connect Token-Ring and CMSA/CD segments.

 Apply
                To accept the changed information and close the window. This
                pushbutton is not available until you make a change to a field.
                This pushbutton is also not available  if you are using an
                observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TCP/IP address conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bit order of addresses within the information field of the
TCP/IP Address Resolution Protocol/Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP/RARP) command and response frames is to be reversed between a Token-Ring
Network and an Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Dual mode multicast conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge transmits two multicast frame formats (one in
Ethernet Version 2 format and one in IEEE 802.3 format) for each frame with a
group or broadcast address that is forwarded from the Token-Ring Network when
Automatic mode selection is enabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Use general broadcast frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge is to forward a frame to the Token-Ring segment as
an all-routes broadcast frame or a single-route broadcast frame when the
destination address is not in the Token-Ring filtering database.  When this
function is enabled, the frames are forwarded as all-routes broadcast frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Broadcast address conversion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge converts the IBM Token-Ring Network all-stations
broadcast address of X'C000 FFFF FFFF' in a frame to the Ethernet all-stations
broadcast address of X'FFFF FFFF FFFF'. If Broadcast address conversion is
disabled, the bridge (in its normal address conversion) converts the IBM
Token-Ring Network all-stations broadcast address of X'C000 FFFF FFFF' in a
frame to the Ethernet address of X'0300 FFFF FFFF' (which is not an
all-stations broadcast address).

Disable this function when several bridges are connected to the same Ethernet
LAN segment in a backbone configuration.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> IPX support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether support for the Novell Internetwork Packet Exchange(T) (IPX(T))
protocols is enabled.

IPX support enables the transfer of frames in the correct format, through an
IBM 8209 LAN Bridge that contains an Ethernet attachment module, to and from
stations that use NetWare(T) with IPX protocols for communication with each
other.

IPX support also provides access protocol conversion and data-frame-format
conversion for communication across an IBM 8209 LAN Bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Automatic mode selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge converts the incoming frames to a format suitable
for the outbound LAN traffic.  For conversions from a Token-Ring Network to an
Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 network, when the destination type is unknown, the
bridge performs the conversion based on the Mode priority setting.  If
Automatic mode selection is disabled, all frames are converted according to the
Mode priority setting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Mode priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the mode for frame conversions from a Token-Ring segment to either an
Ethernet segment or an IEEE 802.3 segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Forward LLC traffic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the bridge forwards non-TCP/IP traffic from a Token-Ring
Network to an Ethernet Version 2 network, as supported by IBM OS/2 and AIX(T).
If Forward LLC traffic is disabled, the bridge will not forward these frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Enabled SAPs for LLC traffic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the service access points (SAPs) for which IEEE 802.3 logical link
control (LLC) traffic is forwarded when the Forward LLC traffic field is set to
Yes.

The following default SAPs apply to Ethernet Version 2 traffic only:

 00
                Null SAP that the LAN Network Manager program uses when linking
                to bridges and monitoring adapters

 04
                SNA SAP

 08
                SNA SAP

 F0
                NETBIOS SAP

 In addition, to forward frames across an 8209 bridge, the LAN Network Manager
 program requires that the following SAPs be enabled:

 F4
                LAN Network Manager

 F2
                Managing Process

 D4
                LAN Station Manager Resource Management

 FC
                Remote Program Update (RPU) Discovery

 F8
                Remote Program Update (RPU) Loader Process

 02
                Heterogeneous LAN Management (HLM)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. Static Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the pre-defined address entries in the transparent-bridging table,
select Static Entries, on the SRTB Parameters window. These entries are
retrieved from the bridge and displayed in the list.  Each entry consists of
the medium access control (MAC) address or the functional address of a station
on the local or remote Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 segment.

Only a message frame with a destination address that is not in this table is
passed by the bridge to the Token-Ring segment.  If the destination address is
in the table, the frame is discarded.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Current number of static entries
                The current number of static entries that are stored in the
                filtering database of the bridge.

 Maximum number of static entries
                The maximum number of static entries for single-route
                transparent bridging that the filtering database for the bridge
                can accommodate.

 Static entries
                The list of addresses in the static filtering database for the
                bridge.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort by
                To select the sort criteria by which the static entries are
                displayed. This pushbutton is not available if the static
                entries list is empty.

 Add
                To add static entries to the transparent-bridging table in the
                bridge.  This pushbutton is not available if you are using an
                observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Find
                To enter an address or name to locate in the list. When it is
                found, the entry is highlighted in the list. All entries
                highlighted in the list are selected unless you deselect them.
                If the search fails, an error message is displayed.

                This pushbutton is not available if the static entries list is
                empty.

 Delete
                To delete a selected entry from the transparent-bridging table.
                You can select and delete several entries at once.

                This pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing
                LAN Network Manager program or if the static entries list is
                empty.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. Sort Static Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select the sort criteria by which the pre-defined entries in the
transparent-bridging table are displayed, select Sort by, on the Static Entries
window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Sort by
                The criteria by which the entries are sorted.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close the window and sort the entries on the Static Entries
                window by the specified criteria.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the criteria by which the entries are to be sorted.

 Name
                Sort the static entries list by the adapter name.  Any adapter
                address with no name is listed after addresses with names.

 Address
                Sort the static entries list by the adapter address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. Add Static Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a name or address to the list of entries in the transparent-bridging
table, select Add, on the Static Entries window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Static address or name
                The adapter address or name to be added to the bridge's static
                address list.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To add the adapter address or name to the transparent-bridging
                table in the bridge.  The Add Static Entry window remains open,
                allowing you to add another entry.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Static address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the hexadecimal address or symbolic name of the adapter that you want to
add to the static address list for the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. Find Static Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify an entry that you want to locate, select Find, on the Static Entries
window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Static address or name
                The adapter address or name that you want to locate.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To locate the static entry.  If found, the entry is highlighted
                and selected in the Static Entries window.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Static address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the hexadecimal address or symbolic name of the adapter that you want to
locate in the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. Mapped Addresses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the list of translated addresses for bridges that connect Token-Ring
and carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) segments,
select Mapped Addresses, on the SRTB Parameters window.

Some types of bridges that connect Token-Ring and CSMA/CD LAN segments, such as
the 8209 LAN Bridge, can maintain, in memory, a database of translated
destination addresses for each port.  If the destination address of a logical
link control (LLC) frame is in the database of the inbound port, the address is
changed to the corresponding translated address before the frame is forwarded.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Current number of mapped addresses entries
                The current number of address-translation entries.

 Maximum number of mapped addresses entries
                The maximum number of address-translation entries that the
                bridge can store in its database table.

 Mapped addresses
                The current list of address translations that are stored in the
                bridge's database table.  The adapter address and name are
                displayed for the corresponding Token-Ring and Ethernet or IEEE
                802.3 segments.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort by
                To select sort criteria by which the mapped addresses are
                displayed.  This pushbutton is not available if the
                mapped-addresses list is empty.

 Add
                To add address pairs to the mapped address database for the
                bridge. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an
                observing LAN Network Manager program.

 Find
                To enter the addresses or names of the matched pair to locate
                in the list. This pushbutton is not available if the
                mapped-addresses list is empty.

 Delete
                To delete a selected entry from the mapped-address database for
                the bridge.  You can select and delete more than one entry at a
                time. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an
                observing LAN Network Manager program or if the
                mapped-addresses list is empty.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. Sort Mapped Addresses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To select sort criteria by which the mapped addresses are displayed, select
Sort by, on the Mapped Addresses window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Sort by
                The criteria by which the entries are to be sorted.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close the window and sort the entries on the Static Entries
                window by the specified criteria.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the criteria by which the entries are to be sorted.

 Token-Ring name
                Sort the list of address pairs by the Token-Ring adapter name.

 Token-Ring address
                Sort the list of address pairs by the Token-Ring adapter
                address.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 name
                Sort the list of address pairs by the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3
                adapter name.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address
                Sort the list of address pairs by the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3
                adapter address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. Add Mapped Addresses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add address pairs to the bridge's mapped-address database, select Add, on
the Mapped Addresses window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Token-Ring address or name
                The address or name of the adapter on the Token-Ring segment.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name
                The address or name of the adapter on the Ethernet or IEEE
                802.3 segment.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To add the pair of adapter addresses or names to the
                mapped-address database in the bridge.  The Add Mapped
                Addresses window remains open, allowing you to add another
                entry. This pushbutton is not available if you are using an
                observing LAN Network Manager program or if the maximum number
                of mapped addresses has been reached.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Token-Ring address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the address or the name of the Token-ring adapter that you want to map to
a corresponding Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter address or name in the bridge's
mapped-address database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the address or name of the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter that you want
to map to a corresponding Token-Ring adapter address or name in the bridge's
mapped-address database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. Find Mapped Addresses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify a pair of mapped addresses that you want to locate, select Find, on
the Mapped Addresses window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Token-Ring address or name
                The address or name of the Token-Ring adapter.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name
                The address or name of the Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 adapter.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To locate the pair of mapped address. If it is found, the entry
                is highlighted and selected in the Mapped Addresses window.  If
                no match is found, a message is displayed and the window
                remains open. All entries highlighted in the list are selected
                unless you deselect them.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Token-Ring address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the address or the name of the Token-Ring adapter for the mapped-address
pair that you want to locate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the hexadecimal address or the symbolic name of the Ethernet or IEEE
802.3 adapter for the mapped-address pair that you want to locate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Reporting link parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager programs linked
to the bridge and to change their reporting link passwords, select Reporting
link parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window.

The Reporting Link Parameters window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. Reporting Link Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the names and addresses of the LAN Network Manager programs linked
to the bridge and to change their reporting link passwords, select Reporting
link parameters, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridge Profile window.

The controlling LAN Network Manager program uses reporting link 0.  Reporting
links 1, 2, and 3 are used by observing LAN Network Manager programs. If you
are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program, you can change the
passwords of any of the links.  If you change a reporting link password, also
update the password at all of the LAN Network Manager programs that use the
affected reporting link.

The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
changes the password at the bridge.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name of the selected bridge.

 LNM address/name
                The adapter address and name (if defined) of the LAN Network
                Manager program that is currently using that link.

 Password
                The password for that reporting link of the bridge. The
                password is not displayed.  To change a password, type the new
                password for the reporting link.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To set any new passwords that you entered. This pushbutton is
                not available until you make a change to a field.  This
                pushbutton is also not available if you are using an observing
                LAN Network Manager program.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the password (6-8 characters) for the reporting link.

The default password for the LAN Network Manager program and for the bridges is
00000000.  To reset a password that has been modified, enter 00000000.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Performance data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display performance data for the bridge, including the number of frames
forwarded, the number of frames not forwarded, and the reasons why the bridge
did not forward them, select Performance data, on the Actions pull-down menu of
the Bridge Profile window.

The Performance Data window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. Performance Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display performance data for the bridge, including the number of frames
forwarded, the number of frames not forwarded, and the reasons why the bridge
did not forward them, select Performance data, on the Actions pull-down menu of
the Bridge Profile window. You can also view changes in performance data and
set the performance notification interval and frames lost threshold.

If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, you can change only
the Display mode field.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name of the selected bridge.

 Date
                The date that the performance data was gathered.

 Time
                The time that the performance data was gathered.

 Performance notification interval for controlling LAN Manager
                The number of whole minutes that pass before the bridge sends
                performance counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program.

 Percent frames lost threshold
                The point at which the bridge sends an alert to the LAN Network
                Manager program to report excessive frames lost. The threshold
                is frames lost per 10000, expressed as a percentage.

 Display mode
                Whether the information that is displayed when you select the
                Refresh pushbutton is based on the bridge totals or on changes
                in the data since you last refreshed this window.

 Time elapsed
                The time that has elapsed since the performance data was last
                refreshed.  This field applies only if you select Delta in the
                Display mode field.

 LAN type
                Either Token-Ring, CSMA/CD, or Ethernet/IEEE 802.3

 LAN segment
                The hexadecimal segment numbers (3 digits) of the two LAN
                segments connected to the bridge.

                For frame forwarded values, it also contains:

 Broadcast frames
                The number of broadcast and single-route broadcast frames that
                have passed through this bridge.

 Broadcast bytes
                The number of broadcast and single-route broadcast bytes that
                have passed through this bridge.

 Non-broadcast frames
                The number of frames that were directed to a specific address
                on a specific LAN segment across specific bridges and that have
                passed through this bridge.

 Non-broadcast bytes
                The number of bytes that were directed to a specific address on
                a specific LAN segment across specific bridges and that have
                passed through this bridge.

                For frames not forwarded, it also contains:

 Target LAN segment inoperative
                The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge or
                through this adapter because of a beaconing adapter, continuous
                carrier, no carrier, or 16 consecutive collisions on the LAN
                segment of the other bridge adapter.

 Adapter congestion
                The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge
                because of heavy traffic on this bridge adapter.

 Other reasons
                The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge
                because of problems with the frames, such as invalid routing
                information or an invalid frame size.

 Telecommunications link error
                The number of frames that did not pass through this bridge
                because of problems with the telecommunications link between
                two bridges.

                This is applicable only to the IBM(T) Token-Ring Network Bridge
                Program, Version 2.1 and Version 2.2 and above that use the
                remote bridge function. This field is greyed for bridges that
                do not support a telecommunications link.

 For more information about performance counters, see the Local Area Network
 Administrator's Guide.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Apply
                To accept the changed information and close the window.  This
                pushbutton is not available if you are using an observing LAN
                Network Manager program.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with updated total or delta counters.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Ethernet
                To display Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port counters.  This pushbutton
                is not available if the bridge is not an IBM(T) 8209 LAN
                Bridge.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Performance notification interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number of minutes (0-99) that can pass before the bridge sends
performance-counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program. If you specify
a frequency of 0, the bridge does not send updates to the LAN Network Manager
program.

The LAN Network Manager program saves the performance-counter values in the
bridge performance table in the database.  You can analyze this data to perform
such tasks as tracking peaks and trends, balancing traffic flow and workload,
and isolating problems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Percent frames lost threshold ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the number (in the format xx.xx) that indicates the threshold at which
the bridge sends an alert to the LAN Network Manager program to report
excessive frames lost. The threshold is frames lost per 10000, expressed as a
percentage. For example, to request a threshold of 5%, enter 05.00; to request
4.5%, enter 04.50.  The recommended threshold is 3%.

Frames can be lost due to:

 o Inoperable LAN segments
 o Adapter congestion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want to display information that is based on the bridge
totals (Total) or on changes in the data since you last refreshed this window
(Delta).

Each time you open the Performance Data window, the Display mode field defaults
to Total.  You can change the Display mode field to Delta, but this change is
applicable only while the window remains open.  Therefore, selecting Delta does
not cause the Apply pushbutton to become available.

If you select Delta, select the Refresh pushbutton each time that you want to
view updated counter information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 Counters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 port counters, select Ethernet, on the
Performance Data window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge name
                The user-defined name that identifies the bridge.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 collisions
                The number of Ethernet collisions that were detected since the
                last report.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 late collisions
                The number of Ethernet late collisions that were detected since
                the last report.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 CRC errors
                The number of Ethernet cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors
                that were detected since the last report.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 framing errors
                The number of Ethernet framing errors that were detected since
                the last report.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with any updated information.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. Station Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display status information about a station, select the station, and then
select one of the following:

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Profile pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window.

 If the station you selected is not active, or if the query is unsuccessful,
 this window includes information available from the last access to the
 specified station.  The LAN Network Manager program displays a message at the
 top of the window to indicate that the data was retrieved from the database
 rather than from the station itself. This window contains the following
 information for the selected station:

 Adapter address/name
                The hexadecimal address of the adapter and its name.

 LAN segment number
                The number that the LAN Network Manager program uses to
                indicate the LAN segment to which the adapter is attached.

 LAN segment type
                Whether the segment is part of a Token-Ring Network or a PC
                Network(T).

 Adapter options
                The microcode options on the adapter.  Possible values for this
                field are blanks, indicating that there are no options, and
                Ring Utilization.

 NAUN address/name
                The adapter address and the name of the nearest active upstream
                neighbor (NAUN). This field is used for Token-Ring Networks
                only.

 Microcode level
                The version of microcode in the adapter.

 Universal address
                The universally administered address. The universal address is
                permanently encoded in ROM in the adapter at the time of
                manufacture. This field might be blank.

 Group address
                An address that represents the group of logically related
                adapters to which this adapter belongs. A program can send a
                single message to a group address.  All the adapters with that
                group address receive the message.

 Functional address/names
                An address that indicates the adapter's functions, such as
                active monitor or ring error monitor.  An adapter can have up
                to 31 functional addresses.

 Monitored
                Whether the adapter is monitored. Monitoring means that the LAN
                Network Manager program generates an alert whenever the adapter
                is not active on the network.

 Tracing Authorized
                Whether the adapter is authorized to trace.

 Time authorized
                The times of day that the adapter is authorized to be on the
                network.

 Days authorized
                The days the adapter is authorized to be on the network.

 Comments
                Comments about this adapter.  This information is entered on
                the Station Definition window.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information about the
 station and remove the station from the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Station Profile Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Station Profile window, to use the following functions:

 PC Network counter information
                To view performance-counter information for PC Network(T)
                adapters. This option is not available if the adapter is not
                connected to a PC Network.

 Workstation information
                To view workstation information, such as the workstation
                location, for the selected adapter.  This information is
                supplied by the LAN Station Manager program.  This option is
                not available if the LAN Station Manager program is not
                installed in the workstation.

 Attachment data
                To display information about how the selected adapter is
                physically attached to the network. This option is available
                only if the station is running the LAN Station Manager program
                or is attached to a Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with any updated information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PC Network counter information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display counter information for a station that is attached to a PC
Network(T), select PC Network counter information, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Station Profile window. This option is not available if the adapter
is not attached to a PC Network or if the adapter is not responding.

The counters are reset to zero every minute and each time the adapter is
queried.

The PC Network Counter Information window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. PC Network Counter Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display counter information for a station that is attached to a PC
Network(T), select PC Network counter information, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Station Profile window. This option is not available if the adapter
is not attached to a PC Network or if the adapter is not responding.

The counters are reset to zero every minute and each time the adapter is
queried.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
             The hexadecimal address (12 digits) and the symbolic name (1-16
             characters) of the adapter.

 LAN segment
             The hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the LAN segment to which the
             adapter is attached.

 LAN segment type
             The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached and the
             transmission speed in megabits per second (Mbps). The LAN segment
             is CSMA/CD for this segment.

 CRC errors
             The number of properly aligned frames received with a cyclic
             redundancy check (CRC) error.

 Alignment errors
             The number of frames that were received with a CRC error. When
             excessive or missing bits occur during the reception of a frame,
             the frame is misaligned.

 Collisions
             The number of collisions that were registered for the adapter.
             When a frame from a transmitting adapter encounters any other
             signal in its path (another frame, noise, or another type of
             signal), the adapter stops transmitting, and a collision is
             registered.

 Aborted transmissions
             The number of unsuccessful transmissions that were registered by
             the adapter. The adapter registers an unsuccessful transmission if
             transmission stops because of either of the following:

             o The control signal in the adapter is lost.
             o The system is not supplying data for transmission.

 Packets sent
             The number of frames that were successfully transmitted by the
             adapter.

 Packets received
             The number of frames that were successfully received by the
             adapter.

 Resource errors
             The number of frames that were discarded because the system could
             not accept frames as fast as the adapter received them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Remove adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Use caution when removing an adapter from the network. For example,
removing a bridge adapter can have an adverse effect on the network. Review the
functional address of the adapter to determine if it is a bridge.

To remove an adapter from the network, do one of the following:

 o Select the Remove pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window.

 o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration
   List window.

 o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window.

 The Remove Adapter window is displayed.

 This option is available only if you are using a controlling LAN Network
 Manager program.

 Removal of an adapter requires removal support in the station that is to be
 removed.  For example, the adapters in the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
 (CAU) do not support the force remove frame; therefore, a remove request for
 adapters in a CAU would fail.

 Also, some software has built-in automatic recovery. If the end station
 application detects that the adapter has closed, it issues an open adapter
 command.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. Remove Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Use caution when removing an adapter from the network. For example,
removing a bridge adapter can have an adverse effect on the network. Review the
functional address of the adapter to determine if it is a bridge.

To remove an adapter from the network, do one of the following:

 o Select the Remove pushbutton, on the Station Information/Status window.

 o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration
   List window.

 o Select Remove adapter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window.

 The Remove Adapter window is displayed.

 Removal of an adapter requires removal support in the station that is to be
 removed.  For example, the adapters in the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
 (CAU) do not support the force remove frame; therefore, a remove request for
 adapters in a CAU would fail.

 Also, some software has built-in automatic recovery. If the application in the
 end station detects that the adapter has closed, it issues an open adapter
 command.

 This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The hexadecimal address (12 digits) and the symbolic name (1-16
                characters), if defined, that identifies the adapter.

 LAN segment number
                The hexadecimal number (3 digits) that identifies the LAN
                segment to which the adapter is attached.

 LAN segment type
                The type of LAN segment to which the adapter is attached. The
                LAN type can be either Token-Ring Network or PC Network(T).

 Adapter options
                Possible values are blanks or Ring Utilization.

 NAUN address/name
                The adapter address and name (if defined) of the nearest active
                upstream neighbor (NAUN).

 Microcode level
                The level of microcode for the selected adapter.

 Universal address
                The burned-in address for the selected adapter, which is issued
                at the time of manufacture.

 Group address
                The address that represents the group of logically related
                adapters to which the adapter belongs. If an application sends
                a single message to a group address, all adapters with that
                group address receive the message.

 Functional address/names
                An address that indicates the adapter's functions, such as
                active monitor or ring error monitor.  An adapter can have up
                to 31 functional addresses. The list box contains the names of
                the functions associated with the functional address for the
                adapter. Scroll through the list to view the functions in the
                list box.

 Monitored
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program monitors this station
                as a critical resource. This is defined on the Station
                Definition window.

 Tracing authorized
                Whether this adapter is authorized to gather trace information.
                This is defined on the Station Definition window.

 Time authorized
                The times of day that this adapter is authorized to be on the
                network.  This is defined on the Station Definition window.

 Days authorized
                The days this adapter is allowed on the network, as defined on
                the Station Definition window.

 Comments
                User comments entered on the Station Definition window.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Remove
                To remove this adapter.  This pushbutton is not available if
                you are not using a controlling LAN Network Manager program.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Personal Computer information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display current workstation information, which is maintained at the
workstation by the LAN Station Manager program, select Personal Computer
information, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If
there is no response to this query and the current information is unavailable,
the LAN Network Manager program retrieves the most recent workstation
information from its own database.

The workstation information is stored in the LAN Network Manager database only
if you specify the Personal computer information option on the LAN Station
Manager Options window.

This option is not available if the selected station does not have the LAN
Station Manager installed.

The Workstation Information window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. Personal Computer Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display and change information about the personal computer, its attached
devices, and its LAN adapters, select Personal Computer information, on the
Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. This information is
maintained at the workstation by the LAN Station Manager program. If there is
no response to this query and the current information is unavailable, the LAN
Network Manager program retrieves the most recent workstation information from
its own database.

The workstation information is stored in the LAN Network Manager database only
if you specify the Personal computer information option on the LAN Station
Manager Options window.

This option is not available if the selected station does not have the LAN
Station Manager installed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter that is attached to the
                selected personal computer.

 User-defined data
                Additional information about the selected personal computer.

 LAN Station Manager Program version
                The version of the LAN Station Manager program running in the
                selected personal computer.

 Operating system
                The type and version of operating system (OS/2(T) or DOS)
                running in the selected personal computer.

 Workstation location
                The physical location of the selected personal computer.

 Workstation type
                Information (the model name and number) about the type of
                personal computer selected.

 Workstation serial number
                The serial number that is imprinted on the selected personal
                computer.

 Display type
                The type of display that is attached to the selected personal
                computer.

 Display serial number
                The serial number that is imprinted on the display that is
                attached to the selected personal computer.

 Printer type
                The type of printer that is attached to the selected personal
                computer.

 Printer serial number
                The serial number that is imprinted on the printer that is
                attached to the selected personal computer.

 Keyboard type
                The type of keyboard that is attached to the selected personal
                computer.

 Keyboard serial number
                The serial number that is imprinted on the keyboard that is
                attached to the selected personal computer.

 Device 1/Device 2 type
                The type of each additional device that is attached to the
                selected personal computer. The device can be a mouse, a modem,
                a plotter, or a second display, keyboard, or printer.

 Device 1/Device 2 serial number
                The serial number that is imprinted on each device that is
                attached to the selected personal computer.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Apply
                To accept the changed information.  This window remains open so
                that you can access other workstation information.

 Reset
                To return any values to their initial settings.

 Disk drives
                To display a list of disk drives that are attached to the
                selected personal computer.

 Adapter list
                To display a list of the Micro Channel(T) adapters that are
                attached to the selected personal computer.

 Memory
                To display the base, extended, and expanded memory capacity of
                the selected personal computer.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> User-defined data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter any additional information about the selected personal computer. Ask your
network administrator what to enter here. You can enter up to 40 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Workstation location ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the physical location, for example, the building and the room number, of
the selected personal computer. You can enter up to 40 characters, including
blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Workstation serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the serial number of the selected personal computer.  This number is
imprinted on the personal computer. You can enter up to 15 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the type of display that is attached to the selected personal computer.
You can enter up to 40 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the serial number of the display that is attached to the selected
personal computer. This number is imprinted on the display. You can enter up to
15 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Printer type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the type of printer that is attached to the selected personal computer.
For example, the type can be the manufacturer, the model, or the capabilities
of the printer (such as laser printing). You can enter up to 40 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Printer serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the serial number of the printer that is attached to the selected
personal computer. This number is imprinted on the printer. You can enter up to
15 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Keyboard type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the type of keyboard that is attached to the selected personal computer.
For example, the type can be the manufacturer and any special characteristics,
such as support for non-English characters. You can enter up to 40 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Keyboard serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the serial number of the keyboard that is attached to the selected
personal computer. This number is imprinted on the keyboard. You can enter up
to 15 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Device 1/Device 2 type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the type of up to two additional devices that are attached to the
selected personal computer. For example, the type can be the name of the
manufacturer and the model of the device. You can enter up to 40 characters,
including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Device 1/Device 2 serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the serial number of each device that is attached to the selected
personal computer. This serial number is imprinted on the device. You can enter
up to 15 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. Disk List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of disk drives that are configured for the personal computer
and the capacity of each, select Disk drives, on the Personal Computer
Information window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter attached to the
                selected personal computer.

 Disk drive
                The hard storage disks and the diskette drives attached to the
                selected personal computer.

 Capacity
                The capacity, in MB (MB=1048576 bytes), of the disk drives that
                are attached to the selected personal computer.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. Adapter List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the Micro Channel(T) adapters that are installed in the
selected personal computer, select Adapter list, on the Personal Computer
Information window. Any non-Micro Channel adapters in the personal computer are
not listed.

This window contains the following fields for workstation adapters:

 Adapter ID
                The Programmable Option Select (POS) identifier of the adapter.

 Description
                The function of the adapter in the workstation, such as a
                memory-expansion board or a display adapter card.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about the memory that is installed in the personal
computer, select Memory, on the Personal Computer Information window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and name of the adapter attached to the personal
                computer.

                The address can be the universally administered address that is
                encoded in the adapter or the locally administered address.
                Ask your network administrator.

 ROM date
                The date of the Read-Only Memory (ROM) Basic Input-Output
                System (BIOS).

 Base memory
                The amount of base memory, in KB (KB=1024 bytes), that is
                installed or configured at the workstation.

 Extended memory
                The amount of extended memory that is installed or configured
                at the workstation.  This value applies only to DOS
                workstations.

 Expanded memory
                The amount of expanded memory that is installed or configured
                at the workstation.  This value applies only to DOS
                workstations.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Attachment data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. One of the following
windows is displayed, depending upon the type of LAN to which the adapter is
attached.

 o Attachment Data - Token-Ring
 o Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU
 o Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data
 o Attachment Data - PC Network Broadband
 o Attachment Data - PC Network Baseband


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. Attachment Data - Token-Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected
adapter is attached to a Token-Ring Network, the Attachment Data - Token-Ring
window is displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter.

 Adapter number
                The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate).

 Wall faceplate label
                For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems,
                the information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is
                connected.

 Access unit label
                The user-defined label that identifies the access unit to which
                the adapter is connected.

 Lobe receptacle number
                The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is
                attached.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. Wall faceplate label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems, specify the
information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is connected.  The label
usually contains information about the cable between the faceplate and the
wiring closet.

You can specify up to 40 characters, including blanks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. Access unit label ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined label (4 characters) that identifies the access unit
to which the adapter is connected.  The access unit can be an IBM Token-Ring
Network Multistation Access Unit or an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. Lobe receptacle number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number (1-20) of the lobe receptacle to which this station is
attached.

This parameter can be configured by the LAN Station Manager operator.  However,
if this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter is set by that CAU each
time the station is restarted (and the user-defined value is written over).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected
adapter is attached to Token-Ring Network on a Controlled Access Unit (CAU),
the Attachment Data - Token-Ring on CAU window is displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter.

 Adapter number
                The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate).

 Wall faceplate label
                For adapters that are connected to in-the-wall cabling systems,
                the information on the wall faceplate to which the adapter is
                connected.

 Access unit label
                The user-defined label that identifies the access unit to which
                the adapter is connected.

 Lobe receptacle number
                The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is
                attached.

                This parameter can be configured by the LAN Station Manager
                operator. However, if this station is attached to a CAU, this
                parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted
                (and the user-defined value is written over).

 CAU ID
                The identifier of the access unit to which the adapter is
                connected. If this station is attached to a CAU, this parameter
                is set by that CAU each time the station is restarted.

                If the station is no longer attached to the CAU and this
                parameter was not reset by the LAN Station Manager operator,
                you can reset this parameter.

 Lobe attachment module ID
                The number of the lobe attachment module of the CAU to which
                this station is attached. If this station is attached to a CAU,
                this parameter is set by that CAU each time the station is
                restarted.

                If the station is no longer attached to the CAU and this
                parameter was not reset by the LAN Station Manager operator,
                you can reset this parameter.

 CAU registered
                Whether this LAN Network Manager program is also registered
                with the CAU identified in the field that is labeled Access
                unit ID.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected
adapter does not have the LAN Station Manager program installed and either is
attached to a Controlled Access Unit (CAU) or has a CAU ID specified in its
definition, the Controlled Access Unit Attachment Data window is displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter.

 CAU ID
                The identifier of the access unit to which the adapter is
                connected. This parameter is set by the CAU to which the
                station is attached each time the station is restarted.

 Lobe attachment module number
                The number of the lobe attachment module of the CAU to which
                this station is attached. This parameter is set by the CAU each
                time the station is restarted.

 Lobe receptacle number
                The number of the lobe receptacle to which this station is
                attached.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Refresh
                To display the window with any updated information.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. Attachment Data - PC Network Broadband ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected
adapter is attached to a broadband PC Network(T), the Attachment Data - PC
Network Broadband is displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter.

 Adapter number
                The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate).

 Cable ID
                The user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the
                adapter to the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter.

 Adapter frequency
                The transmission and reception frequencies at which the adapter
                communicates.

 Splitter unit ID
                The user-defined identifier of the 8-way splitter or the 16-way
                splitter to which the adapter is connected.

 Splitter TAP number
                The user-defined number of the splitter-tap outlet to which the
                adapter is connected.

 Distribution leg
                The user-defined number of the cable that connects the
                translator unit to the splitter to which the adapter is
                connected.

 Translator unit ID
                The user-defined number of the translator unit in the network
                to which the adapter is connected.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. Cable ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the adapter to
the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. Adapter frequency ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the transmission and reception frequencies at which the adapter
communicates.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. Splitter unit ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined identifier of the 8-way splitter or the 16-way
splitter to which the adapter is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. Splitter TAP number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined number of the splitter-tap outlet to which the adapter
is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. Distribution leg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined number of the cable that connects the translator unit
to the splitter to which the adapter is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. Translator unit ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined number of the translator unit in the network to which
the adapter is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. Attachment Data - PC Network Baseband ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display attachment data for the selected adapter, select Attachment data, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station Profile window. If the selected
adapter is attached to a baseband PC Network(T), the Attachment Data - PC
Network Baseband is displayed.

This window contains the following fields:

 Adapter address/name
                The address and the name of the adapter.

 Adapter number
                The number of the adapter (0=primary, 1=alternate).

 Cable ID
                The user-defined identifier on the cable that connects the
                adapter to the 8-way splitter or the 16-way splitter.

 Extender unit ID
                The user-defined number of the IBM(T) PC Network Baseband
                Extender to which the adapter is connected.

 Extender port number
                The number of the in-port on the Baseband Extender to which the
                adapter is connected.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. Extender unit ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the user-defined identifier of the IBM PC Network Baseband Extender to
which the adapter is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. Extender port number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of the in-port on the Baseband Extender to which the adapter
is connected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. Controlled Access Unit Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display status information about an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU), select the CAU, and then select one of the following:

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Profile pushbutton, on the CAU Information/Status window

 o Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units
   window.

 If the CAU you selected is not active, or if the query is not successful, the
 status displayed in this window includes the information available from the
 last access to that CAU. A message appears at the top of the window to
 indicate that the data was retrieved from the database.

 This window contains the following fields:

 CAU ID
             The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify a CAU.

 LAN segment
             The 3-digit hexadecimal number that represents the LAN segment to
             which the CAU is attached.

 Microcode level
             The level of microcode of the CAU, indicated by:

             o Microcode level
             o Remote Program Update microcode level
             o Microcode version number
             o Microcode modification number.

 Primary in (PI)
             The adapter address and symbolic name (if defined) of the primary
             ring adapter on the ring-in (upstream) side of the CAU.

 Primary out (PO)
             The adapter address and symbolic name (if defined) of the primary
             ring adapter on the ring-out (downstream) side of the CAU.

 Secondary adapter (S)
             The adapter address and the symbolic name (if defined) of the
             secondary ring adapter for the CAU.

 Registered
             Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager
             program.

 Registered with
             The adapter address of the LAN Network Manager program with which
             the CAU is registered.

 Wrap status
             The current wrap status of the CAU:

             Normal
                   The signal is open on the main ring path, and the backup
                   path is being checked.

             Wrap RI
                   The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the
                   backup path on the ring-in side of the CAU.

             Wrap RO
                   The CAU has switched traffic from the main path to the
                   backup path on the ring-out side of the CAU.

             Wrap RI/RO
                   The CAU has removed itself from the main ring.

             Unknown
                   Communication with the CAU is not possible at this time.

 Backup path status
             The current status of the backup path of the CAU:

             o Operational
             o Not operational (the ring is beaconing)
             o Undefined (the CAU is wrapped).

 Diagnostic error code
             The current diagnostic error code for the CAU:

             A1
                  Flash checksum error

             A2
                  RPU loader not found

             A3
                  RPU loader file not found

             Other error codes
                  Read the IBM 8230 Token-Ring Network Controlled Access Unit
                  Service Guide (SY27-0326) for an explanation of other error
                  codes.

 Attachment status
             The status for each module attached to the CAU:

             o Enabled
             o Disabled
             o Not connected.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information about the
 lobe modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Unit Profile window, to use the
following functions:

 Wrap display/change
                To display and change the wrap status of the IBM(T) 8230
                Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

 Module x details
                To display a list of adapters attached to the individual lobes
                of the selected CAU.

 Reset CAU
                To reset the selected CAU.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Profile window with any
                updated information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Controlled Access Unit wrap data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Changing the wrap state of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU)
might disrupt ring operation or host communication with some devices. If you
change the wrap state and an error condition exists on the segment that
prevents the CAU from running effectively under the new wrap state, the change
will not take effect until the error is removed.

To display or change the wrap condition of the selected CAU, select Wrap
display/change on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit
Profile window. The Controlled Access Unit Wrap Data window is displayed.

This choice is not available if an error occurred while obtaining the profile,
if the LAN Network Manager program is running in limited mode, or if the CAU is
not registered with this LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. Controlled Access Unit Wrap Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Changing the wrap state of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU)
might disrupt ring operation or host communication with some devices. If you
change the wrap state and an error condition exists on the segment that
prevents the CAU from running effectively under the new wrap state, the change
will not take effect until the error is removed.

To display or change the wrap condition of the selected CAU, select Wrap
display/change on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit
Profile window. If the CAU status is normal, the Error Data fields for RI and
RO are blank, and the information for the backup segment is displayed. If the
status is not normal, the Error Data fields contain information.

This window contains the following fields:

 CAU ID
                The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify the CAU.

 LAN segment
                The 3-digit number that represents the LAN segment to which the
                CAU is attached.

 Registered
                Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Registered with
                The adapter address of the LAN Network Manager program with
                which the CAU is registered.

 Wrap status
                The current wrap status of the CAU.

 Wraps forced by LAN Network Manager
                The wrap status to be forced by the LAN Network Manager.

 Error data
                The error data for ring in, ring out, or internal or backup
                ring.

                o The adapter address and name of the beaconing station.
                o The adapter address and name of the NAUN station for the
                  beaconing station.
                o The beacon type.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Wrap
                To change the wrap state of the CAU as specified in the Wraps
                forced by LAN Network Manager field.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with any updated information.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Wraps forced by LAN Network Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the wrap state of the CAU, select one of the following:

 Normal    Open the main ring path and check the backup path.

 Wrap RI   Switch traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the RI
           side.

 Wrap RO   Switch traffic from the main ring path to the backup path on the RO
           side.

 Wrap RI/RO Remove the CAU from the main ring and form an internal ring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Lobe Attachment Module x Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the adapters attached to the attachment module, select
Module x details on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit
Profile window, where x is the number of the attachment module (1-4), The Lobe
Attachment Module x Details window is displayed.

This choice is not available if an error occurred while obtaining the profile,
if the LAN Network Manager program is running in limited mode, or if the CAU is
not registered with this LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. Lobe Attachment Module x Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the adapters attached to the attachment module, select
Module x details on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit
Profile window, where x is the number of the attachment module (1-4),

This window contains the following fields:

 CAU ID
                The 8-digit hexadecimal number used to identify the IBM(T) 8230
                Controlled Access Unit (CAU).

 LAN segment
                The 3-digit number that represents the LAN segment to which the
                CAU is attached.

 Registered
                Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Attachment module number
                The number (1-4) of the selected attachment module.

 Lobe/address mismatch
                Whether there is a mismatch between the lobe number and the
                address.

                If the Lobe/address mismatch field is Yes, then the CAU is
                unable to match at least one lobe and adapter address. Those
                lobes for which there is a mismatch contain question marks in
                the address field. One cause of this condition is the presence
                of a trace tool on a lobe.

                If the Lobe/address mismatch field is No and one of the address
                fields contains question marks, then the CAU is in the process
                of matching addresses to lobes. Wait 10 seconds then select
                Refresh. Continue to refresh until a valid address appears or
                until the Lobe/address mismatch field is Yes.

 Attachment module status
                Whether the attachment module is enabled or disabled.

                If there is a mismatch between the lobe and address, the last
                known correct data is displayed.

 Lobe receptacle information
                A scrollable window that contains the following for each lobe
                receptacle:

    o The number of the lobe receptacle.
    o The status of the lobe receptacle.
    o The address and name of the adapter attached to the lobe receptacle.

      Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display information
      about the lobe modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window, to use the
following functions:

 Enable lobe receptacle
                To enable the selected lobes.

 Disable lobe receptacle
                To disable the selected lobes.

 Show/Change lobe definition
                To display or change the definition of the IBM(T) 8203
                Controlled Access Unit (CAU) lobe.

 Enable attachment module
                To enable the selected attachment module.

 Disable attachment module
                To disable the selected attachment module.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window
                with any updated information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Enable lobe receptacle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable one or more lobe receptacles, select the receptacles from the list in
the scrollable window, and then select Enable lobe receptacle, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window. Enabling
the lobe allows an adapter to insert on it.

You cannot enable a lobe on a CAU if the CAU is not registered to your LAN
Network Manager program. If the CAU loses power, this setting will not be
maintained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Disable lobe receptacle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Changing module status can disrupt normal network activity.

To disable one or more lobe receptacles, select the receptacles from the list
in the scrollable window, and then select Disable lobe receptacle, on the
Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window.
Disabling the lobe prevents adapters from inserting on it.

LAN Network Manager prompts you to confirm your decision before it disables the
lobe.

You cannot disable a lobe on a CAU if the CAU is not registered to your LAN
Network Manager program. If the CAU loses power, this setting will not be
maintained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Enable attachment module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To enable the selected attachment module, select Enable attachment module, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window.

This option is not available of the attachment module is already enabled or if
the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Disable attachment module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To disable the selected attachment module, select Disable attachment module, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window.

This option is not available of the attachment module is already disabled or if
the CAU is not registered with this LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Module Details window with any updated
information, select Refresh, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled
Access Unit Module Details window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Reset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Warning: Resetting the CAU can disrupt normal network activity.

To reset the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Reset, on the
Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Unit Profile window.

This option is not available if an error occurred while the LAN Network Manager
program was obtaining the profile, if the LAN Network Manager program is
running in limited mode, or if the LAN Network Manager program is not
registered with the CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To redisplay the Controlled Access Unit Profile window with any updated
information, select Refresh, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled
Access Unit Profile window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Link bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To attempt to link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the
following:

 o Link bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Link pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window

 o Link, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

 The LAN Network Manager program displays a message that indicates success or
 failure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. Link Bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To attempt to link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the
following:

 o Link bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Link pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window

 o Link, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

 If you have not defined the bridge to link automatically, or if you have set
 automatic bridge link function to Inactive, you can use this function to link
 to the bridge.

 This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating
 in limited mode, or if no bridge has been selected. Any selected objects that
 are not bridges are ignored, and only the selected unlinked bridges are
 linked.

 To manage remote segments, the LAN Network Manager program must be linked to
 the remote bridges.

 This window contains the following field:

 Automatic bridge link
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program should automatically
                attempt to re-establish the link, if the link is lost.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Link
                To attempt to link to the selected bridge.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Unlink bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To disable a link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the
following:

 o Unlink bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Unlink pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window

 o Unlink, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. Unlink Bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To disable a link to a bridge, select the bridge, and then select one of the
following:

 o Unlink bridge, on the Actions pull-down menu

 o The Unlink pushbutton, on the Bridge Information/Status window

 o Unlink, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

 If you have defined the bridge to link automatically, you can use this
 function to disable the automatic bridge link.

 This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating
 in limited mode, or if no linked bridge has been selected. Any selected
 objects that are not bridges are ignored, and only the selected linked bridges
 are unlinked.

 This window contains the following field:

 Automatic bridge link,
                Whether the LAN Network Manager program should automatically
                attempt to re-establish the link, if the link is lost.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Unlink
                To unlink from the selected bridge.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. Events ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Events to use the following functions:

 Display event log
                To display a list of the events that have been logged by this
                LAN Network Manager program.

 Dynamic event list
                To display a list of the latest 15 events that have been logged
                by this LAN Network Manager program.

 Event log filters
                To define the criteria by which events are filtered for
                logging.

 Set soft error reporting options
                To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs. This
                option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is
                operating in limited mode.

 Clear event log
                To delete all events from the event log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display event log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the events and alerts that have been logged by this LAN
Network Manager program, select the Events pushbutton on any of the Resource
Information/Status windows, or select Display event log, on the Events
pull-down menu.

The Event Log window appears.

Alerts are displayed in red.  An alert that is forwarded to the NetView(T) host
is indicated by a host icon. An alert that is not forwarded to the NetView host
is indicated by a lightning bolt icon. An alert that is not generated by the
LAN Network Manager program (an alert that is received through the alert
transport facility) is logged as a message DFIPD399 (alert transport frame
received) with the time the alert was received.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. Event Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of the events and alerts that have been logged by this LAN
Network Manager program, select the Events pushbutton on any of the Resource
Information/Status windows, or select Display event log, on the Events
pull-down menu.

This window contains the following information for each event:

 o Date of the event
 o Time of the event
 o Message number that is generated by the alert
 o Statement that explains the problem that caused the event.

 For certain events, the following information can be included:

 o Address of the adapter that is reporting the event
 o Name of the adapter (if defined)
 o Additional data (if available)
 o The segment that contains the adapter.
 The most recent event is displayed first.

 Alerts are displayed in red. An alert that is forwarded to the NetView(T) host
 is indicated by a host icon. An alert that is not forwarded to the NetView
 host is indicated by a lightning bolt icon. An alert that is not generated by
 the LAN Network Manager program (an alert that is received through the alert
 transport facility) is logged as a message DFIPD399 (alert transport frame
 received) with the time the alert was received.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display details about the
 event, delete selected events, and refresh the event log.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying entries of the event log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event Log Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Event Log window, to use the following functions:

 Event details
                To display details of the selected events.

 Print
                To print the details of selected events to a file.

 Delete
                To remove the selected events from the log. The LAN Network
                Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
                deletes the event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display more specific information about the selected events and alerts,
select one or more events, and then select Event details, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log window.

The Event Details window appears. This window displays a detailed explanation
of each selected event, including the impact of that event. It also provides
recommended actions to solve the problem.

This option is not available if you have not selected any events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. Event Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display more specific information about the selected events and alerts,
select one or more events, and then select Event details, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log window.

This window contains the following information for the selected event:

 o Date of the event
 o Time of the event
 o Message number that is generated by the alert
 o Statement that explains the problem that caused the event.

 For certain events, the following information can be included:

 o Address of the adapter that is reporting the event
 o Name of the adapter (if defined)
 o Additional data (if available)
 o The segment that contains the adapter.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display details about events
 that are alerts, display the profiles of the bridge or station associated with
 the event, and delete the event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event Details Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Event Details window, to use the following functions:

 Alert details
                To display more specific information about the alert.  This
                option is not available if the selected event is not an alert.

 Profile
                To display the profile for the bridge or station that is
                associated with the selected event. If more than one adapter is
                involved in the problem, the LAN Network Manager program
                displays a window with a list of adapters from which to choose.

 Delete
                To delete the selected event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alert details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display more specific information about the alert, select Alert details, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window.

The Alert Details window appears. This window provides information about the
alert, such as a description of the alert and its probable causes.

This option is not available if the selected event is not an alert.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. Alert Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display more specific information about the alert, select Alert details, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Resource name
                The symbolic name of the resource that is associated with this
                alert.

 Resource type
                The type of resource that is associated with this alert.

 Date
                The date that this alert was logged.

 Time
                The time that this alert was logged.

 Error type
                The type of error that was reported.

 Probable cause(s)
                A scrollable list of probable sources of the error.

 Description
                A general description of the alert.

 Text message
                The message number and a complete description of the problem.
                This information is not provided for alert transport frames
                (message DFIPD399).

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Recommended actions
                To display the recommended actions you can take to resolve this
                problem.

 Link details
                To display connection data about the adapter that is reporting
                the alert.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. Recommended Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the actions you can take to resolve this problem, select Recommended
actions, on the Alert Details window.

This window displays two scrollable lists; one lists the possible causes of the
event, the other lists the recommended actions.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Fail causes
                To display information about events that have been caused by
                the failure of a hardware or software component. These types of
                errors are generally not expected and ordinarily require that
                you contact service personnel for resolution. Examples of
                failure causes are failure of a cooling system or incorrect
                protocol exchange between two components in the network.

                This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply
                to this event.

 User causes
                To display information about events that have been caused by
                manual intervention.  These are events whose causes can be
                fixed by the user, such as the power being off, a lack of
                paper, or a device that is varied off line by a user. These
                types of errors are normally easy to correct.

                This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply
                to this event.

 Inst causes
                To display information about events that are the result of
                incorrect installation or set-up of equipment. Examples of
                install causes are incorrect installation of a cable, a LAN
                configuration error, or a mismatch between a program and the
                hardware on which it is installed.

                This pushbutton is not available if this cause does not apply
                to this event.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.

 Follow the procedures in the window to resolve the problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. Link Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display connection data about the adapter that is reporting the alert,
select Link details, on the Alert Details window.

This window contains the following data:

 o Name of the resource that is reporting the alert
 o Date and time that the error was reported
 o Type of error reported
 o Address and name (if defined) of the reporting adapter
 o Address and name of the upstream adapter and the downstream adapter
 o Weight of the error
 o LAN segment number of the segment that is reporting the alert
 o Bridge ID (if the adapter generating the alert is a bridge)
 o Other routing information
 o Beacon type (if applicable).

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the profile for the bridge or for the station that is associated
with the selected event, select Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Event Details window.

One of the following windows appears, depending upon whether the adapter is in
a bridge or a station:

 o Station Profile window
 o Bridge Profile window

 If there are several addresses for which a profile can be displayed, Query
 Profile window appears, from which you select only one address.

 If the adapter address exists on several LAN segments, the Adapter Segment
 Number window appears, from which you select only one segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Query Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Query Profile window is displayed if you select Profile on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Details window, and there are several addresses for
which a profile can be displayed.

Select the adapter address for which you want to display the profile.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter Segment Number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Adapter Segment Number window is displayed if you select Profile, on the
Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window, or if you select Find, on
the View pull-down menu, and the adapter exists on more than one segment.

Select the segment for which you want to display the profile.

Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and close the window.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an event for which you displayed detailed information, select Delete,
on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Details window.

The LAN Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it
deletes the event. The Event Details window is then closed, and the event log
is redisplayed with the remaining events.

If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the
dynamic event list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print event ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print the details of one or more events from the event log to an ASCII file
on your hard disk, select the events, and then select Print on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log window.

The Print Event Details window is displayed.

This option is not available if you have not selected any events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print Event Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print the details of one or more events from the event log to an ASCII file
on your hard disk, select the events, and then select Print on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log window. This window contains the following
field:

 Filename
                The drive path and file name of the file to which you want to
                print the event details.

 Use the pushbuttons to do the following:

 Set
                To print the event details to the specified file.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the drive path and file name of the file to which you want to print the
event details.  This field can contain up to 256 characters.  The default is
C:\EVENTS.TXT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete event ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete one or more events from the event log, select the events, and then
select Delete on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log window. The LAN
Network Manager program prompts you to confirm your decision before it deletes
the events.

This option is not available if you have not selected any events.

If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the
dynamic event list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event Log View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Event Log window, to use the following functions:

 All
                To display all entries in the event log.

 Some
                To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event
                log.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Event Log window with any updated information
                from the LAN Network Manager program.

 If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in
 effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all entries in the event log, select All, on the View pull-down menu
of the Event Log window.

If there is a check mark beside this choice, all the events are currently
displayed in the event log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event log, select Some,
on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window.

The Some Events window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those events that meet the
criteria specified on the Some Events window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. Some Events ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria for displaying some entries in the event log, select Some,
on the View pull-down menu of the Event Log window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Logged from this start date to this end date
                The month, day, and year of the starting and ending dates that
                define the logging period for which you want to display events.

 Logged from this start time to this end time
                The hour, minute, and second of the starting and ending times
                that define the logging period for which you want to display
                events.

 Alerts only
                Whether you want to display alerts only.

 With this message number
                The message number of the events that you want to display.

 For this LAN segment
                The number of the LAN segment for which you want to display
                events.

 Adapter address or name
                The address or symbolic name of the adapter for which you want
                to display events.

 Bridge name
                The name of the bridge for which you want to display events.

 Controlled Access Unit
                The identifier of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU)
                for which you want to display events.

 Stop after this many events
                The number of events that you want to display.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the events list
                according to the specified criteria.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Clear
                To empty all fields.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Logged from this start date to this end date ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the date range for the events you want to display in the event log.

You can specify the date in the following ways:

 Start date only
                Displays the events that have been logged since the date you
                specify.

 End date only
                Displays the events that have been logged up to the date you
                specify.

 Start and end date
                Displays the events that have been logged between the dates you
                specify.

 The format of the date is mm/dd/yy, where:

 mm is the month
 dd is the day
 yy is the last two digits of the year.

 The format of this field is dependent on the code page that you are using.
 Different countries use different code pages, and the format of the date
 changes depending on the country in which you are using the LAN Network
 Manager program.  For example, if you have the line CODEPAGE=850,437 in your
 CONFIG.SYS file, you get the United Kingdom code page, which gives a date
 format of dd/mm/yy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Logged from this start time to this end time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the time period for the events that you want to display in the event
log.

You can specify the time in the following ways:

 Start time only
           Displays the events that have been logged since the time you
           specify.

 End time only
           Displays the events that have been logged up to the time you
           specify.

 Start time and end time
           Displays the events that have been logged during the times you
           specify.

 The format of the time is hh/mm/ss, where:

 hh is the hour (in 24-hour format)
 mm is the minutes
 ss is the seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Alerts only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want to display both events and alerts or to display alerts
only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> With this message number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the message number of the events that you want to display.

The message number is a 3-digit number that the LAN Network Manager program
adds to the prefix DFIPD to identify a specific problem that it has detected,
such as a congested adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> For this LAN segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the number of the LAN segment for which you want to display events.

The LAN segment number is the 3-digit hexadecimal number that identifies the
LAN segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the address or the name of the adapter for which you want to display
events.

You can enter either the hexadecimal address (12 digits) or the symbolic name
(1-16 characters).

If you specify an adapter in this field, the Bridge name field and the
Controlled Access Unit field are not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the name of the bridge for which you want to display events.

The bridge name consists of 1-8 characters in any combination of the letters
A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $, and %.

If you specify a bridge name in this field, the Adapter address or name field
and the Controlled Access Unit field are not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Controlled Access Unit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) for which
you want to display events.

The CAU ID is the 8-digit hexadecimal number that identifies a specific CAU.

If you specify a CAU ID in this field, the Adapter address or name field and
the Bridge name field are not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Stop after this many events ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the maximum number of events (1-2000) that you want to display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To redisplay the Event Log window with any updated information from the LAN
Network Manager program, select Refresh, on the View pull-down menu of the
Event Log window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Dynamic event list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the 15 most recent events and alerts that were logged by this LAN
Network Manager program, select Dynamic event list, on the Events pull-down
menu.

The Dynamic Event List window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. Dynamic Event List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the 15 most recent events and alerts that were logged by this LAN
Network Manager program, select Dynamic event list, on the Events pull-down
menu.

This window displays only the 15 most recent events that were logged by the LAN
Network Manager program and is updated dynamically. There is no action bar on
this window.  To display details for particular events, go to the Event Log
window.

If you delete an event from the event log, that event is also deleted from the
dynamic event list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Set soft error reporting options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs and whether you want
to log all, some, or none of the soft errors, select Set soft error reporting
options, on the Events pull-down menu.

The Set Soft Error Reporting Options window appears.

This option is not available if the LAN Network Manager program is operating in
limited mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. Set Soft Error Reporting Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify segments for which soft-error reporting occurs and whether you want
to log all, some, or none of the soft errors, select Set soft error reporting
options, on the Events pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment Number
                A scrollable list of segment numbers from which to choose.

 Current option
                The soft-error reporting option currently in effect for the
                selected segment.

 Current segment
                The segment for which the current reporting option is in
                effect.

 New option
                The new soft-error reporting option.

 To select a segment from the list, double-click on the segment number. The LAN
 Network Manager program displays the current soft-error reporting option in
 effect for that segment.  To change the reporting option for the segment,
 select an option from the New option field.

 A controlling LAN Network Manager program can specify soft-error reporting for
 any segment displayed in the list.  If you are using an observing LAN Network
 Manager program, you can specify soft-error reporting for the local LAN
 segment only.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Apply
                To accept the changed information.  The window remains open,
                allowing you to make more changes.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. Segment number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the number of the segment for which you want to change the soft-error
reporting option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. New option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify one of the following:

 Log limited
             Log the soft errors for adapters in areas of the Token-Ring
             segment where large numbers of soft errors are occurring.

             Only those soft-error reports from adapters that are accumulating
             excessive soft errors are logged. The LAN Network Manager program
             also logs soft-error reports from the adapters that are upstream
             and downstream of the adapters with excessive soft errors.

 Log all
             Log the soft errors for the entire Token-Ring segment.

             All soft error reports from all adapters on the Token-Ring segment
             are logged.  This option can be used for only one Token-Ring
             segment in the network at a time. If this option is selected, the
             following messages are logged:

             DFIPD104 I
                       Recovered error counters

             DFIPD106 I
                       Ring error report

             DFIPD108 W
                       Ring poll failure

             DFIPD109 W
                       Ring monitor error:  ring recovered

             DFIPD224 I
                       New ring monitor.

 None
             To receive alerts for troubleshooting, without logging the
             soft-error reports that caused the alerts.

             No individual soft-error reports are logged.

             This is the recommended setting for soft error reporting.

 None (and reset counters)
             To erase the counters for soft errors that have occurred up to now
             or to reset the counters if you have received the alert LAN
             Network Manager error reporter failed.

             The internal counters for soft error reporting are reset to 0.
             This option updates the error logging mode to No soft error
             reporting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. Clear event log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete all events from the event log, select Clear event log, on the Events
pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event log filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define, change, or delete filters for event logging, select Event log
filters, on the Events pull-down menu.

The Event Log Filters window appears.

Event log filters prevent events and alerts from being logged in the LAN
Network Manager database.  However, alerts are still forwarded to the host if
there is an active host connection and if you have not defined an alert filter
to block these alerts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. Event Log Filters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define, change, or delete filters for event logging, select Event log
filters, on the Events pull-down menu.

The window lists all the defined event-log filters.  The list box that displays
the event-log filters contains the following fields:

 Status
           Whether the filter is active or inactive.

 Description
           The user-defined description of the filter.

 Event log filters prevent events and alerts from being logged in the LAN
 Network Manager database.  However, alerts are still forwarded to the host if
 there is an active host connection and if you have not defined an alert filter
 to block these alerts.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to add a new event-log filter or
 modify the parameters of an existing event-log filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Event Log Filters Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Event Log Filters window, to use the following
functions:

 Add event log filter
                To define a filter for event logging.

 Change event log filter
                To change any of the parameters for a selected filter.  If you
                do not select one or more filters from the filters list, this
                option is unavailable.

 Delete event log filter
                To delete one or more selected filters.  A message is displayed
                to confirm the request.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Event Log Filters window with any updated
                information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add event filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define a filter for event logging, select Add event filter, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window.

The Add Event Filter window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Change event filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the definition of one or more existing filters, select the filters,
and then select Change event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event
Log Filters window.

If you do not select one or more filters from the filters list, this option is
unavailable.

The Change Event Filter window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete event filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the definition of one or more existing filters, select the filters,
and then select Delete event filter, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Event
Log Filters window.

A message is displayed to confirm the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. Add or Change Event Log Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a new filter for event logging, select Add event filter, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window.

To change the definition of an existing filter, select Change event filter, on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Event Log Filters window.

When you define a filter, events are compared to the filter.  If an event meets
all of the specified criteria, the event is not logged. If you define more than
one filter, events are compared to all the filters.  If an event meets all the
criteria of any one of the filters, it is not logged.

If you leave a filter parameter blank, the filter applies to all the values for
that parameter.  For example, if you do not specify a segment, the filter
applies to all segments.  If you specify a segment but do not specify any
events, the filter blocks all events associated with that segment.

This window contains the following fields:

 Filter description
             The user-defined description of the filter.  This field is
             required and can contain up to 40 characters, including blanks.

 Filter status
             Whether the filter is active or inactive.

 Received from this date...to
             The starting and ending dates that define the period during which
             you want to filter events.  This field is optional.  If you enter
             a date, enter data in all six fields.

 Received from this time...to
             The starting and ending times that define the period during which
             you want to filter events.  This field is optional.  If you enter
             a time, enter data in all six fields.

 Segment numbers
             The segments for which you want to filter events.  The list box
             displays all segments that the LAN Network Manager program is
             aware of.  You can select one or more segments from the list box.
             This field is optional.

 Events
             The events that you want to filter.  You can select one or more
             events from the list box.  This field is optional.

 Involving one of the following
             The resource for which you want to filter events.  These fields
             are mutually exclusive.

             Adapter address or name
                         The hexadecimal address or the symbolic name of the
                         adapter. This field is optional.

             Bridge name
                         The user-defined name of the bridge.  This field is
                         optional.

             CAU ID
                         The 8-digit identifier of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled
                         Access Unit (CAU).  This field is optional.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add or Change
             To add or change the event-log filter.  When you add, the
             pushbutton remains open, allowing you to add another event-log
             filter.  When you change, the event-log filter is changed, and the
             window closes.

             If you selected Add event log filter to enter this window, the
             pushbutton reads Add.  If you entered Change event log filter to
             enter this window, the pushbutton reads Change.

             This pushbutton is not available if:

             o No description is entered
             o Only a description is entered (no other parameters)
             o An invalid or incomplete date or time is entered
             o An invalid CAU ID or adapter name is entered.

 Reset
             To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the LAN
             Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields to their
             initial values.

 Cancel
             To close this window.

 Help
             To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is in a
             field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Filter description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Describe the event-log filter that you are defining.  You can enter up to 40
characters, including blanks.

This field is required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Filter status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether the filter is active or inactive.

The default setting for this field is Active.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Received from this date...to ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the starting and ending dates for the period during which you want to
filter events.

This field is optional and is in the format of mm/dd/yy (mm = month, dd = day,
and yy = year).  If you enter a date, enter data in all six fields.

The format of this field is dependent on the code page that you are using.
Different countries use different code pages, and the format of the date
changes depending on the country in which you are using the LAN Network Manager
program.  For example, if you have the line CODEPAGE=850,437 in your CONFIG.SYS
file, you get the United Kingdom code page, which gives a date format of
dd/mm/yy.

If you enter a number lower than 70 in the year field, the LAN Network Manager
program assumes the year to be in the 21st century.  For example, if you enter
06/07/68, the LAN Network Manager program interprets that date as June 7, 2068.

If you enter a number higher than 70 in the year field, the LAN Network Manager
program assumes the year to be in the 20th century.  For example, if you enter
06/07/95, the LAN Network Manager program interprets that date as June 7, 1995.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Received from this time...to ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the starting and ending times that define the period during which you
want to filter events.

This field is optional and is in the format of hh:mm:ss (hh = hours, mm =
minutes, and ss = seconds). If you enter a time, enter data in all six fields.
Valid entries are 00:00:00-23:59:59.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> From LAN segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the LAN segments for which you want to filter events. This field is
optional.  Valid entries are 000-FFF.  The list box displays all the segments
that the LAN Network Manager program is aware of. You can select one or more
segments from the list box.

You can also define filters for segments that the LAN Network Manager program
is not yet aware of by entering that segment number in the entry field above
the list box.  If the segment already exists in the list box, the list box
scrolls to that segment and the segment is selected.  If the segment does not
exist in the list box, the segment is added and the list box is scrolled to the
new segment.

If an event is received from any of the selected segments, the event then meets
the criteria for this parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Events ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the events that you want to filter.  Select one or more events from the
list box.  This field is optional.

The list is generated from the message-text table in the LAN Network Manager
database. The list box contains the message number and the text for each
message in the table.

If an event matches any of the selected events, the event then meets the
criteria for this parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Adapter address or name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the address or the name of the adapter for which you want to filter
events.  This field is optional.

You can enter either the hexadecimal address (12 digits) or the symbolic name
(1-16 characters).

If an event is received from the specified adapter, the event then meets the
criteria for this parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the name of the bridge for which you want to filter events. This field
is optional.

The bridge name is defined by the user and consists of 1-8 characters in any
combination of the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9, and the characters @, #, $,
and %.

If an event is received from the specified bridge, the event then meets the
criteria for this parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify the identifier of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) for which
you want to filter events.  This field is optional.

The CAU ID is the 8-digit hexadecimal number that identifies a specific CAU.

If an event is received from the specified CAU, the event then meets the
criteria for this parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Lists, from the network level view window, to use the following
functions:

 Segments
                To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network
                Manager program has been linked since startup or restart.

 Stations
                To display a list of all the stations known to the LAN Network
                Manager program on a segment.

 Bridges
                To display a list of all the defined bridges.

 CAUs
                To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access
                Units (CAUs) in the CAU table of the LAN Network Manager
                program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network Manager program has
been linked since startup or restart, select Segments, on the Lists pull-down
menu.

The Segments window is displayed.

In the list of segments, the asterisk (*) identifies the local LAN segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all segments to which the LAN Network Manager program has
been linked since startup or restart, select Segments, on the Lists pull-down
menu.

In the list of segments, the asterisk (*) identifies the local LAN segment.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment
                The segment number

 Segment Status
                The status of the segment.

                The possible Token-Ring Network segment statuses are Normal,
                Soft error, Beaconing, Wrapped, and Unknown.

                The possible PC Network segment statuses are Normal, Continuous
                carrier, and Unknown.

 Segment Type
                The type of the LAN segment being monitored. Possible LAN types
                are Token-Ring Network, PC Network(T), and Ethernet/IEEE 802.3.
                This field also displays the speed of data exchange on the
                segment.

 Linked Bridges
                Number of bridges linked to the LAN segment.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to display the configuration
 list of the segments, test a segment, display details about the segment's
 status, and display the ring utilization for the segment.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying the list of segments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. Possible Token-Ring Network Statuses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Possible LAN Network Manager statuses for a Token-Ring Network are:

 Normal
             The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the
             LAN segment is operating normally.

 Soft Error
             Intermittent failures are causing data to be transmitted on the
             LAN segment more than once in order to be received correctly. The
             alert that accompanies the Soft Error status includes the fault
             domain (the segment of the network that is experiencing the
             failures).

 Beaconing
             Either there is signal loss (possibly caused by a broken line), or
             no token is circulating the LAN segment within the predefined time
             limit.  Beaconing indicates that the LAN segment is inoperative.

             The status on the Segments window does not change to Beaconing
             until the LAN segment that is experiencing the problem is in a
             permanent beaconing condition (when the LAN segment fails to
             recover during the automatic removal process). You can look at the
             alert to find the fault domain.

 Wrapped
             The Token-Ring is using the backup path. This status can be
             received for a segment with an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
             (CAU) or an IBM 8220 Optical Fiber Converter.

 Unknown
             One of the following is true:

             o The LAN Network Manager program is no longer linked to any
               bridges on that segment.

             o The LAN Network Manager program is linked to the segment through
               the IBM 8209 LAN Bridge Version 1, which does not support the
               ring error monitor (REM) or the configuration report server
               (CRS) for the Token-Ring Network.

             o The LAN Network Manager program is linked to the segment through
               a 3174-Peer Bridge.

             o The status of the LAN Network Manager adapter is Adapter closed
               or Wire fault.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. Possible PC Network Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Possible LAN Network Manager status conditions for a PC Network(T) are:

 Normal
             The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and the
             LAN segment is operating normally.

 Continuous Carrier
             A PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a
             continuous-transmission mode. No other PC Network adapters can
             transmit until the problem is resolved. The bus is inoperative.
             The bus can recover automatically if the problem adapter removes
             itself. Otherwise, you might receive an alert to indicate the
             failing device. Continuous carrier is sometimes called hot
             carrier.

             Continuous carrier status is accompanied by one of the following
             messages:

             DFIPD209*
                       Auto-removal error

             DFIPD350
                       Continuous carrier:  network recovered

             DFIPD352*
                       Bus inoperative - continuous carrier

             DFIPD353
                       Bus recovered from continuous carrier

             DFIPD354*
                       Continuous carrier recovered:  adapter removed

             DFIPD355*
                       Continuous carrier:  source unknown

                       Note:  An asterisk (*) beside a message indicates that
                       it is an alert.

 Unknown
             The LAN Network Manager program is no longer linked to the
             segment, or the status of the LAN Network Manager adapter is
             Adapter closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a segment, and then select Actions, on the Segments window, to use the
following functions:

 Display configuration list
                To display a list of all the adapters on the selected segment.

 Test segment
                To test the selected segment for data-transfer capability.

 Segment status details
                To display error information and the status for the selected
                segment.

 Ring utilization
                To display the ring utilization for the selected segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display configuration list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the adapters on a segment, select the segment, and
then select Display configuration list, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Segments window.

The Configuration List window is displayed.  It provides the name (if
assigned), address, status, and functions of each adapter listed in the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. Configuration List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the adapters on a segment, select the segment, and
then select Display configuration list, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Segments window.

This window contains the following fields:

 LAN segment number/type
                The number and type of the selected segment, including the
                transmission speed.

 LAN segment status
                The status of the selected segment.

 Adapter Address/Name
                The address and name, if defined, for each adapter on the
                segment.

 Active
                Whether the adapter is currently active in the network.

 Function names
                The name that indicates the adapter's function.  An adapter can
                have up to 31 possible functional names.

 If you change a segment number on the Configuration Parameters window, the
 previous segment number still appears in the configuration list with a status
 of Unknown.  The adapters on that segment are displayed as being both on the
 previous segment number, with a status of inactive, and on the new segment
 number, with their current status.  The previous segment number disappears
 from the configuration list when you restart the LAN Network Manager program.
 The adapters on the previous segment number are deleted from the configuration
 list when the time interval that is specified in the configuration monitor
 age-out field expires.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to locate adapters in the list,
 query adapters and remove them, add or change station definitions, and request
 an immediate resynchronization of the network.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying the list of stations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. Possible Functional Addresses/Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field provides a hexadecimal group address representing all the functional
addresses available in the LAN Network Manager adapter.  Each ON bit in the
hexadecimal string represents a function performed by the station, such as
active monitor, LAN error monitor, or configuration report server. The list box
contains the names of the functions associated with the functional address for
the adapter.  Scroll through the list to view the functions in the list box.
For a list of possible functional addresses, see Using LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Configuration List window, to use the following
functions:

 Find
                To locate an adapter in the list.

 Profile
                To display the profile for a selected station.

 Remove adapter
                 To remove a selected station.  This action is available only
                if you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program.

 Add definition
                To define a station.

 Change definition
                To change the definition of a station.  If you do not select
                one or more stations from the configuration list, this option
                is unavailable.

 Resync
                To request an immediate resynchronization of the configuration
                table and the location table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a specific adapter in the list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Stations window.

The Find Adapter window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. Find Adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a specific adapter in the list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Stations window.

This window contains the following field:

 Adapter address or name
                The address or the symbolic name of the adapter that you want
                to locate.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To close this window and display the list again with the
                specified adapter highlighted.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or contextual help for
                a field if the cursor is in a field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. Find Adapter Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use Find from the Configuration List window, the LAN Network Manager
program searches the current configuration list for the adapter. If the adapter
exists on another segment, the LAN Network Manager program does not find it and
displays a message that the adapter was not found in the configuration list.

If you use Find from the Stations List window, the LAN Network Manager program
searches across segments but within the specified view option (All defined, All
undefined, Some defined).  If the LAN Network Manager program finds the adapter
within the specified view but not on the current segment, the program does the
following:

 o Changes the current segment to be the segment on which the adapter was found

 o Displays the stations on the new current segment

 o Highlights the specified adapter within the list.

 If the adapter is not within the specified view, regardless of which segment
 it is on, the LAN Network Manager program does not find the adapter and
 displays a message that the adapter is not in the current view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the profile for a station, select the station, and then select
Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on
the Actions pull-down menu of the Station window.

The Station Profile window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define a station, select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of
the Configuration List window or on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station
window.

The Station Definition window appears.  The adapter address and adapter name
fields are blank.

To add a definition for an undefined station in the list, select the adapter
and then select Change definition. When the Station Definition window is
displayed, the LAN Network Manager program fills in the adapter address field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Change definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change a station definition, select the station, and then select Change
definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or
on the Actions pull-down menu of the Station window.

The Station Definition window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. Resync ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To request an immediate resynchronization of the configuration table and the
location table, select Resync, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Configuration List window.

Resynchronization enables the LAN Network Manager program to maintain an
accurate network configuration by querying each adapter or bridge and verifying
the database with current information.  Resynchronization also performs
security checking by identifying unauthorized adapters. If you select either or
both of the fields on the LAN Station Manager Options window, the LAN Network
Manager program updates the PC Information and PC Network(T) Attachment tables
in the database.

Depending on the size of your network, the time required to perform a
resynchronization can be considerable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Configuration List window, to use the following functions:

 All
                To display a list of all the stations on the selected segment.

 Some
                To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed
                for the selected segment.

 Sort by
                To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations
                displayed.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Configuration List window, indicating any
                updated information.

 If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in
 effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the stations for a segment, select All, on the View
pull-down menu of the Configuration List window. If there is a check mark by
this selection, all stations are currently displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the
selected segment, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration
List window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

The Some Adapters window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of adapters that
meet the criteria that you specify on the Some Adapters window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. Some Adapters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria for displaying some stations for a segment, select Some, on
the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List window or on the View
pull-down menu of the Stations window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Active
                Whether you want to display active adapters, inactive adapters,
                or both.

 Function names
                The function names of the adapters that you want to display.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the adapter list
                according to the specified criteria.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Active ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want to display active adapters, inactive adapters, or
both.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Function names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more of the following to display adapters with that function
name:

 REM/LEM
                Ring-error monitors

 Active Monitor
                The active monitor

 CRS
                Configuration-report servers

 RPS/LPS
                Ring-parameter servers or LAN-parameters servers

 LAN Manager
                LAN Network Manager adapters

 Bridge
                Bridge adapters

 NETBIOS
                NETBIOS adapters

 CON
                Concentrators, such as the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
                (CAU)

 Discovery Locate
                Adapters that use discovery-name management

 Remote Program Update
                Adapters that can perform a remote program update on a CAU

 LAN Gateway
                The LAN gateway

 Station Manager
                LAN Station Manager adapters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations that are
displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List
window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

The Sort Adapters window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. Sort Adapters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria by which you want the current list of adapters to be
sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Configuration List
window or on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

Select one of the following:

 o Name
 o Address
 o Upstream
 o Downstream

 The selections Upstream and Downstream are based on the adapter's inserting
 position in the segment and apply to Token-Ring Networks only.

 The default sort criteria for Token-Ring Networks is Upstream. The default
 sort criteria for PC Networks(T) is Address.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close this window and sort the list.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Ring utilization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about how much of the total data-transmission capacity
of the segment is being used, select a Token-Ring segment, and then select Ring
utilization, on the Actions pull-down of the Segments window. The LAN Network
Manager program displays this information as the percentage of possible ring
utilization that is in use at the time of the query.

The Ring Utilization window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. Ring Utilization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display information about how much of the total data-transmission capacity
of the segment is being used, select a Token-Ring segment, and then select Ring
utilization, on the Actions pull-down of the Segments window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment number
             The hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the selected segment.

 Segment type
             The type and transmission speed of the selected segment.

 Segment status
             The current status of the selected segment.

 Ring utilization
             The current ring utilization, expressed as a percentage of the
             possible ring utilization.

             This information is available only if there is a station on the
             ring that is currently managed by the LAN Network Manager program
             and that has the following components installed:

             o The LAN Station Manager program

             o The hardware that supports the ring-utilization parameter
               (IBM(T) Token-Ring Network 16/4 Adapter/A, order number 74F9410,
               feature code 0149) Extended Services 1.0 (ES 1.0).

             o Either Extended Services 1.0 (ES 1.0), for OS/2(T), or LAN
               Support Program 1.2 or higher, for DOS.

               If the LAN Network Manager program is unable to complete the
               query, this field displays Unknown.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Refresh
                To redisplay the window with any updated information.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. Segment status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Possible statuses for Token-Ring segments are:

 Normal
                The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and
                the LAN segment is operating normally.

 Beaconing
                The LAN segment is inoperative due to signal loss, or no token
                is circulating within the predefined time limit.

 Soft Error
                The LAN segment is experiencing intermittent failures that
                cause the data to be transmitted on the LAN segment more than
                once.

 Wrapped
                The Token-Ring Network is using the backup path.

 Unknown
                The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Possible statuses for PC Network(T) segments are:

 Normal
                The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and
                the LAN segment is operating normally.

 Continuous Carrier
                The PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a
                continuous-transmission mode.

 Unknown
                The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Possible statuses for Ethernet segments are:

 Normal
                The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and
                the LAN segment is operating normally.

 Unknown
                The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Possible statuses for 3174-Peer segments are:

 Normal
                The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and
                the LAN segment is operating normally.

 Unknown
                The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager
                program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. Unknown status for 3174-Peer Bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3174 Establishment Controller with Peer Communication bridge does not
provide Token-Ring management functions, such as the configuration report
server (CRS).  The 3174-Peer bridge supports management function only for the
3174-Peer segment to which it is attached.  If you are linked to a 3174-Peer
bridge that is connected to a Token-Ring segment, the LAN Network Manager
program cannot provide any management function for that Token-Ring segment,
unless you have another LAN Network Manager program running on that segment or
unless you are also linked to that segment through a Token-Ring bridge.  If the
LAN Network Manager program is unable to provide management function, such as
resynchronizing the ring, for the Token-Ring segment,  the status for that
segment is displayed as UNKNOWN.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. Segment type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Possible segment types are:

 o Token-Ring 4 megabits (Mbps)
 o Token-Ring 16 Mbps
 o CSMA/CD LAN 2 Mbps
 o Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 10 Mbps
 o 3174-Peer 0.5 Mbps


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Segments window, to use the following functions:

 All
                To display a list of all the segments in the managed domain.

 Some
                To specify criteria that determine which segments are
                displayed.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Segments window, indicating any updated
                information from the LAN Network Manager program.

 If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in
 effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the segments in the managed domain, select All, on the
View pull-down menu of the Segments window. If there is a check mark by this
selection, all segments are currently displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which segments are displayed, select Some,
on the View pull-down menu of the Segments window.

The Some Segments window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of segments that
are specified on the Some Segments window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. Some Segments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria for displaying some of the monitored segments, select Some,
on the View pull-down menu of the Segments window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Segment types
                The types of segments that you want to display.

 Segment status
                The status of the segments that you want to display.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the segments list
                according to the specified criteria.  If you clear all of the
                check boxes in either field, this pushbutton is not available.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more of the following to display segments of that type:

 Token-Ring 4 Mbps
                Displays a list of Token-Ring Network segments operating at 4
                megabits per second (Mbps).

 Token-Ring 16 Mbps
                Displays a list of Token-Ring Network segments operating at
                16 Mbps.

 CSMA/CD LAN 2 Mbps
                Displays a list of carrier sense multiple access with collision
                detection (CSMA/CD) LAN segments operating at 2 Mbps. PC
                Network segments fall into this category.

 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
                Displays a list of Ethernet segments.

 3174-Peer 0.5 Mbps
                Displays a list of 3174-Peer segments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more of the following to display segments with that status:

 Normal
                The LAN Network Manager program is processing information, and
                the LAN segment is operating normally.

 Beaconing
                The LAN segment is inoperative due to signal loss, or no token
                is circulating within the predefined time limit.

 Soft Error
                The LAN segment is experiencing intermittent failures that
                cause the data to be transmitted on the LAN segment more than
                once.

 Wrapped
                The Token-Ring Network is using the backup path.

 Continuous Carrier
                A PC Network adapter, or the modem on the adapter, is in a
                continuous-transmission mode.

 Unknown
                The status of the segment is unknown to the LAN Network Manager
                program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To redisplay the current window, including any updated information from the LAN
Network Manager program, select Refresh, on the View pull-down menu of the
current window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Stations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the stations that the LAN Network Manager program is
aware of on a specified segment, select Stations, on the Lists pull-down menu.
You can select the segment from a list box.

The Stations window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. Stations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the stations that the LAN Network Manager program is
aware of on a specified segment, select Stations, on the Lists pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Current Segment
                The 3-digit number of the segment that is currently selected.

 Seg
                The list box that displays all the segments that are known to
                the LAN Network Manager program.  UNK indicates stations that
                have definitions but have not been found on any segment.

 Adapter Name
                The symbolic name of the station's adapter, as specified on the
                Station Definition window.

 Adapter Addr
                The address of the station's adapter.

 Monitored?
                Whether this station's adapter is defined to be monitored, as
                specified on the Station Definition window.

 Trace?
                Whether this station's adapter is authorized to trace, as
                specified on the Station Definition window.

 To display all the stations on a specific segment, double-click on that
 segment in the Seg list box. The Stations window is redisplayed and lists
 those stations.

 To display defined stations that are not associated with a specific segment,
 double-click on UNK (segment unknown) in the Seg list box. The Stations window
 is redisplayed and lists those stations.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to locate a station in the list,
 add, change or delete a station definition, and display the profile of a
 station.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying the list of stations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Stations window, to use the following functions:

 Find
                To locate an adapter in the list.

 Profile
                To display the profile for a selected station.

 Remove adapter
                To remove a selected station.  This action is available only if
                you are using a controlling LAN Network Manager program.

 Add definition
                To define a station.

 Change definition
                To change the definition of a station.  If you do not select
                one or more stations from the stations list, this option is
                unavailable.

 Delete definition
                To delete the definition of a selected station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the definition of a station, select the station, and then select
Delete definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Stations window.

Deleting a station definition does not delete the station information from the
database.  The entries in the configuration table for inactive stations are
removed from the database when the configuration-monitor age-out interval,
specified on the Miscellaneous Parameters window, is reached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Stations window, to use the following functions:

 All defined
                To display all defined stations for the selected segment.

 All undefined
                To display all undefined stations for the selected segment.

 Some defined
                To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed
                for the selected segment.

 Sort by
                To specify criteria that determine the order of the stations
                that are displayed.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Stations window, indicating any updated
                information.

 If there is a check mark by All defined, All undefined, or Some defined, that
 view option is currently in effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All defined ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all the defined stations for the selected segment, select All
defined, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

If there is a check mark by this selection, all defined stations are currently
displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All undefined ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all the undefined stations for the selected segment, select All
undefined, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

If there is a check mark by this selection, all undefined stations are
currently displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some defined ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which stations are displayed for the
selected segment, select Some defined, on the View pull-down menu of the
Stations window.

The Some Stations window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of stations that
are specified on the Some Stations window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. Some Stations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria for displaying some stations for the selected segment,
select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Trace status
                Whether to display stations that are defined to be authorized
                to trace.

 Monitored status
                Whether to display stations that are defined to be monitored.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the adapter list
                according to the specified criteria.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria by which you want the current list of stations to be
sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

The Sort Stations window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. Sort Stations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria by which you want the current list of stations to be
sorted, select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Stations window.

Select one of the following:

 o Station name
 o Station address

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close this window and sort the list.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the defined bridges, select Bridges, on the Lists
pull-down menu.

The Bridges window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. Bridges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the defined bridges, select Bridges, on the Lists
pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge Name
                The name of the bridge.  This is specified on the Bridge
                definition window.

 Bridge Status
                The status of the bridge.  The status can be Normal, Not
                linked, Link busy, or No carrier.  No carrier applies to PC
                Network(T) bridges only.

 LAN Seg
                The segments to which the bridge is attached.

 Brg Num
                The bridge number.

 Auto Link
                Whether the bridge is defined for automatic linking.  This is
                specified on the Bridge definition window.

 Performance Notification
                The number of whole minutes that pass before the bridge sends
                performance counter updates to the LAN Network Manager program.

                If you are using an observing LAN Network Manager program, this
                interval is displayed as 0.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to do the following:

 o Locate a bridge in the list
 o Add, change, or delete a bridge definition
 o Display the profile of a bridge
 o Link and unlink bridges
 o Display bridge performance information.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying the list of bridges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Bridges window, to use the following functions:

 Find
                To locate a bridge in the bridges list.

 Profile
                To display the profile for a selected bridge.

 Link
                To attempt to link to a selected bridge.

 Unlink
                To unlink from a selected bridge.

 Add definition
                To define a bridge.

 Change definition
                To change the definition of a bridge.  If you do not select one
                or more bridges from the bridges list, this option is
                unavailable.

 Delete definition
                To delete the definition of a selected bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a bridge in the bridges list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Bridges window.

The Find Bridge window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. Find Bridge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate a bridge in the bridges list, select Find, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Bridges window.

This window contains the following field:

 Enter bridge name
                The name of the bridge that you want to locate in the bridges
                list.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To close this window and display the list again, with the
                specified bridge highlighted.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define a bridge, select Add definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the
Bridges window.

The Bridge Definition window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Change definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change a bridge definition, select the bridge, and then select Change
definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

The Bridge Definition window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the profile for a bridge, select the bridge, and then select
Profile, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

The Bridge Profile window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the definition of a bridge, select the bridge, and then select Delete
definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Bridges window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Bridges window, to use the following functions:

 All
                To display all the bridges that are defined.

 Some
                To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are
                displayed.

 Sort by
                To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges
                that are displayed.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Bridges window, indicating any updated
                information.

 If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in
 effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all the bridges that are defined to the LAN Network Manager program,
select All, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window. If there is a
check mark by this selection, all defined bridges are currently displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are displayed, select
Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

The Some Bridges window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of bridges that
are specified on the Some Bridges window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. Some Bridges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which defined bridges are displayed, select
Some, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

This window contains the following fields:

 Bridge status
                The status according to which you want to display bridges.

 Autolink status
                Whether you want to display bridges that are defined for
                automatic linking.

 LAN segment
                The LAN segment according to which you want to display bridges.

 Notification interval
                The notification interval according to which you want to
                display bridges.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the bridges list
                according to the specified criteria.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Bridge status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more of the following to display bridges with that status:

 o Normal

 o Not linked

 o Link busy

 o No carrier (PC Network only).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Autolink status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want to display bridges that are defined for automatic
linking, not defined for automatic linking, or both.

The autolink status for a bridge is specified on the Bridge Definition window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LAN segment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a segment from the list to display the bridges on that segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Notification interval ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify whether you want to display bridges with a notification interval,
without a notification interval, or both.

The notification interval for a bridge is specified on the Performance Data
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges that are displayed,
select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

The Sort Bridges window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. Sort Bridges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine the order of the bridges that are displayed,
select Sort by, on the View pull-down menu of the Bridges window.

Select one of the following:

 o Bridge name, listed alphabetically
 o LAN segment number, listed numerically

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close this window and sort the list.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Controlled Access Units ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAU) in the
Controlled Access Unit table of the LAN Network Manager program, select CAUs,
on the Lists pull-down menu.

The Controlled Access Units window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. Controlled Access Units ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAU) in the
Controlled Access Unit table of the LAN Network Manager program, select CAUs,
on the Lists pull-down menu.

This window contains the following fields:

 CAU ID
                The identifier of the CAU.  This is specified on the Controlled
                Access Unit definition window.

 CAU Status
                The status of the CAU.

 LAN Seg
                The segment to which the CAU is attached.

 Registered
                Whether the CAU is registered with this LAN Network Manager
                program.

 Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to do the following:

 o Locate a CAU in the list
 o Add, change, or delete a CAU definition
 o Display the profile of a CAU
 o Display segments that are accessed without a link
 o Update the microcode in a CAU.
 o Attempt and cancel registration with a CAU.

 Use the choices on the View pull-down menu to change the criteria for
 displaying the list of CAUs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. Possible Controlled Access Unit Statuses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Possible statuses for IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) are:

 Normal
                The signal is open on the main ring path, and the backup path
                is being checked.

 Wrap RI
                The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the
                backup path on the ring-in (RI) side.

 Wrap RO
                The CAU has switched traffic from the main ring path to the
                backup path on the ring-out (RO) side.

 Wrap RI/RO
                The CAU has removed itself from the main ring and forms an
                internal ring.

 Unknown
                The status of the CAU is unknown.

                The status is unknown if you have defined the CAU and the LAN
                Network Manager program has not yet identified the CAU as being
                on the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the Controlled Access Units window, to use the following
functions:

 Find
                To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the
                list.

 Add CAU definition
                To define a CAU.

 Change CAU definition
                To change the definition of a selected CAU.

 Profile
                To display the profile for a selected CAU.

 Qualifiers
                To display a list of CAU qualifiers..

 Update enable
                To update the microcode in a selected CAU.

 Register
                To attempt to register with a CAU.

 Deregister
                To cancel registration with a CAU.

 Delete CAU definition
                To delete the definition of a selected CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the CAUs list, select
Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The Find Controlled Access Unit window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. Find Controlled Access Unit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To locate an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU) in the CAUs list, select
Find, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

This window contains the following field:

 Enter CAU ID
                The ID of the CAU that you want to locate in the Controlled
                Access Units list.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Find
                To close this window and display the list again, with the
                specified CAU highlighted.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add CAU definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Add CAU
definition, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units
window.

The Controlled Access Unit Definition window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Change CAU definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the definition of an existing IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU), select the CAU, and then select Change CAU definition, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The Controlled Access Unit Definition window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display the profile for an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select
the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Profile, on the Actions pull-down
menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The Controlled Access Unit Profile window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Qualifiers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of CAU qualifiers, select Qualifiers from the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The CAU Qualifiers window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. CAU Qualifiers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display a list of CAU qualifiers, select Qualifiers from the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The segment numbers (3 digits) of the qualifiers are listed in a scrollable box
in the center of the window.

Use the choices on the Actions pull-down menu to add a segment to or delete a
segment from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions, on the CAU Qualifiers window, to use the following functions:

 Add
                To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers.

 Delete
                To remove a segment from the list of CAU qualifiers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers, select Add, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the CAU Qualifiers window.

The Add Qualifier window is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. Add Qualifier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a segment to the list of CAU qualifiers, select Add, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the CAU Qualifiers window.

Upon resynchronization, the LAN Network Manager program searches the segments
in the list for Controlled Access Units (CAUs).  As the LAN Network Manager
program locates each CAU, it adds the CAU to the list of CAUs displayed on the
Controlled Access Units window, and attempts to register with the CAU.

The Add Qualifiers window contains the following field:

 Enter Qualifier
                The number of the segment that you want to add to the list of
                CAU qualifiers.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Add
                To add the specified segment to the list.  When you select the
                Add pushbutton, the segment appears in the list on the CAU
                Qualifiers window.  The Add Qualifier window also remains open,
                allowing you to enter more qualifiers.

 Cancel
                To close this window.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Enter Qualifier ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the hexadecimal number (3 digits) of the segment that you want to add to
the list of CAU qualifiers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a segment from the list of CAU qualifiers, select the segment number
in the list and then select Delete, on the Actions pull-down menu of the CAU
Qualifiers window.

This option is not available until you select a segment number from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Update enable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To update the microcode in an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select
the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Update enable, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The Controlled Access Unit Update Enable window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Register ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To manually register the LAN Network Manager program with a Controlled Access
Unit (CAU), select Register, on the Actions pull-down menu of the Controlled
Access Units window.

This manual function is in addition to the automatic registration and
deregistration function that the LAN Network Manager program provides.  This
function is available only to a controlling LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Deregister ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To manually cancel registration of the LAN Network Manager program with a
Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select Deregister, on the Actions pull-down menu
of the Controlled Access Units window.

This manual function is in addition to the automatic registration and
deregistration function that the LAN Network Manager program provides.  This
function is available only to a controlling LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete the definition of an IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Unit (CAU), select
the Controlled Access Unit, and then select Delete definition, on the Actions
pull-down menu of the Controlled Access Units window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View, on the Controlled Access Units window, to use the following
functions:

 All
                To display all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs)
                that are defined to the LAN Network Manager program.

 Some
                To specify criteria that determine which defined CAUs are
                displayed.

 Sort by
                To specify criteria that determine the order of the CAUs that
                are displayed.

 Refresh
                To redisplay the Controlled Access Units window, indicating any
                updated information.

 If there is a check mark by All or Some, that view option is currently in
 effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To display all the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access Units (CAUs) that are defined
to the LAN Network Manager program, select All, on the View pull-down menu of
the Controlled Access Units window. If there is a check mark by this selection,
all defined CAUs are currently displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Some ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which defined IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access
Units (CAUs) are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the
Controlled Access Units window.

The Some Controlled Access Units window appears.

If there is a check mark by this selection, only those types of CAUs that are
specified on the Some Controlled Access Units window are displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. Some Controlled Access Units ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine which defined IBM(T) 8230 Controlled Access
Units (CAUs) are displayed, select Some, on the View pull-down menu of the
Controlled Access Units window.

This window contains the following fields:

 CAU status
                The status according to which you want to display CAUs.

 Segment No
                The LAN segment according to which you want to display CAUs.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Set
                To accept the changed information and display the CAU list
                according to the specified criteria.

 Reset
                To cancel any user changes that you have not submitted to the
                LAN Network Manager program.  Also, resets any changed fields
                to their initial values.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CAU Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more of the following to display IBM 8230Controlled Access Units
(CAUs) with that status.

 o Normal
 o Wrap RI
 o Wrap RO
 o Wrap RI/RO
 o Unknown

 If you clear all the check boxes, the Set pushbutton is unavailable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Segment No ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a segment from the list to display the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Units
(CAUs) on that segment.

To view all the defined CAUs that meet the criteria specified in the CAU Status
field, select All.

To view all the defined CAUs that meet the criteria specified in the CAU Status
field but for which the LAN Network Manager program has no associated LAN
segment number, select UNK.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Sort by ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine the order of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled
Access Units (CAUs) that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down
menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

The Sort Controlled Access Units window appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. Sort Controlled Access Units ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To specify criteria that determine the order of the IBM(T) 8230 Controlled
Access Units (CAUs) that are displayed, select Sort by, on the View pull-down
menu of the Controlled Access Units window.

Select one of the following:

 o CAU ID, listed numerically.
 o LAN segment number, listed numerically.

 Use the pushbuttons on this window to do the following:

 Sort
                To close this window and sort the list.

 Cancel
                To close this window without performing any action.

 Help
                To display extended help for the window, or, if the cursor is
                in a field, contextual help for the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. Message DFIPD006 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation completed successfully.

Meaning: The operation that you requested has completed successfully.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. Message DFIPD007 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed.

Meaning: The operation that you requested has failed.

Action: Determine the status of the LAN Network Manager program.  If the status
is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you attempt the
operation again.  If the status is Normal, wait momentarily and retry the
operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. Message DFIPD008 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Command submitted successfully.

Meaning:  You have requested to either update the microcode in the CAU or
change the status of a lobe attachment module from Enabled to Disabled or from
Disabled to Enabled.  Your request has been successfully submitted to the
Controlled Access Unit. If you requested to change the status of a lobe
attachment module, you will need to select Refresh to view the new status.

Action: Select OK to continue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. Message DFIPD009 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No events have been found for this resource.

Meaning: Currently, there are no events in the event log for the resource that
you have selected. The event could have been filtered using the Event Log
filters or the event could be an alert for an adapter on this segment, but the
alert does not contain the segment number.

Action: If the color of the resource indicates a change in status, go to the
Segment Level View and display the events for each resource whose status has
changed (indicated by a change in color).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. Message DFIPD054 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The LAN Network Manager program cannot be loaded.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has detected that another IBM LAN
management program is already running.  You can run only one LAN Network
Manager program or LAN Manager program at a time.  Also, LAN Network Manager
cannot be loaded if any LAN Network Manager utility programs are running.

Action: Look in the OS/2 task list for one of the following active programs and
end it.

 o LAN Manager 2.0
 o LAN Network Manager 1.0
 o LAN Network Manager 1.1
 o LAN Network Manager - Transfer utility
 o LAN Network Manager - Migration utility


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. Message DFIPD126 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Maximum number of monitored adapters have been defined.

Meaning: You have requested to add a station definition that contains a request
to monitor the station's adapter. However, the number of stations that are
defined as monitored has already reached the maximum number allowed (1000). The
LAN Network Manager program will permit you to add this station definition if
you change the monitoring option to No.

Action: If the monitoring option is set to Yes in the definition of a
non-critical station, change monitoring to No. If there is another LAN Network
Manager program in the network, you can add a definition for the station at
that LAN Network Manager program and include a request for adapter monitoring.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. Message DFIPD174 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Delete definition is not permitted for a linked bridge - one or more of
the bridges is linked by LAN Network Manager.

Meaning: You tried to delete the definitions of one or more bridges with which
the LAN Network Manager program has established a communication link.

Action: Terminate the communication link with the bridge.  You can then delete
the definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. Message DFIPD176 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter address not unique.

Meaning: You have entered a duplicate adapter address.  Either you entered the
same address for both adapters on this bridge, or you entered an adapter
address that is already defined elsewhere in the network.  Adapter addresses
defined to the LAN Network Manager program must always be unique addresses.

Action: Verify the address and retype it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. Message DFIPD177 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Segment number not unique.

Meaning: You have entered the same segment number for both adapters. The
adapters in a bridge are always on different LAN segments.

Action: Enter unique LAN segment numbers for each bridge adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. Message DFIPD193 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Frame error.

Meaning: A frame error occurred while performing the requested function because
a frame was not constructed properly (it does not conform to the published
frame architecture), the target station does not recognize the command (because
of an earlier version of software in the station), or the target station cannot
process the command (because of an internal error).

This error can also occur if the target device is an IBM 8230 Controlled Access
Unit and access is denied.  Access is denied if the CAU is not registered or if
an incorrect password is used.

Action: If the error occurs when the target device is a station or bridge,
determine the status of that device.

If the error occurs when the target device is a CAU, determine if the LAN
Network Manager program is registered with the CAU by using the CAU profile
function.  If it is registered and the error still occurs, then restart the LAN
Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. Message DFIPD209 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Auto-removal error.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has automatically removed its own
adapter from the LAN segment as the result of a beaconing or continuous-carrier
condition.

This message is an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or
observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to
the host.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. LAN segment number
  2. Adapter address
  3. Adapter number.

 Action: If you came from the problem determination procedures in the IBM
 Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, return to the step that sent
 you here. Otherwise, record the data section of the message and perform
 problem determination procedures using the IBM Token-Ring Network Problem
 Determination Guide, or the IBM PC Network Hardware Maintenance and Service,
 as appropriate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. Message DFIPD211 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to open LAN Network Manager's adapter.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program could not open its adapter.

This data section of this message displays the following information:

  1. Adapter address
  2. Adapter number
  3. Miscellaneous data

     This data includes the adapter command and the CCB return code, which is
     defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference, for the
     DIR.OPEN.ADAPTER command.

 Action: Select Retry and the LAN Network Manager program will attempt to open
 the adapter again. If the problem persists, run the diagnostics for the
 adapter. If the diagnostics indicate that the adapter is operational and you
 still get this message, record the data section of the message and contact the
 service supplier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. Message DFIPD212 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager's adapter hardware failed.

Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter hardware failed, and the adapter is no
longer attached to the LAN segment. This message is an alert and is followed by
the adapter closed message. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or
observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to
the host.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. Adapter address
  2. LAN segment number
  3. Adapter number
  4. Adapter check status as defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical
     Reference for adapter checks. This consists of the adapter reason code and
     three parameters.

 Action: Run the adapter diagnostics on LAN Network Manager's adapter. If the
 diagnostics indicate that the adapter is operational and you still get this
 message, record the data section of the message. Consult the License
 Information in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation and contact your
 service supplier as defined in the Statement of Service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. Message DFIPD213 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager's adapter interface failed.

Meaning: The adapter interface code failed, and LAN Network Manager's adapter
has been removed from the LAN segment. This failure is most often related to
the arrangement of the device driver statements in your CONFIG.SYS. The failure
could also be due to a mismatch between the adapter interface code and the
adapter microcode.

This message is an alert and is logged if LAN Network Manager's adapter detects
a hardware (adapter interface) error. If the LAN Network Manager program
(controlling or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is
also sent to the host.

This message is followed by the adapter closed message. For other errors (such
as, internal software errors), the LAN Network Manager program displays an
abend message with abend codes and terminates.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. Adapter address
  2. LAN segment number
  3. Adapter number
  4. Error Code
  5. Error Data/ID
  6. Exception Type
  7. CCB Return code

 The exception type indicates whether this was caused by a System Action
 Exception (1) or a PC System Detected Error (2).  The Error data/ID and Error
 code fields have different meanings depending on the exception type. The CCB
 return code is the return code for the last READ command completed.  For more
 information on this return code and these exception types, refer to the IBM
 Local Area Network Technical Reference.

 Action:

  1. Check your CONFIG.SYS file and verify that the LSM device driver
     statements are listed after all of the adapter interface device driver
     statements. To ensure that the device driver statements are listed in the
     correct order, it is recommended that all statements involving files in
     the heterogeneous LAN management and LAN Network Manager directories be
     moved to the end of the CONFIG.SYS.

     Restart the workstation.

  2. If this message is displayed yet again, restart the workstation.

  3. If this message continues to be displayed, run the diagnostics for your
     adapter.

  4. If the adapter is good and the message continues to be displayed,
     reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard disk by following
     the instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation.

  5. If the problem is still not corrected, record the data section of the
     message. Consult the License Information in the IBM LAN Network Manager
     documentation and contact your service supplier as defined in the
     Statement of Service.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. Message DFIPD215 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Wire fault: LAN Network Manager's adapter or lobe failed.

Meaning: A wire fault has caused this LAN Network Manager's adapter or lobe to
fail. When this message is logged, the LAN segment status is Wire Fault. This
message is an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or
observing) has communication with a host, this alert is also sent to the host.

Note:  This message applies to Token-Ring Network adapters only.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. LAN segment
  2. Adapter address
  3. Adapter number.

 Action: If you came from the problem determination procedures in the IBM
 Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide, return to the step that sent
 you here. If you did not, go to the Problem Determination Guide and use the
 symptom wire fault.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. Message DFIPD218 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Ring not working: unable to open adapter.

Meaning: The Token-Ring Network segment is beaconing while the LAN Network
Manager adapter is trying to become active. The adapter cannot open.

Action: Select Retry.  The LAN Network Manager program will attempt to open the
adapter again. If the Auto Retry on Beaconing option is active, this will be
done automatically after the LAN Network Manager program waits for the retry
interval specified on the Miscellaneous Parameters window. The LAN Network
Manager program will attempt to reinsert on the ring for the user-specified
number of retries.

If the LAN Network Manager program is not able to insert on the ring after all
retries, or if you select Cancel, the LAN Network Manager program will complete
initialization and run with a limited set of functions on the beaconing ring.

If beaconing persists, use the beacon information provided, or the Token-Ring
diagnostics or another LAN Network Manager program that is active and can
communicate with the ring to locate the source of beaconing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. Message DFIPD219 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not found: limited function available.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot find its own adapter or its
adapter code. This is an initialization error.

Action: Check the current adapter being used to determine whether the LAN
Network Manager program is using the primary or alternate adapter.

Verify that the adapter being used by the LAN Network Manager program
corresponds with the adapter defined in the IEEE 802.2 feature profile. If you
are using OS/2 1.3, the IEEE 802.2 profile is one of the LAN feature profiles
in the OS/2 Communications Manager program.  If you are using OS/2 with ES 1.0,
first select LAN Adapter and Protocol support, then select Configure
Workstation in the OS/2 Communications Manager program.

If the adapter number matches, make sure you have configured the Communications
Manager program for LAN communications (IBM Token-Ring Network or IBM PC
Network).

If the problem persists, reinstall the LAN Network Manager program on the hard
disk by following the instructions in the LAN Network Manager documentation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. Message DFIPD222 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Remove Adapter command received.

Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter has been removed from the LAN segment
because another LAN Network Manager program or a user at this LAN Network
Manager program issued a command to remove this adapter. This message is an
alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has
communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to the host.

This message is logged when the LAN Network Manager program de-inserts from the
network following receipt of a Remove Force frame on a Token-Ring Network or a
Remove Station on a PC Network.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. LAN segment number
  2. LAN Network Manager's adapter address
  3. Source address.

 Action: Consult your network administrator. Wait at least six minutes before
 you try again to restart the LAN Network Manager program on the LAN segment.
 This message could be received if this LAN Network Manager program is not
 defined as an authorized station for another LAN Network Manager program on
 the same domain and the other LAN Network Manager program has security active
 with the remove option on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. Message DFIPD226 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter inoperative.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager adapter is inoperative (closed or beaconing),
and you are using a LAN Network Manager function that requires communication on
the LAN segment, such as link bridge.

Action: Look at the event log to determine whether the adapter is closed or the
ring is beaconing. Look for an event that indicates whether the local segment
is inoperative or the LAN Network Manager adapter was closed or could not be
opened.  Follow the instructions for that event.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. Message DFIPD232 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to confirm adapter removal.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has sent a frame to a bridge
requesting that the bridge remove an adapter.  The bridge should have issued a
force remove command to the adapter, then queried the adapter to confirm the
removal and sent a response to the LAN Network Manager program indicating if
the remove was successful or not. The LAN Network Manager program did not
receive a response from the bridge within a fixed period of time. This may be
due to a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager and the bridge or
a problem in the bridge.

Action: Verify that all bridge links are operational and all segments that
could be in the path from the LAN Network Manager program to the station are
functioning. Correct any errors and retry the operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. Message DFIPD236 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter transmit buffer must be at least 344 bytes.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open the adapter because the
transmit buffer size is less than 344 bytes.

Action: Access the IEEE 802.2 profile (one of the LAN feature profiles in the
OS/2 Communications Manager program) and increase the buffer size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. Message DFIPD237 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Insufficient resources to open Service Access Point.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open the service access point
(SAP) because there are not 5 SAPs available.

Action: Access the IEEE 802.2 profile (one of the LAN feature profiles in the
OS/2 Communications Manager program) and increase the number of SAPs.  Allow 5
SAPs for the LAN Network Manager program, in addition to any that other
applications use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. Message DFIPD240 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid adapter address.

Meaning: The adapter address that you entered is either a functional address or
a group address, or it is not a full 12-digit hexadecimal address. If you
entered more than one adapter address on the panel, the position of the cursor
indicates the address that is incorrect.

Action: Enter a 12-digit hexadecimal address that is not a functional or group
address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. Message DFIPD241 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter name not found.

Meaning: You specified an adapter name that is not in the station definition
table. You might have misspelled the adapter name or you might have entered an
address that is not a valid 12-digit address. If you entered more than one
adapter name, the position of the cursor indicates the name that is incorrect.

Action: Verify the spelling of the name or the adapter address against the
information in the Stations window. If it does not appear in the list of
defined stations, it will have to be defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. Message DFIPD242 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter address not found.

Meaning: The adapter address that you entered has not been found. If you
receive this message from Configuration List, the adapter was not found on that
segment.  If you receive this message from the Stations window, the adapter was
not found on any segment, nor does it have a definition.

Action: Verify the adapter address and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. Message DFIPD243 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Name and address cannot be changed simultaneously.

Meaning: You tried to change an adapter name and its address at the same time.
You can only change the name assigned to the existing adapter address.

Action: Reset the dialog to the initial values and change the name but not the
address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. Message DFIPD244 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid adapter name.

Meaning: The adapter name that you entered is not valid. An adapter name is 1
to 16 characters that can be alphanumeric, @, #, $ and %. The name can contain
any combination of letters and numbers with the following exception: it cannot
be 12 alphanumeric characters that are a combination of numbers and the letters
A-F, to prevent confusion with the hexadecimal adapter address.

Action: Verify the spelling of the name against the information in the Stations
window, and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. Message DFIPD245 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message This adapter name already exists.

Meaning: You entered an adapter name that is already assigned to another
adapter address.

Action: Enter a unique adapter name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. Message DFIPD246 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message This adapter already has a name.

Meaning: You entered a name for an adapter that already has a name assigned.

Action: Use Change definition to change the existing adapter definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. Message DFIPD247 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not found.

Meaning: You specified an adapter that is not active on the specified LAN
segment at the time of request. If no LAN segment was specified, the adapter is
not active in the network.

A profile is displayed for this adapter with the data from the LAN Network
Manager database.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. Message DFIPD249 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not found in configuration list.

Meaning: You initiated a search for an adapter that does not exist in the LAN
Segment Configuration List.  You might have misspelled the adapter name or
address.

Action: Verify the adapter name or the adapter address against the information
in the Stations window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. Message DFIPD251 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid segment number.

Meaning: You entered a segment number that is not valid.  A LAN segment number
must be three hexadecimal digits.

Action: Enter a valid LAN segment number that is three hexadecimal digits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. Message DFIPD252 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Segment not found.

Meaning: The segment that the adapter is on does not have a bridge in session
with the LAN Network Manager program.

Action: Check the status of the bridge, and link the bridge again, if
necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. Message DFIPD253 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid bridge name.

Meaning: You entered an invalid bridge name in a bridge definition. A bridge
name is 1-8 characters that can be alphanumeric, @, #, $ and %. However, the
character string UNKNOWN is not a valid bridge name.

Action: Correct the bridge name, and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. Message DFIPD254 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge name not found.

Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is not in the bridge definition
table.  You might have misspelled the bridge name.

Action: Verify the spelling of the name or the adapter address against the
information in the Bridges window. If it does not appear in the list of defined
bridges, it will have to be defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. Message DFIPD255 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Duplicate bridge name.

Meaning: You entered a bridge name that is already assigned to another bridge.

Action: Enter a unique bridge name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. Message DFIPD256 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to communicate with specified LAN segment.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program is unable to communicate with the LAN
segment you specified. The LAN segment is experiencing errors (such as a beacon
or a continuous carrier) or the LAN Network Manager program is not linked to
the target segment.

Action: Determine the current status of the segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. Message DFIPD262 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message  Invalid data.  Please try again.

Meaning: The data that you entered is not valid input.

Action: Use the online help to determine acceptable values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. Message DFIPD263 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed:  data query from LSM unsuccessful.

Meaning: The operation could not be completed due to an error in the data query
from LAN Station Manager.

Action: Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed an running in the
workstation.  Then, resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. Message DFIPD266 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Function not valid for this segment type.

Meaning: You attempted to perform an operation that cannot be performed on the
type of the segment specified.

Action: Make sure you have selected a segment of the proper type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. Message DFIPD280 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed: no communication response received.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program sent a frame to a station that did not
respond within a fixed time.

Action: Determine the current status of the LAN Network Manager program.  If
the status is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you
attempt the request again.

Look at the event log and look for any alerts for any LAN segments in the path
to that station. If any LAN segments in the path are experiencing problems,
follow the instructions for those alerts. If necessary, go to the IBM
Token-Ring Network Problem Determination Guide or the IBM PC Network Hardware
Maintenance and Service to perform problem determination on any LAN segment
that is not operating normally. If the status is normal, then resubmit the
request. If this problem persists, increase the response timeout value on the
Miscellaneous Parameters window. This timeout value is used only for
communications with a remote segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. Message DFIPD281 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter present but not responding.

Meaning: The destination adapter is on the LAN segment but is not responding to
the LAN Network Manager program queries.

Action: The adapter might be congested. Resubmit the request. If the adapter is
congested, you might also receive an alert (DFIPD107) when you resubmit the
request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. Message DFIPD282 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed: link busy.

Meaning: The bridge is congested and cannot respond to the LAN Network Manager
command.

Action: Resubmit the request. If you resubmit the request, you might also
receive an alert (DFIPD188) indicating that the bridge is congested.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. Message DFIPD284 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed: out of resources.

Meaning: All the LAN Network Manager buffers are in use or the LAN Network
Manager program status is Data Lost. The LAN Network Manager program cannot
complete the operation.

Action: Determine the current status of the LAN Network Manager program.  If
the status is Data Lost, wait for the status to return to Normal before you
attempt the operation again.  If the status is Normal, all of the adapter
buffers are in use.  Wait momentarily and then resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. Message DFIPD285 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge already linked.

Meaning: You tried to link to a bridge that already has a communication link
established.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. Message DFIPD286 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge already unlinked.

Meaning: You tried to take down the link to a bridge that does not have a
communication link established.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. Message DFIPD289 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed: bridge not linked.

Meaning: You requested a bridge function (such as a bridge profile) for a
bridge with which the LAN Network Manager program has not established a
communication link. The bridge name might be undefined or you might have
misspelled the name.

Action: Verify that the bridge is defined, the name is spelled correctly, and
that the bridge is linked, then resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. Message DFIPD296 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No bridge reporting for this Token-Ring Network segment.

Meaning: You requested to view soft error reporting options or the segment
status details for a remote Token-Ring Network segment, and no bridge is
reporting for that ring. The LAN Network Manager program has lost communication
with the reporting bridge and is unable to find another reporter for that
segment.

Action: Manual intervention might be required to recover the reporting bridge
or another bridge might have to be linked to perform the reporting function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. Message DFIPD298 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Ring nnn is already set to full soft error reporting.

Meaning: You requested full soft error reporting for a Token-Ring segment but
full soft error reporting is already in effect for this LAN segment. The LAN
segment (nnn) is identified in the message. Only one Token-Ring Network segment
at a time can be in full soft error reporting mode.

Action: Set the soft error reporting option to None for the segment that is
currently in full soft error reporting, and then resubmit the command for the
new segment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. Message DFIPD300 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge failed to link.  RC = nnn.

Meaning: The bridge failed to link on operator request (link bridge function)
during the LAN Network Manager program initialization, or during an automatic
bridge link.

If a bridge fails to link during initialization, this message and the
associated bridge name and reason code are placed into the Events Log. This
message is displayed with a reason code (nnn) that identifies the cause of the
failure. The meaning and actions for the reason codes are as follows:

 002     One of the adapter addresses in the LAN Network Manager bridge
         definition is incorrect.

         Action:  Verify the bridge adapter addresses.

 003     The reporting link password is incorrect.

         Action: Verify the password for the LAN Network Manager reporting link
         against the password in the bridge program's configuration.

 004     Another LAN Network Manager program is already linked to the bridge
         with the reporting link that you are requesting.

         Action: Use a different reporting link to link to the bridge, or
         contact your network administrator.

 005     One or both of the adapter addresses in the bridge definition are
         incorrect, or the bridge did not respond within the fixed time period.

         Note:  If there is an IBM 8209 Bridge, or compatible bridge that uses
         transparent bridging, between the LAN Network Manager program and the
         bridge to which you are attempting to link, you may need to upgrade
         the bridge program.

         Action:  Try to establish the link again. If the timeout recurs, go to
         the Bridges window and verify the addresses, then try again. If the
         timeout still occurs, go to the Event Log to determine the status of
         the network. If the timeout still occurs, try increasing the Response
         Timeout value on the Miscellaneous Parameters window.

 006     No data link buffers are available to set up the link.

         Action: If the LAN Network Manager program status is Data lost, wait
         until that status has recovered and then retry the operation.
         Otherwise, wait momentarily and retry the operation.

 007     The bridge program rejected the LAN Network Manager request for a
         reason other than a wrong password or the link already in use.

         Action:  Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot
         establish the link, the bridge is not compatible with the LAN Network
         Manager program.

 008     The bridge table is full. The maximum number of bridge links are
         already established.

         Action: To establish a link with this bridge, first take down the link
         to another bridge.

 009     The segment table is full. Your linking sequence contains more than 65
         LAN segments that do not already have other bridges linked to the LAN
         Network Manager program.

         Action:  To establish a link to this bridge, take down the link to
         another bridge. Change your linking sequence to a logical orderly
         progression along each path.

 010-014 The bridge detected an error in a LAN Network Manager frame, or the
         LAN Network Manager program received an invalid response from the
         bridge. Either the bridge is not a supported bridge, the bridge is
         faulty, or there is an error in the LAN Network Manager program.

         Action: Verify that the bridge program is one of the following:

             o IBM Token-Ring Network Bridge Program Version 1.1, Version 2.0,
               Version 2.1, Version 2.2

             o IBM PC Network Bridge Program

             o IBM 8209 Bridge Program. If the bridge uses one of these, either
               the bridge program or the LAN Network Manager program is faulty.
               Contact your service supplier.

 015     There are no more DLC link stations available to link to the bridge.

         Action: Verify that there are enough DLC link stations requested to
         link to all bridges.  If there are not, increase the number of DLC
         link stations requested for next startup or restart and restart the
         LAN Network Manager program.

         If the number obtained is less than the number requested, another
         application may be using the link stations that LAN Network Manager
         needs.  Either close the other application or reconfigure the other
         application to use fewer links.  Examples of applications which may be
         using link stations are Remote Data Services, NETBIOS, and Host
         Communications via Network Adapter (check the DLC profile under the
         SNA feature profiles).

 016     The LAN Network Manager program is already attempting to establish a
         link with this bridge. The link request might have been initiated by
         the LAN Network Manager operator, the NetView operator, or the
         autolink bridge function task.

         Action: Check the current status of the bridge. If the status is Not
         linked, wait and refresh the list again.  If the status remains Not
         linked, try to link to the bridge again.

         You may need to wait at least twice the remote response timeout for an
         outstanding request to complete before the link request will be
         accepted. You will continue to get message DFIPD300, return code 016,
         until the current link attempt has completed.

 017     An error has occurred while accessing or updating the bridge
         definition.

         Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot
         establish the link, delete the bridge definition and redefine the
         bridge and retry the operation.

 018     The LAN Network Manager is currently attempting to link to a bridge
         with the same address as one address of the bridge you are trying to
         link. Link requests to bridges that have duplicate addresses must be
         serialized.

         Action:

         Wait momentarily and retry the operation.

 019     LAN Network Manager is currently linked to a bridge that has the same
         adapter address or addresses as this bridge definition. All bridges to
         which LAN Network Manager is linked must have unique adapter
         addresses.

         Action: Unlink the currently linked bridge then either resubmit the
         request or change the adapter adresses and resubmit the request.

 099     An error other than those described above occurred.

         Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation. If you still cannot
         establish the link, contact your service supplier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. Message DFIPD356 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bus inoperative:  No carrier.

Meaning:

If the problem is on LAN Network Manager's segment, a cable located between the
LAN Network Manager station and the translator unit is loose or broken. The
problem could also be in the translator unit, such as a loss of power.

If the problem is on a remote LAN segment, the bridge cable may be loose or
broken, or there may be a problem with the translator unit on that LAN segment.

This message is also an alert. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling
or observing) has communication with a NetView host, this alert is also sent to
the host.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. LAN segment number
  2. Locally administered address of adapter that detects the no-carrier
     condition
  3. Universally administered address of the adapter that detects the
     no-carrier condition.

 Action:

 Check to see if the cable from the LAN Network Manager station to the network
 cabling is loose. If not, then follow your establishment's procedure for
 locating and fixing the loose or broken cable, or fixing the translator unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. Message DFIPD367 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not found on network or not responding.

Meaning: You specified an adapter that either is not present, not active in the
network, or has no buffer space available to receive messages.

A profile is displayed for this adapter with the data from the LAN Network
Manager database.

Action: Verify the adapter name or address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. Message DFIPD401 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Database initialization error.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will be ended because the LAN Network
Manager database could not be initialized.

Action: View the DFIERROR.LOG in the LM11 directory for a log of all SQL
errors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. Message DFIPD402 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error loading resources.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will be not be started because the
dynamic link library DFIITRES.DLL could not be loaded.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Restart the workstation.

  2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program.

  4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. Message DFIPD403 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error starting internal process/threads.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because it could
not start its internal processes or threads.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Restart the workstation.

  2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  3. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. Message DFIPD404 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error starting the user interface.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because neither of
the executable files (DFIGTMN.EXE or DFIGIMN.EXE) could be loaded.

The file could not be loaded because of one of the following:

 o The format of the file was bad.
 o The file was not found.
 o There is not enough memory in your workstation.

 Action: Do the following:

  1. Restart the workstation.

  2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program.

  4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. Message DFIPD406 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to hop count/single-route broadcast.

Meaning: You have requested to change the hop-count or the single-route
broadcast parameter. If you change a single-route broadcast setting while the
single-route broadcast mode is Automatic, the mode will be changed to Manual.

This might disrupt normal activity by preventing users from establishing some
sessions.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. Message DFIPD407 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to numbers or frame forwarding.

Meaning: You have requested to change a LAN segment number, change the bridge
number, or stop forwarding frames. This might disrupt normal network activity
by ending user and LAN Network Manager sessions through this bridge. If you
change the LAN segment numbers or bridge number, you must re-link all LAN
Network Manager programs currently linked to this bridge. Also, you might have
to reconfigure other bridges on the affected LAN segment to maintain network
integrity.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. Message DFIPD408 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to link password.

Meaning: You have requested to change one or more passwords for reporting links
1 through 3 of the bridge. This will prevent other LAN Network Manager programs
from linking to the bridge until their reporting link passwords are also
changed.

Action: To proceed, select OK. Update the LAN Network Manager programs that are
authorized to link to the bridge with the new password. To cancel the request,
select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. Message DFIPD409 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to link 0 password.

Meaning: You have requested to change the password for reporting link 0 of this
bridge. This will prevent this LAN Network Manager program from re-linking to
the bridge until you change the reporting link password in this LAN Network
Manager program.

Action: To proceed, select OK. Change the password on the Bridge Parameters
window to match this password and restart the LAN Network Manager program
before you re-link to the bridge. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. Message DFIPD410 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm setting performance notification interval to n.

Meaning: You have requested to change the performance notification interval to
n; where n is the interval indicated in this message. The bridge performance
counters will be logged in the database table LANM.BRIDGE_PERFORMANCE every n
minutes. Logging continues until the notification interval is set to 0. The
notification interval is saved in the bridge definition table and will be
reapplied if the bridge link is lost and re-established.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. Message DFIPD411 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm setting performance notification interval to 0.

Meaning: You have requested to change the performance notification interval to
0. The bridge performance counters will not be logged in the database table
LANM.BRIDGE_PERFORMANCE.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. Message DFIPD412 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to percent frames lost threshold.

Meaning: You have requested to change the threshold for bridge performance
notifications. The bridge will send a performance notification if the number of
frames discarded exceeds the threshold you requested. Frames are typically
discarded due to errors or heavy traffic.

The recommended value for this field is 3%.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. Message DFIPD415 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Segment status details not available.

Meaning: You have selected to view status details for a segment that is not in
a beaconing, soft error, or continuous carrier condition. Status details for
segments that are not in one of these conditions are not available.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. Message DFIPD418 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Manual resync failed to complete because LAN Network Manager did not
receive response from adapter nnnnnnnnnnnn.

Meaning: A manual resynchronization of a Token-Ring Network segment has failed
because the LAN Network Manager program did not receive a response for the
adapter whose address is displayed. Possible causes of this are:

 o The adapter whose address is displayed is congested and is not responding.
   Therefore the LAN Network Manager program does not know the adapter's NAUN
   which is needed to continue.

 o There may be a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager program
   and the bridge used to query the adapter.

 o The bridge used to query the adapter is busy or not responding.

 o The bridge used to query the adapter does not have the CRS function enabled,
   which is needed for this function.

 Action: This may be a temporary condition. To determine the status of the
 segment and the adapter, do the following:

  1. Ensure that the configuration list display is sorted in upstream order
     (the default for Sort by).

  2. Use Find to locate the adapter address in the configuration list.

     Note:  The adapters listed before this adapter in the list display a
     status confirmed by the resync before the resync failed. Those after it in
     the list display their last known status since the resync process could
     not reach them.

  3. Query the adapter to determine its status. If the query is successful,
     then retry the manual resync. Otherwise, use the diagnostic information
     provided by the query to determine how to correct the failing adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. Message DFIPD419 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Manual resync failed to complete because LAN Network Manager did not
receive response from bridge nnnnnnnn.

Meaning: A manual resync of a PC Network (CSMA/CD) segment has failed because
the LAN Network Manager program did not receive a response from the bridge
whose name is displayed. Possible causes of this are:

 o The bridge whose name is displayed is congested and is not responding.

 o There may be a problem in the path between the LAN Network Manager program
   and the bridge providing the configuration list.

 o The bridge whose name is displayed does not have the LAN Error Monitor
   function enabled, which is needed for this function.

 Action: Query the bridge to determine its status. If the query is successful,
 then retry the manual resync. Otherwise, use the diagnostic information
 provided by the query to determine how to correct the failing bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. Message DFIPD420 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error allocating memory for internal threads/processes.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program will not be started because it could
not allocate enough memory to start its internal processes or threads.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Restart the workstation.

  2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  3. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. Message DFIPD421 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The field is invalid.

Meaning: The data entered for the field is not valid.

Action: Select Help for the field in error.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. Message DFIPD422 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Cannot find details for selected event/alert.

Meaning: The details requested for the event or alert do not exist in the event
log.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. Message DFIPD423 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No events match defined view.

Meaning: There are no events in the event log that match the conditions that
you defined for the event log view.

Action: Verify the search criteria and re-submit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. Message DFIPD424 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Database operation failed.  Consult OS/2 EE Database Manager
Programming Guide and Reference Volume 2.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program was unable to access a database table.
The Structured Query Language (SQL) error is displayed in the message box and
is also logged in \LM11\DFIERROR.LOG.

Action: Read the OS/2 Database Manager Programming Guide and Reference Volume 2
for more information on the specific error. If a recovery or restart is
advised, restart the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. Message DFIPD426 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge not found in current view.

Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is in the database, but the bridge is
not in the current view. Therefore, the bridge cannot be displayed.

Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. Message DFIPD425 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge not found

Meaning: You specified a bridge name that is not in the database.

Action: Verify the bridge name, and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. Message DFIPD427 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter information note in database:  no data to display.

Meaning: You selected an adapter that is not in the database. The adapter has
aged out of the configuration or the definition table and cannot be queried.

If the adapter reenters the network, the LAN Network Manager program will add
it to the configuration list.  If a definition existed for the station, you
must enter it again.

Action: When the adapter reenters the network, add a definition for the
station.  You can then query the adapter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. Message DFIPD430 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Maximum number of bridges have been defined.

Meaning: You cannot add this bridge definition.  The maximum number of bridges
(2000) have already been defined.

Action: Delete any unnecessary bridge definitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. Message DFIPD431 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge autolink limit exceeded.

Meaning: You have requested an automatic link for this bridge. The maximum
number of bridges are already defined with automatic link for the number of DLC
link stations that are available.  The autolink will occur when a link station
becomes available.

Action: Increase the number of DLC link stations and restart the LAN Network
Manager program. Make sure that the number of link stations specified in the
OS/2 Communications Manager LAN feature profiles is equal to or greater than
the number requested by the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. Message DFIPD432 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Interval changed to 1 minute:bridge upgrade needed

Meaning: You have requested to set the performance interval to an interval
greater than one minute. The bridge program that you are using requires an
upgrade to report performance counters over an interval greater than one
minute. The performance interval has been reset to one minute.

Action: To use the full capability of this function, use the IBM Token-Ring
Network Bridge Program, Version 2.1 or 2.2, or the latest PTF for the IBM PC
Network Bridge Program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. Message DFIPD433 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm request to reset Controlled Access Unit.

Meaning: You have requested to reset an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit. This
might disrupt the network activity of adapters on the CAU or activity through
any bridges on the CAU.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. Message DFIPD434 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not in current view.

Meaning: You specified an adapter name or address that is in the database, but
the adapter is not in the current view. Therefore, the adapter cannot be
displayed.

Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. Message DFIPD435 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter address not found in configuration table.

Meaning: You requested the adapter profile for an adapter that is no longer in
the configuration table.  It has aged out, and the profile data is not
available.

Action: The adapter must reenter the network before the function will work.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. Message DFIPD450 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm request to reconfigure LAN segment.

Meaning: You have requested to force the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit to
wrap. This will reconfigure the LAN segment and might disrupt normal network
activity. Network integrity might not be maintained.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. Message DFIPD451 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm request to disable.

Meaning: You have requested to disable a Lobe Attachment Module (LAM) or lobe
receptacle of an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit. This might disrupt normal
network activity. Network integrity might not be maintained.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. Message DFIPD453 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager will attempt to reestablish the link.

Meaning: You have requested an unlink to a bridge for which autolink is set to
Yes.  After the unlink completes, the LAN Network Manager program will attempt
to reestablish the link. You can change the autolink setting from the Bridge
Definition window.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. Message DFIPD454 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not in current view.

Meaning: You have requested an adapter that does not have a station definition.
This view displays only defined adapters.

Action: Change the View to All undefined and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. Message DFIPD455 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter not in current view.

Meaning: You have requested an adapter that has a station definition. This view
displays only undefined adapters.

Action: Change the View to All defined and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. Message DFIPD456 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge parameters could not be set for the listed reason. RC=.

Meaning: Your request to change parameters in a bridge has failed. Each
parameter that is not set is listed followed by a code that indicates the
reason for the failure.  The meaning and action for the reason codes are as
follows:

 1   Unknown

     Action:  Wait momentarily then resubmit the request.

 2   No communication response was received within a fixed time.

     Action:  Wait momentarily, then display the bridge profile to verify the
     changes.  If the profile does not indicate the changed information,
     resubmit the request to change the bridge parameter.

 3   The link is busy. The bridge is too busy to respond to the LAN Network
     Manager program.

     Action:  Wait momentarily then resubmit the request.

 4   The LAN Network Manager program is out of resources. The operation cannot
     be completed because all of the LAN Network Manager buffers are in use.

     Action:  Wait momentarily then resubmit the request.

 5   The bridge is not linked.  The LAN Network Manager program does not have a
     communication link established with the bridge.

     Action:  Link to the bridge then resubmit the request.

 6   You have requested to set the performance interval to an interval greater
     than one minute. The bridge program that you are using requires an upgrade
     to report performance counters over an interval greater than one minute.
     The performance interval has been reset to one minute.

     Action:  To use the full capability of this function, use the IBM
     Token-Ring Network Bridge program, Version 2.1 or 2.2, or the PTF for the
     IBM PC Network Bridge program.

 7   This parameter is not supported by the bridge.

     Action:  None.

 8   Frame error. A frame error occurred while performing the requested
     function because a frame was not constructed properly (it does not conform
     to the published frame architecture), the target bridge does not recognize
     the command (because of an earlier version of software in the bridge), or
     the target bridge cannot process the command (because of an internal
     error).

     Action:  None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. Message DFIPD457 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge unlink completed successfully.

Meaning: The request to unlink the bridge has completed successfully.

This message is logged with the bridge name.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. Message DFIPD458 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge link completed successfully.

Meaning: The request to link the bridge has completed successfully.

This message is logged with the bridge name.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. Message DFIPD463 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter removed successfully.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has removed the adapter and queried it
to ensure that it is no longer active. The adapter will be made inactive in the
configuration list. The definition (if any) will remain in the database.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. Message DFIPD468 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to initialize the adapter for Remote Program Update.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager adapter failed the initialization attempt by
the Remote Program Update process.  The process was not started and this LAN
Network Manager program will not provide remote program updates.

This message is logged with the following data:

  1. Adapter address
  2. Adapter number
  3. Adapter command
  4. CCB return code as defined in the IBM Local Area Network Technical
     Reference.

 Action: Display the event details for this message in the LAN Network Manager
 Event Log. Record the adapter command and CCB return code values.  Refer to
 the IBM Local Area Network Technical Reference for explanation, cause, and
 action for the return code. After correcting the problem, restart the LAN
 Network Manager program to activate the Remote Program Update process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. Message DFIPD470 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Duplicate filter defined.

Meaning: You requested to add a filter. A filter is already defined with the
same Alert ID, Resource name, and Alert type, but with a different Pass/Block
value.

Action: To change the Pass/Block value, return to the Alert Filter window,
select the filter, then select Change filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. Message DFIPD471 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error loading DLL.

Meaning: There is an error in loading the dynamic link library for the
User-defined alert filter.

The file could not be loaded because of one of the following:

 o The Dynamic link library field was blank.
 o The format of the file was bad.
 o The file was not found.
 o There is not enough memory in your workstation.
 o You are using the SYSP SET command to activate a filter that has not yet
   been defined.

 Action: Do the following:

  1. Verify that the DLL is in the LM11 directory, or in another directory
     specified in the LIBPATH statement of your CONFIG.SYS.

  2. Verify that the DLL name specified matches the DLL name in the LM11
     directory.

  3. If you are using the SYSP SET command to activate a filter, ensure that
     that filter exists.

  4. Recompile the DLL, and ensure that there are no errors. Use the sample
     alert filter routine (DFIEXALF) in the LM11 directory as an example.

  5. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  6. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. Message DFIPD472 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Routine not found.

Meaning: There is an error in getting the user-defined alert filter procedure
(routine) address.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Verify that the routine name that appears on the Alert Filters window
     matches the routine name in the User Filter dynamic link library.

  2. Verify that the routine is defined to be externally visible so that the
     LAN Network Manager program can access it. Use the sample alert filter
     routine (DFIEXALF) in the LM11 directory as an example.

  3. Recompile the DLL, and ensure that there are no errors.

  4. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. Message DFIPD474 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message filename.EXE is not a stand-alone executable file.

Meaning: The file you specified is not a stand-alone executable file.

Action: To start the LAN Network Manager program, refer to the LAN Network
Manager User's Guide.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. Message DFIPD475 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm request for program update enable.

Meaning: You have requested to enable an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit for
program update. The CAU is disabled while the microcode is being loaded. This
can take several minutes.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. Message DFIPD476 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Number of stations exceeds window display size.

Meaning: The Station List will not display all the stations for the requested
segment.  The number of stations in the database exceeds the number of stations
that the Station List can display (2000).

Action: Do one of the following:

 o Select a view that limits the stations displayed.
 o Delete unnecessary definitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. Message DFIPD477 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Another logon is in progress.

Meaning: You are attempting to log on while User Profile Management Services is
processing another logon.

Action: Complete or cancel the other logon, then resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. Message DFIPD478 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Cannot allocate memory for logon function.

Meaning: User Profile Management Services reported an out-of-memory error.

Action: Increase the available memory (or hard disk swapper space) and resubmit
the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. Message DFIPD479 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The user ID is not in the LANETMGR group or the LANETMGR group does not
exist.

Meaning: The user ID that you entered is not in the group ID LANETMGR or the
group ID does not exist in User Profile Management Services.

Action: Ensure that the group ID LANETMGR is listed on the User Profile
Management Services window.  Ensure that the user ID is listed in the group. If
the group ID or the user ID does not exist, add it through User Profile
Management Services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. Message DFIPD480 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Password incorrect.

Meaning: The logon has failed because the password is not correct.

Action: Log on with the correct password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. Message DFIPD481 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message n bridge(s) have been defined as autolink. At least this many DLC Link
Stations must be defined for next start-up or restart.

Meaning: You have requested fewer DLC link stations to be available at the next
start-up of the LAN Network Manager program than the number of bridges defined
as autolink bridges.

Action: Do one of the following:

 o Change the number of DLC link stations to a value that is at least as large
   as the number of autolink bridges to ensure that the LAN Network Manager
   program can link to all of the bridges at the same time.

 o Change some of the bridge definitions from Autolink=Yes to Autolink=No if
   those links are not needed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. Message DFIPD482 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Controlled Access Unit not found in current view.

Meaning: You specified an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit that is in the
database, but the CAU is not in the current view. Therefore, the CAU cannot be
displayed.

Action: Change the View to All and resubmit the request. If the View is already
All, select Refresh.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. Message DFIPD483 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message CAU ID not found.

Meaning: The ID of the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit that you entered is not
known by the LAN Network Manager program. The ID might have been typed
incorrectly, or the LAN Network Manager program might not be able to
communicate with the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit

Action: On the Controlled Access Units window (with View set to All), verify
the ID and status of the CAU.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. Message DFIPD484 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Delete definition is not permitted for a registered CAU. One or more
CAUs selected is registered.

Meaning: You requested to delete the definition of one or more Controlled
Access Units that are currently registered with this LAN Network Manager.

Action: Deregister the selected Controlled Access Units, and resubmit the
request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. Message DFIPD485 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Duplicate Controlled Access Unit.

Meaning: You requested to add a definition for an IBM 8230 Controlled Access
Unit that is already defined.

Action: To change the definition of the CAU, select the CAU then select Change
from the Action pull-down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. Message DFIPD486 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The LAN Network Manager adapter is not opened. LAN Network Manager will
operate in a limited mode.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program cannot open its adapter and,
therefore, will operate in a limited mode. Network functions such as link
bridge and network status display of local and remote LAN segments will not be
available.

Action: View the ACSLAN.LOG log file in the directory CMLIB to determine why
the LAN Network Manager program could not open the adapter. If you are running
on OS/2 2.0, this file is called LANTRAN.LOG and is located in the IBMCOM
directory. To exit from the LAN Network Manager program, select Exit from the
System pull-down on the LAN Network Manager main window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. Message DFIPD487 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Updates completed successfully. All LAN Network Managers linked to this
bridge must be re-linked.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program has updated a LAN segment number, the
bridge number, or has stopped frame forwarding in a bridge. This might disrupt
normal network activity by ending user and LAN Network Manager sessions through
this bridge.

Action: Relink all LAN Network Manager programs that were previously linked to
this bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. Message DFIPD488 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No adapters match the view defined.

Meaning: There are no adapters in the database that meet the conditions defined
for the adapter view.

Action: If View is set to All defined, change the View to All undefined.  If
View is set to All undefined, change the View to All defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. Message DFIPD489 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No bridges match the view defined.

Meaning: There are no bridges in the database that meet the conditions defined
for the bridges view.

Action: If View is set to All, no bridges are defined. If View is set to Some,
change the view criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. Message DFIPD490 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No Controlled Access Units match the view defined.

Meaning: There are no Controlled Access Units in the database that meet the
conditions defined for the CAUs view.

Action: If View is set to All, no CAUs are defined. If View is set to Some,
change the view criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. Message DFIPD491 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No segments match the view defined.

Meaning: There are no segments in the database that meet the conditions defined
for the segments view.

Action: If View is set to All the LAN Network Manager program is not in
communication with any segments. If View is set to Some, change the view
criteria.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. Message DFIPD494 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to initialize station management support.

Meaning: The Service Interface to the Station Manager code failed. This failure
can prevent the LAN Network Manager program from  communicating with an IBM
8230 Controlled Access Unit or with LAN Station Manager in a target station.
This message is logged with a reason code that identifies the cause of failure:

 13        Error opening LAN adapter. The number of users defined in the IEEE
           802.2 profile could be too low.

           Action:  Increase the number of users.

 80        Unexpected OS/2 error detected.

           Action: If the error persists, contact your Service Representative.

           Restart the system.

 83        Device driver open failed

           Action: Verify that the DEVICE= statement in CONFIG.SYS specifies
           the correct path and name of the Station Manager device driver. Also
           the LAN Adapter support software must be installed and loaded prior
           to Station Manager.

           If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network
           Manager program on the hard disk using the instructions in the IBM
           LAN Network Manager documentation.

 8D        Station Manager device driver error

           Action: Verify that the DEVICE= statement in CONFIG.SYS specifies
           the correct path and name of the Station Manager device driver.

           If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN Network
           Manager program on the hard disk using the instructions in the IBM
           LAN Network Manager documentation.

 14        Out of adapter resources

           Action: Change the configuration for the LAN Adapter Handler to
           increase resources, such as number of SAPs or reduce the number of
           applications that are using the LAN adapter simultaneously. Exit and
           Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

 90        LSM internal error

           Action:  If the error persists, contact your Service Representative.

 99        Error locating HLMCP.DLL.  LAN Network Manager cannot find the
           HLMCP.DLL.  This DLL enables LAN Network Manager to communicate with
           LAN Station Manager in target workstations.

           Action:  Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed on the LAN
           Network Manager workstation.

 other     LAN Network Manager internal errors

           Action:

              1. Restart the LAN Network Manager program. If this message
                 recurs, continue with step 2. Otherwise, stop here.

              2. If this message is displayed again, exit the LAN Network
                 Manager program and start the LAN Network Manager program
                 again.

              3. If this message is displayed again, exit the LAN Network
                 Manager program and restart the workstation. Then, start the
                 LAN Network Manager program.

              4. If this message continues to be displayed, reinstall the LAN
                 Network Manager program on the hard disk using the
                 instructions in the IBM LAN Network Manager documentation.

              5. If the problem is still not corrected, record the data section
                 of this message. Consult the License Information in the IBM
                 LAN Network Manager documentation and contact your service
                 supplier defined in the Statement of Service.

 This message is logged with the following data:

  1. LAN segment number
  2. Adapter address
  3. Adapter number
  4. Command
  5. Error reason code.

 Action: See the individual return codes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. Message DFIPD495 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message A refresh of the bridge profile failed.

Meaning: Communication with the bridge failed when you requested either to
refresh the performance data on the Bridge profile window or change one of the
associated dialogs (configuration parameters, reporting link parameters, or
performance data). The Bridge profile window will be closed.

Action: Attempt to redisplay the bridge profile to determine the cause of the
communication failure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. Message DFIPD497 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager may be isolated from network; manual recovery
required.

Meaning: You have requested to disable the LAN Network Manager lobe receptacle
or its lobe attachment module. The LAN Network Manager program will either be
removed from the network or isolated from other devices on the network. You
will have to restore the LAN Network Manager program to the network.

Action: To proceed, select OK.  To restore the LAN Network Manager program, do
the following:

  1. Use another LAN Network Manager program or a maintenance tool to restore
     the lobe receptacle or the lobe attachment module.

  2. Restart the IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. Message DFIPD498 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Database add or update failed.

Meaning: An attempt to add or update a database table was unsuccessful.

Action: Remove duplicate names and addresses from the appropriate database
table.

If you are adding or changing a station definition, remove any duplicates from
the Station Definition Table and the Location Definition Table.

If you are adding or changing a bridge definition, remove any duplicates from
the Bridge Definition Table.

If you are adding or changing a definition for an IBM 8230 Controlled Access
Unit, remove any duplicates from the CAU Table.

If you are adding or changing a CAU lobe definition, remove any duplicates from
the CAU Lobe Location Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. Message DFIPD499 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm removal of LAN Network Manager's adapter; all network
functions/applications will end.

Meaning: You have requested to remove the LAN Network Manager adapter. The LAN
Network Manager status will become Adapter Closed and all functions involving
communications on the network will be disabled.  In addition, any other LAN
application running on this adapter (such as LAN Server/ Requester) will be
interrupted or shut down.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. Message DFIPD520 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No events found.

Meaning: No events exist in the event log for the criteria you specified for
event list command.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. Message DFIPD521 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm new locally administered adapter address.

Meaning: You have requested to change the Locally administered adapter address.

This address overrides the universally administered address.

Each address must be unique.  An error will result when two or more adapters
with the same address attempt to use the network.

Action: After the configuration is finished you must unlink from the bridge,
change the base adapter address to the new locally administered address in the
bridge definition, restart the bridge and re-establish the link with the
bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. Message DFIPD522 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Locally administered adapter address not unique.

Meaning: The same adapter address was entered for both input fields in the
panel.  Locally administered adapter must always be unique address. The address
value was probably mistyped.

Action: Enter a different locally administered adapter address value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. Message DFIPD523 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to address range/criteria range filters.

Meaning: You have requested to change the Address range and/or Criteria range
filter definitions.

Changes to these parameters alter the filtering characteristics of the bridge.

Frames with source or destination address within the specified values defined
by Address range filters are filtered (discarded) by the bridge.

Frames will be filtered if the filtering information is greater than the high
value of each range and less than the low value of each range defined by the
Criteria range filter.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. Message DFIPD524 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to forwarding parameters.

Meaning: You have requested to change bridge Forwarding parameters.

This may affect the Spanning Tree protocol calculation in a LAN to:

 o Determine which one of two or more parallel bridges between two LAN segments
   is active at any one time.

 o Detect when a bridge has left or entered the network, and readjust active
   bridges accordingly.

 o Determine the relative "length" of the path in the network between two LAN
   segments (path cost).

 Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. Message DFIPD525 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to TCP/IP and/or broadcast address conversion.

Meaning: You have requested to change the TCP/IP address conversion and/or
Broadcast address conversion.

TCP/IP address conversion determines if the bit order of addresses within the
I-field of ARP and RARP packets is to be reversed between the Token-Ring and
Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LAN types.

Broadcast address conversion determines if the bridge should convert the
Token-Ring all-stations broadcast address in a frame to the Ethernet
all-stations broadcast address.

Changes to these parameters may cause the frames affected not being received by
some stations.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. Message DFIPD526 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to automatic mode selection, mode priority and/or
forward LLC traffic.

Meaning: You have requested to change Automatic mode selection, Mode priority
and/or Forwarding LLC traffic.

Automatic mode selection decides if the bridge should convert frames with the
method determined by frame content when the frames are forwarded from
Token-Ring to Ethernet/IEEE segments.  If this parameter is disabled or if the
destination type is unknown, all frames are converted according to the mode
priority.

If forward LLC traffic is enabled, the bridge will forward the LLC based
protocol frames from Token-Ring to Ethernet.  These frames will not be
forwarded otherwise.

Changes to these parameters may cause some of the frames to be undesirably
forwarded or be converted into improper protocol.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. Message DFIPD527 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Enabled SAPs address not unique.

Meaning: Duplicate SAPs have been entered.  The IEEE 802.2 SAPs for which
traffic is forwarded when Forward LLC traffic is enabled must be unique.

Action: Enter unique SAPs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. Message DFIPD528 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm change to bridge database.

Meaning: You have requested to delete entries in the bridge database. Once an
entry is deleted in the bridge database, it cannot be recovered.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. Message DFIPD529 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The bridge database could not be updated.

Meaning: A command to update the specified database in a bridge has failed. The
reason codes for the failure are:

 1         Unknown.

           Action: Try again at a later time.

 2         No communication response received within a fixed time.

           Action: Try again at a later time.

 3         Link busy -- The bridge is too busy to respond.

           Action: Try again at a later time.

 4         Out of resources -- The operation cannot be completed because all of
           LAN Network Manager's buffers were in use at the time of the
           request.

           Action: Try again at a later time.

 5         Bridge not linked -- LAN Network Manager does not have a
           communication link established with the bridge.

           Action: Link to the bridge and try again.

 6         Not used.

           Action: None

 7         Parameter not supported by the bridge.

           Action: None

 8         Frame error -- A frame may not have been constructed properly (it
           does not conform to the published frame architecture) and a frame
           error occurred while performing the requested function.  This error
           can occur if the target bridge does not recognize the command
           (because of an earlier version of software in the bridge) or cannot
           process the command (because of an internal error).

           Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. Message DFIPD530 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Mapped address pair not found.

Meaning: The mapped address pair selected for deletion was not found in the
bridge mapped address database and, therefore, could not be deleted.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. Message DFIPD531 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Low range value exceeds high range value.

Meaning: In a filter definition, a low range value exceeds the corresponding
high range value.

Action: Re-define the filter range so that the low range is less than the high
range.  Start the bridge again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. Message DFIPD532 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Hello time must be less than the forward delay.

Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning
Tree parameters where the Hello time value exceeds the value of the Forward
delay.

Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Hello time and bridge Forward
delay parameters, and enter the values again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. Message DFIPD533 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Forward delay must be less than the maximum age.

Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning
Tree parameters where the Forward delay value exceeds the value of the maximum
age.

Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Maximum age and bridge Forward
delay parameters, and enter the values again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. Message DFIPD534 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Hello time must be less than the maximum age.

Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter Spanning
Tree parameters where the Hello time value exceeds the value of the Maximum
age.

Action: Verify the correct values for the bridge Maximum age and bridge Hello
time parameters, and enter the values again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. Message DFIPD535 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed - duplicate database entry.

Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter an
address or address pair that already exists within that respective database.

Action: Verify the address or address pair that you are attempting to enter.
If it already exists, continue with the next entry, if any. If your entry was
incorrect, type the correct entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. Message DFIPD536 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Maximum number of database entries reached.

Meaning: This message is displayed when the operator attempts to enter, either
from a panel or from a file, a number of database entries that exceed the
maximum capacity of the data base.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. Message DFIPD537 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Static entry not found.

Meaning: The static entry selected for deletion was not in the bridge static
entry database and, therefore, could not be deleted.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. Message DFIPD538 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid locally administered address or name.

Meaning: The locally administered address that you entered was not within the
valid range.

Action: Enter a locally administered address between XX'4000 0000 0001' and
XX'4000 7FFF FFFF'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. Message DFIPD539 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Locally administered address has been updated.  Re-link required.

Meaning:  LAN Network Manager has changed a locally administered address of
this bridge.  The address has been set in the bridge as well as updated in the
Bridge Definition Table.  However, the bridge must be re-linked before the new
locally administered address can become effective.

Action: All LAN Network Managers linked to this bridge must be re-linked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. Message DFIPD540 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager database in use.

Meaning: A LAN Network Manager table needed for verifying the entered data is
currently not accessible.

Action: Wait for a little while and try the same action again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. Message DFIPD541 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Updating of locally administered address in LAN network manager
database failed.

Meaning:  LAN Network Manager has changed a locally administered address of
this bridge.  The address has been set in the bridge, but an attempt to update
the Bridge Definition Table has failed.  Moreover, the bridge must be re-linked
before the new locally administered address can become effective.

Action: Use Change Bridge Definition to update the locally administered address
in LAN Network Manager's database and re-link the bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. Message DFIPD542 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Re-link to bridge required before changing address.

Meaning: You have already changed a locally administered address.  Please
re-link this bridge before changing the address again.

Action: Un-link and re-link to the bridge, and then change the locally
administered address if desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. Message DFIPD543 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message You have requested to change the Frame forwarding parameter from
Inactive to Active.  The bridge may take several minutes to change this
parameter.

Meaning: You requested to change the Frame forwarding status of an 8209 bridge
from Inactive to Active.  The 8209 bridge may take several minutes to make the
change.  Therefore, the change might not be reflected in the Configuration
Parameters window immediately.

Action: If you want to confirm the change, exit the Configuration Parameters
window and the Bridge Profile window.  Wait several minutes.  Then, query the
profile of the bridge and access the Configuration Parameters window again.

If you do not want to confirm the change, no action is required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. Message DFIPD566 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to communicate with LAN Station Manager in the target station.

Meaning: You have requested information about a station that is maintained by
LAN Station Manager.  LAN Network Manager is unable to communicate with LAN
Station Manager in the target station.

Action: Ensure that LAN Station Manager is installed and running on the target
station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. Message DFIPD600 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Database not updated on LSM data query.

Meaning: LAN Network Manager was able to query the station successfully, but it
was unable to update the database with the current values.

Action: The database table has been damaged in some way.  The database may have
to be recovered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. Message DFIPD601 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error encoding/decoding CMIP frame.

Meaning: The data from station manager cannot be obtained correctly because of
an error encoding/decoding the CMIP frame.  Instead, the data is obtained from
data base.

Action: Wait momentarily and retry the operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. Message DFIPD602 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Set operation rejected by LSM.

Meaning: LSM rejected the request to update the fields.  None of the fields
have been updated at the station.

Action: None


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. Message DFIPD607 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LSM set error.  Could not set the following:

Action: Retry the operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 384. Message DFIPD608 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Response from LSM failed.

Meaning: The profile information was successfully retrieved from the adapter
interface, but the request for LSM information failed.  If LSM information has
been logged in the database, a profile will be displayed with that information.

Action: Retry the operation.  Ensure that LSM is still operational on that
station.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 385. Message DFIPD610 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Cannot communicate with any ring utilization reporter on segment xxx.

Meaning: One of the following conditions prevented LAN Network Manager from
reporting the ring utilization for this segment:

  1. There is no adapter on the specified segment that is capable of reporting
     ring utilization. To report ring utilization, a station must:

             o have LSM installed and running

             o for OS/2, have OS/2 ES 1.0 installed and running

               for DOS, have LAN Support Program 1.2 or later installed and
               running

             o have at least one active Token Ring adapter on the ring in
               question that supports ring utilization. (Adapter Part Number:
               74F9410, Feature code: 0149)

  2. None of the adapters in the configuration table in the database that is
     capable of reporting ring utilization is responding to LAN Network
     Manager.

  3. The LAN Network Manager program is experiencing increasing soft errors.

 Action: If you believe there is an adapter capable of reporting ring
 utilization on the segment, resync the ring using the manual resync option on
 the Configuration List window and try again. If a newly-updated configuration
 list reports an adapter capable of reporting ring utilization as active, check
 the Event Log to see if an adapter congested alert has been reported for this
 adapter. If the adapter is congested it will not be able to respond to LAN
 Network Manager's query.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 386. Message DFIPD611 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Entry fields text unchanged.

Meaning: You have changed the contents of a field but the information in the
field is not different.

Action: Verify that you have entered the correct information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 387. Message DFIPD615 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message CAU XXXXXXXX cannot be registered.  The CAU already is registered with
XXXXXXXXXXXX.

Meaning: You have requested to register with an IBM 8230 Controlled Access Unit
(CAU) that is currently registered to another LAN management program. The
adapter address of this management program is provided in the message text. You
cannot register with this CAU until the other management program deregisters.

Action: Contact the person who controls the LAN management program that is
registered with the CAU and request that the CAU be deregistered. Wait until
the CAU is deregistered and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 388. Message DFIPD650 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The list of adapters for segment n is not available.  LAN Network
Manager does not have access to adapters in Ethernet segments.

Meaning: You have requested a configuration list or a segment level view for an
Ethernet segment. LAN Network Manager does not communicate with adapters on
Ethernet segments and, therefore, cannot provide that information.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 389. Message DFIPD651 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The test cannot be performed on segment n.  LAN Network Manager does
not have access to Ethernet segments.

Meaning: You have requested to test an Ethernet segment for data-transfer
capabilities. LAN Network Manager does not communicate with Ethernet segments
and, therefore, cannot provide that information.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 390. Message DFIPD652 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The graphics facility does not exist on this system.  LAN Network
Manager will run in the text mode.

Meaning: You have requested to run the LAN Network Manager with a graphical
user interface. However, LAN Network Manager cannot find the graphic facility
on this workstation and, therefore, will run with the textual interface.

Action: Verify that the graphical facility is installed on your workstation and
that your CONFIG.SYS has been updated to access the facility.  Then, restart
LAN Network Manager. The graphical facility is installed in the IBMEXQ
directory. Ensure that this directory is specified in the LIBPATH statement of
your CONFIG.SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 391. Message DFIPD653 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message All the graphics DLLs could not be loaded.  LAN Network Manager will
run in the text mode.

Meaning: This message is displayed under the following conditions:

 o You have requested to run the LAN Network Manager with a graphical user
   interface. However, LAN Network Manager cannot load the graphic facility
   DLLs and, therefore, will run with the textual interface.

 o You are attempting to start LAN Network Manager from a directory other than
   the LM11 directory.

 Action: If you are attempting to start LAN Network Manager from a command line
 or a command file, ensure that the current directory is LM11.  Otherwise,
 reinstall LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 392. Message DFIPD660 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Filter not found.

Meaning: You have selected a filter that cannot be found.  The filter might
have been deleted by another user from the NetView interface.

Action: Refresh the Event Filters window to verify that the filter still
exists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 393. Message DFIPD661 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message From date cannot be after To date.

Meaning: You have specified a From date that is later than the To date that you
specified.

Action: Check the dates that you entered.  Ensure that the From date is on or
before the To date.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 394. Message DFIPD662 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message From time cannot be after To time.

Meaning: You have specified a From time that is later than the To time that you
specified.

Action: Check the times that you entered.  Ensure that the From time is on or
before the To time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 395. Message DFIPD663 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No more than 255 segments may be specified.

Meaning: You have specified more than 255 segments for an Event Log filter.

Note:  In the LAN Network Manager user interface, the listbox on the Add Event
Filter window can contain more than 255 segments, however, you cannot specify
more than 255 segments for a filter.

Action: Reduce the number to 255 or less.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 396. Message DFIPD664 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Filter not found.  Do you want to add the filter?

Meaning: You have requested to change a filter that has been deleted. Perhaps
the filter was deleted by a NetView operator while you were changing it.

Action: If you would like to add the filter, select Ok. Otherwise, select
Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 397. Message DFIPD670 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error opening the specified file.  DosOpen rc=n.

Meaning: An error occurred while trying to open the specified file. The return
code from the open command is indicated in the message.

The meaning and action for the most common return codes are as follows:

 3         Path not found.

           Action:  Ensure that the path is correct.

 4         Too many files open.

           Action:  Close some files and resubmit the command.

 5         Access denied.

           Action:  Verify that write access is available for the file.

 112       Disk full.

           Action:  Free some disk space then resubmit the command.

 For information on other return codes, read the information about the DosOpen
 command in the OS/2 Programming Reference.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 398. Message DFIPD671 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The file already exists.  LAN Network Manager will append to the file.

Meaning: The specified file already exists.

Action: If you want LAN Network Manager to append the information to the file,
select Ok.  Otherwise, select Cancel then resubmit the command with a different
filename specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 399. Message DFIPD672 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Currently defined autolink values will be used.

Meaning: You have selected more than one bridge to be linked.

Action: Select Yes to have LAN Network Manager default to the currently defined
autolink value for each bridge. Select No to have LAN Network Manager prompt
you for the autolink value of each bridge.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 400. Message DFIPD990 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message A software error has occurred during the execution of the LAN Network
Manager. The LAN Network Manager is no longer operational.

Meaning: The LAN Network Manager program is experiencing a critical internal
error and is no longer operational.

This message is an alert but is not logged in the LAN Network Manager event
log. If the LAN Network Manager program (controlling or observing) has
communication with a host, this alert is sent to the host.

The text for the error is saved in the DFIERROR.LOG file. If the disk is full,
it may not be possible to record the error in the file. Each time that the LAN
Network Manager program is started (this does not include starting via the
Restart function), the DFIERROR.LOG file is renamed to DFIERROR.BAK and a new
file is created if an error occurs.

The message is displayed with the following data:

  1. Component ID
  2. Location
  3. Error code.

 Action: Perform the following based on the Component ID that is displayed:

  3001   There has been a critical database error. The Error code contains the
         code returned to the LAN Network Manager program from the Database
         Manager.

         Full descriptions of the Database Manager error codes are in Database
         Manager Programming Guide and Reference, Volume 2, Appendix A. By
         following the actions advised in that documentation, re-installation
         of the LAN Network Manager program may be avoidable.

         The following is an abbreviated list of the error codes that may be
         received from the Database Manager:

    964   The transaction log for the database is full.

          The file space for the transaction log has been exhausted. Increase
          the available disk space. If the error recurs, then increase the
          database configuration parameter to allow a larger log file.

    968   The file system is full.

          The file system containing the database is full. Increase the
          available disk space.

 11000   The LAN Network Manager adapter interface is out of transmit buffers.
         Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and
         contact your service supplier.

 11001   Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and
         contact your service supplier.

 11002   Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and
         contact your service supplier.

 11003   Restart the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and
         contact your service supplier.

 12002   The LAN Network Manager program has exhausted its heap space. Restart
         the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and contact
         your service supplier.

 21000   The LAN Network Manager graphical interface is unable to allocate
         memory. Ensure that the required amount of memory is installed on the
         machine. For best results, restart the workstation and then restart
         LAN Network Manager. If this is not possible, restart LAN Network
         Manager. If this message recurs, record the error data and contact
         your service supplier.

 Other   Restart the LAN Network Manager program. If the problem recurs,
         reinstall the LAN Network Manager program. Record the error data and
         contact your service supplier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 401. Message DFIPD1101 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error creating window.

Meaning: An error has occurred during the creation of the window. You might
have too many windows or applications open.

Action: Close some of the windows or applications.  If the problem persists,
shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 402. Message DFIPD1102 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Too many open views.

Meaning: You have requested to open a view while eight views are already open.
You cannot have more than 8 views open at one time.

Action: Close any views that you do not need before requesting to open another
view. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart
the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 403. Message DFIPD1105 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message File I/O error.

Meaning: An error has occurred while writing to or reading from the meta file
associated with this view.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Verify that your disk has sufficient space on which to store the view.
     You should have at least 2MB of free space.

  2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  3. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the
     program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 404. Message DFIPD1106 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error while laying out the view.

Meaning: An error has occurred while the graphic layout facility was creating
the view.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  2. If the problem persists, shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the
     program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 405. Message DFIPD1109 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message No adapters in the segment.  The view cannot be opened.

Meaning: You have requested to open a segment level view for a segment that has
no adapters associated with it.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 406. Message DFIPD1110 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The list of adapters for segment is not available. LAN Network Manager
does not have access to adapters in Ethernet segment.

Meaning: You have requested to display a segment level view of a segment that
is an Ethernet segment.  LAN Network Manager does not have access to
information about Ethernet adapters and, therefore, cannot display the segment
level view.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 407. Message DFIPD1112 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Layout facility does not support so many linked or once linked bridges.
Delete the definitions for some of the bridges not currently in use.

Meaning: The graphic facility does not support more than 1400 nodes.  Each
segment to which you are linked by a bridge or to which you were once linked by
a bridge constitutes a node.

Action: Delete the definitions of some of the unused bridges to which you were
once linked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 408. Message DFIPD1121 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error initializing the window.

Meaning: An error has occurred during the initialization of the window. You
might have too many windows or applications open.

Action: Close some of the windows or applications.  If the problem persists,
shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 409. Message DFIPD1122 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error creating message queue.

Meaning: An error has occurred during the initialization of the message queue.
You might have too many windows or applications open.

Action: Close some of the windows or applications.  If the problem persists,
shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 410. Message DFIPD1123 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error registering window.

Meaning: An error has occurred during the registration of the window. You might
have too many windows or applications open.

Action: Close some of the windows or applications.  If the problem persists,
shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 411. Message DFIPD1130 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error reading profile.  The LAN Network Manager cannot continue and
will close.

Meaning: The graphic facility profile is missing or has been corrupted.

Action: Recopy PROFCRNT.DAT and PROFDEF.DAT from the installation diskettes
into the LM11 directory.  Then, restart LAN Network Manager.

If the problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 412. Message DFIPD1131 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unexpected window close message received.

Meaning: An error occurred that has caused the window to close unexpectedly.

Action: Note the reason code and consult your system programmer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 413. Message DFIPD1132 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error loading a library file. Load Error = n.  The LAN Network Manager
cannot continue and will close.

Meaning: An error has occurred while attempting to load a resource file.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Restart the workstation.

  2. Restart the LAN Network Manager program.

  3. If the error still occurs, re-install the LAN Network Manager program.

  4. If the error still occurs, increase the memory in the workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 414. Message DFIPD1133 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error initializing the graphic facility.

Meaning: An error occurred during initialization of the graphic facility. The
view cannot be displayed.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  2. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 415. Message DFIPD1135 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error allocating memory.

Meaning: A heap error occurred while LAN Network Manager was allocating memory.

Action:

  1. Close some of the windows.

  2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 416. Message DFIPD1136 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error starting the graphic facility window with view in it.

Meaning: An error occurred during initialization of the graphic facility. The
view cannot be displayed.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Close some of the windows.

  2. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 417. Message DFIPD1137 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Error saving the view.

Meaning: An error occurred while the view was being saved.

Action: Do the following:

  1. Delete the view file (SEGxxxx.VIE) of the view in error from the LM11
     directory.

  2. Resubmit the save request.

  3. If the problem persists, contact your IBM support center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 418. Message DFIPD1138 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Operation failed.  Objects could not be selected on the graphic
facility.

Meaning: The graphic facility could not select the object.

Action: Close the view.  Re-open the view.  Then, resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 419. Message DFIPD1141 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Definition does not exist.

Meaning: You have requested resource information and status for an undefined
resource.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 420. Message DFIPD1142 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message All customization will be lost.

Meaning: You have requested to reset the symbols or colors to their default.
All customization to the symbols or colors will be lost.

Action: To proceed, select OK.  To quit, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 421. Message DFIPD1143 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The view will be saved.  Any existing view file will be overwritten.

Meaning: You have requested to save a view for which a VIE file already exists.
The new VIE file will overwrite the existing one.

Action: To proceed, select OK.  To quit, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 422. Message DFIPD1145 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge n : definition has been deleted.  Operation cannot be performed.

Meaning: You have requested to perform an action on an invalid bridge. The
bridge's definition has been deleted.  If configuration refresh is set to
manual, the view will not reflect the deletion of a bridge definition until the
view is refreshed.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 423. Message DFIPD1146 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Segment type is 3174-Peer or PC Network.  No other information is
available.

Meaning: You have requested information about the symbol representing a BUS in
a 3174-Peer or PC Network segment.  The only information available about this
symbol is the LAN type.

Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 424. Message DFIPD1150 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Legend is already invoked.

Meaning: You have requested to access the Legend from a view while the Legend
window is already open from another view.

Action: Locate the Legend window that is open.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 425. Message DFIPD1151 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to draw the icon.

Meaning: An error occurred while an icon was being drawn in the Legend -
symbols window.

Action: Shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. If the
problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 426. Message DFIPD1152 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Unable to create the color table.

Meaning: An error occurred while the colors were being drawn in the Legend -
colors window.

Action: Shutdown LAN Network Manager and then restart the program. If the
problem persists, reinstall LAN Network Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 427. Message DFIPD1154 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Item selected cannot be modified.

Meaning: You have requested to change a symbol on the Legend - symbols window
that is fixed and cannot be changed.  The following symbols cannot be changed:

 o Disabled-used CAU lobe
 o Disabled-unused CAU lobe
 o Remote bridge
 o Bridge

 Action: None.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 428. Message DFIPD1155 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The customization on all colors and symbols will be lost.

Meaning: You have requested to reset the symbols and colors to their defaults.
All customization to the symbols and colors will be lost.

Action: To proceed, select OK.  To quit, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 429. Message DFIPD1161 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Too many tackpoints in view.

Meaning: More than 300 tackpoints have been defined in a single view.

Action: Either delete some of the tackpoints or delete the VIE file that
represents this view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 430. Message DFIPD1162 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Too many tackpoints between two nodes.

Meaning: More than 50 tackpoints have been defined between two nodes in a view.

Action: Either delete some of the tackpoints or delete the VIE file that
represents this view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 431. Message DFIPD1172 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Segment n not found.

Meaning: The segment that you specified on the Find window does not exist.

Action: Verify the segment number and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 432. Message DFIPD1174 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Bridge n not found.

Meaning: The bridge that you specified on the Find window does not exist.

Action: Verify the bridge name and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 433. Message DFIPD1178 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Invalid segment number n.  CAU n found in Segment n.

Meaning: You have specified both a segment number and a CAU ID on the Find
window.  This CAU ID cannot be found on the specified segment.

Action: Verify the segment number and the CAU ID.  Then, resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 434. Message DFIPD1180 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message CAU n not found.

Meaning:

The CAU that you specified on the Find window does not exist.

Action:

Verify the CAU ID and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 435. Message DFIPD1184 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter n not found in Segment n.

Meaning: You have specified both a segment number and an adapter address or
name on the Find window.  This adapter cannot be found on the specified
segment.

Action: Verify the segment number and the adapter name or address.  Then,
resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 436. Message DFIPD1189 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter n not found.

Meaning: The adapter name or address that you specified on the Find window does
not exist.

Action: Verify the adapter name or address and resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 437. Message DFIPD1196 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Adapter n attached to CAU, but CAU ID not found.

Meaning: The adapter that you requested to find has been found and is attached
to a CAU.  However, the CAU ID for that CAU is not in the database.

Action: Resynchronize the segment in which the adapter was found. Turn the CAU
off then on.  Then, resubmit the request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 438. Message DFIPD1197 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The find operation could not be completed due to a database error.

Meaning: Your request could not be completed due to a database error. This
error will also be accompanied by a error message from Database Manager.

Action: Refer to the Actions for the associated Database Manager error message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 439. Message DFIPD1301 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The selected event(s) will be deleted from the event log.

Meaning: The selected events will be deleted from the event log. The records of
the selected events will be deleted from the database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 440. Message DFIPD1302 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The event log will be cleared.

Meaning: All records in the event log will be deleted from the database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 441. Message DFIPD1303 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The event will be deleted from the event log.

Meaning: The record of the event will be deleted from the database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 442. Message DFIPD1304 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager will be restarted with all system parameter updates
applied. Do you want to continue with restart?

Meaning: LAN Network Manager's adapter will momentarily close and re-open. In
addition, the following will happen:

 o All bridges will be unlinked and will not be relinked unless automatic
   bridge link is specified in their definition and autolink on the Bridge
   Parameters window is set to active.

 o All changes to system parameters (such as host connection type, adapter
   used, or maximum events in the event log) will be applied.

 o LAN Network Manager's segment will be resynched.

   Note:  The adapter close is a logical close which will not effect the
   adapter communications of any other applications.

 Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 443. Message DFIPD1305 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message LAN Network Manager will be terminated and all network management
operations will end.  Do you want to exit LAN Network Manager?

Meaning: LAN Network Manager will be terminated and all network management
operations will end.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 444. Message DFIPD1306 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deletion of CAU(s).

Meaning: The definitions of the selected CAUs will be deleted from the
database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 445. Message DFIPD1307 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deletion of bridge(s).

Meaning: The definitions of the selected bridges will be deleted from the
database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 446. Message DFIPD1308 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deletion of station(s).

Meaning: The definitions of the selected stations will be deleted from the
database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 447. Message DFIPD1309 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message The LAN Network Manager will be secured from unauthorized access. The
LAN Network Manager's adapter will not be closed.  Logging and alert functions
will continue.

Meaning: LAN Network Manager will be iconized. If anyone selects any of the
functions on the icon's menu or attempts to restore the icon to LAN Network
Manager's main window, LAN Network Manager will prompt them to enter a user ID
and password defined in OS/2's User Profile Management. If the user enters an
incorrect user ID or password, LAN Network Manager will remain in a secured
state.

While secured, LAN Network Manager will operate normally. Event and alert
logging functions will continue, as will other functions such as access control
and detection of configuration changes.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 448. Message DFIPD1310 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm removal of this adapter from the network.

Meaning: Once removed, the adapter will no longer be able to communicate with
the network in any way. Manual intervention at the workstation will probably be
required to restore the adapter's ability to communicate with the network. Note
that the removal of an adapter may adversely effect the operation of a ring.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 449. Message DFIPD1311 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deletion of filter(s).

Meaning: The definitions of the selected filters will be deleted from the
database.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 450. Message DFIPD1312 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Deactivate previously defined filter?

Meaning: Alerts will no longer be passed through the filter in question before
being sent to the host.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 451. Message DFIPD1313 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Failed to start filter program.

Meaning: The user filter could not be started for one of the following reasons:

 o LAN Network Manager froze a previous user filter because it timed out, that
   is it took longer than 5 seconds to return control to the LAN Network
   Manager program. No more user filters can be started for this invocation of
   the LAN Network Manager program.

 o LAN Network Manager could not create a thread to execute the filter program
   you defined.

 Action: If a previous filter has timed out, you must exit LAN Network Manager
 and start it again to be able to define a new user filter.

 If a previous filter has not timed out, either end some other OS/2
 applications and retry the operation or increase the THREADS parameter in your
 CONFIG.SYS and reboot the workstation. Note that this parameter cannot be
 greater than 255.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 452. Message DFIPD1314 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Help initialization failed. Help will not be available for this
invocation of LAN Network Manager.

Meaning: An error has occurred while LAN Network Manager was initializing Help.
LAN Network Manager will continue to run, but no help will be available.

Action: To proceed without Help, select Ok. Otherwise, select Cancel, exit LAN
Network Manager, then start LAN Network Manager again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 453. Message DFIPD1315 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm swap of x and y.

Meaning: You have requested to swap the positions of two of the Controlled
Access Unit lobe access modules.

Action: To proceed, select Ok. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 454. Message DFIPD1316 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Shutdown request ignored. LAN Network Manager cannot be shut down when
the main window's action bar is grayed.

Meaning: You started a Desktop Shutdown while LAN Network Manager was busy
performing one of the following operations:

 o Initialization

 o Restart

 o Deletion of the Event Log

 o Exit

 Action: Wait until LAN Network Manager finishes the operation. You may then
 select Shutdown from the Desktop Manager pull-down menu again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 455. Message DFIPD1317 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deregistration of CAU(s).

Meaning: You have requested to deregister with one or more IBM 8230 Controlled
Access Units (CAUs).  The CAU status remains Normal and Registered displays the
value of No on the Controlled Access Units window.  In addition, you will be
unable to monitor the stations attached to the CAU.

Action: To proceed, select OK.  No response message is sent. To cancel the
request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 456. Message DFIPD1318 - Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Confirm deletion of qualifier(s).

Meaning: You have requested to delete segments from the CAU Qualifiers list.
CAU Qualifiers are segments to which LAN Network Manager has a bridged path but
no link. The LAN Network Manager program deregisters with any CAUs on these
segments when you delete them from the CAU Qualifiers list.

Once you delete these segment definitions, they will not be displayed on the
CAU Qualifier window, and LAN Network Manager will not search for CAUs to
monitor this segment.  All managment of and communication by LAN Network
Manager to CAUs on this segment stops.

Action: To proceed, select OK. To cancel the request, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select File from a view to use one of the following functions:

 Save
      To save the view.

 Save as
      To save a copy of the view with a new name or description.

 Print
      To print or plot a copy of the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save, in the File pull-down menu, to save the view without changing the
current view name or description.

If there is a file with the same name, the file you create here will overwrite
the existing one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Save as ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save as, in the File pull-down menu, to save a copy of the view with a
different name and description. When you select Save as, a window displays the
current view name and description. Make your changes in that window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save as, in the File pull-down menu, to save a copy of the view. Use
this window to change the view name or description. Then select the Save
pushbutton.

To exit Save as without making any changes, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enter a new name, up to 256 characters, for the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enter a description, up to 256 characters, of the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Print, in the File pull-down menu, to print or plot a copy of the
displayed portion of the current view. When you select Print, a window appears
in which you can specify print options and the print destination.

While you are printing, the Print pull-down item changes to Stop printing. You
can stop the print by selecting Stop printing in the pull-down menu.

If you move the view, change the size of the view, or change an object in the
view, the view window will not show the changes until the print is completed.

To print all or part of the online help, do the following:

  1. Request help in order to display a help window.

  2. Select Services on the action bar of the help window.

  3. Select Print in the Services pull-down menu.

  4. Specify the portions of the online help that you want to print.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Print Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this window, specify whether you want the nodes filled when you print the
view. The pattern or color with which a node is filled can indicate its status
or its type. If you do not need this information, you can save printing time by
not selecting the Fill Nodes check box.

After you decide whether you want the nodes filled, select a print destination
from the displayed list, then select Print.

Select Printer Setup to specify more print options, such as the type of form to
use, the print quality, and form-feed control.

To exit Print options without making any changes, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Fill Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Fill Nodes check box on the Print Options window if you want the
inside area of the node symbol filled in with color or a pattern when the view
is printed. The pattern or color with which a node is filled can indicate its
status or its type.

If you do not need this type of information, you can save printing time by not
selecting the Fill Nodes check box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Destinations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this window, select one of the listed destinations to indicate where you
want the print output sent. Each destination is a printer or plotter that is
defined to the OS/2 * program. The format of each destination is:

<printer name> on <queue or logical address>
using <device driver name> <(device name)>


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Printer Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In this window, set up the printer options, such as paper size, orientation,
and other options supported by the printer.

This window is provided by the specific device driver installed in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit from a view to use the following functions:

 Undo
      To cancel the last edit change you or the application program made to the
      view.

 Undo last x changes
      To cancel the last x editing changes you made to a view since you opened
      or saved the view.

 Find
      To locate a node or link in a view. If you do not know the resource name,
      you can enter search criteria to try to find it.

 Select object types
      To select all objects of a particular type (nodes, links, text, or
      tackpoints) in the current view.

 Deselect all
      To deselect anything that you selected in a view, including objects or a
      region.

 Select objects in region
      To select the objects in the region of a certain type inside a selection
      box.

 Cut
      To cut (move) objects from the selected region into a clipboard. You can
      later paste these objects into a region in the current view or in another
      view.

 Copy
      To copy objects from the selected region into a clipboard. You can later
      paste these objects into a region in another view or in the current view.

 Paste
      To paste copied or cut objects from the clipboard into the selected
      region.

 Add background picture
      To add a background picture to a view.

 Delete background picture
      To remove a background picture from a view.

 Move
      To move a selected object (node, text, or tackpoints) or selected region
      of objects into another location in the view.

 Clear
      To remove selected objects from the view.

 Add objects
      To add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links to a view. With Add objects,
      you can add any object that the application program provides.

 Stop adding objects
      To exit Add objects.

 Modify text
      To change text that you have added to a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Undo, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the most recent editing
change you or the application program made to the view. Undo displays the most
recent editing function. For example, if Move was your last editing change, the
item on the Edit pull-down menu is Undo move.

You can continue to use Undo to step backwards through the editing changes you
made to the view and cancel each change.

Undo cancels only editing changes. You cannot select Undo until you make an
editing change to the view.

Undo does not cancel editing changes after you save a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Undo last x changes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Undo last x changes, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the last x
editing changes that you have made to the view since you opened it or since you
saved the view, whichever is the most recent. If you zoom in on the view and
select Undo last x changes, you cancel all the editing changes to the entire
view, whether or not they are visible in the new window.

You cannot select Undo last x changes until you have made at least one editing
change to the view.

When you select Undo last x changes, message EXQ0408W appears and asks you to
confirm your decision.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find, in the Edit pull-down menu, to locate a node or a link in a view.
When you select Find, a window appears in which you can enter up to four search
arguments. Enter the full or partial name, address, type, or any other data
that might locate the resource. You can use wildcards, such as (asterisks and
question marks) if you do not know the full name. Leaving a field blank is
equivalent to entering an asterisk in the field.

When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the resource, and
that resource is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Find a Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in a full or partial resource name, resource address, resource type, or
any other location data, then select either the Find First or Find All
pushbutton. Select Find First to find a resource that meets the search
requirements. After that resource is found, the Find First pushbutton changes
to Find Next. If you select that pushbutton, you then find another resource
that meets the search arguments. Select Find All to find all resources in the
view that meet search arguments.

Select Case Sensitive to recognize the difference between upper and lowercase
characters. When the resource is found, the view zooms to and centers on the
resource, and that resource is selected.

To exit Find, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Case Sensitive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Case Sensitive to recognize the difference between upper and lowercase
characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the full or partial name of the resource you are trying to find.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the full or partial address of the resource you are trying to find.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the full or partial type of the resource you are trying to find.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Other data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter any other information that might locate the resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Select object types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Choose Select object types, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more
types of objects in the view. You can select Node groups, Link groups, Free
text, and Tackpoints.

Many actions on the action bar become available to you only after you select an
object. These actions are grayed out until you select an object or a region.

Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in
a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then
deselect the objects you do not want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Select Object Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Choose Select object types, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or more
types of objects in the view.

In this window, select one or more of the following types of objects from the
view:

 Node groups
 Link groups
 Free text
 Tackpoints

 Select object types is useful when you want to select a majority of objects in
 a view. You can use Select object types to select all the objects, then
 deselect the objects you do not want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Node groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Node groups in the Select Object Types window, to select all the nodes
in the view. When you select node groups, you automatically select any text
that the application program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Link groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Link groups on the Select Object Types window, to select all the links
in the view. When you select link groups, you automatically select any text
that the application program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Free text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Free text on the Select Object Types window, to select all the text in
the view. This selects the text that you have added to the view, not the text
that the application program provides for resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Tackpoints on the Select Object Types window, to select all the
tackpoints in the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Deselect all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Deselect all, in the Edit pull-down menu, to deselect everything that
you selected in the view, including objects and regions. Deselect all is not
available unless you have selected one or more objects or a region.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Select objects in region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Choose Select objects in region, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or
more types of the objects in a defined region.

To select objects in a region, you first select a region in the view.

You can choose the following types of objects in the region you selected:

 Node groups
 Link groups
 Free text
 Tackpoints

 Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of
 objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region,
 then deselect the individual objects that you do not want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Select Objects in Region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Choose Select objects in region, in the Edit pull-down menu, to select one or
more types of the objects in a defined region.

In this window, choose one or more types of objects to select from the selected
region.

To select objects in a region, you first select a region in the view.

You can choose the following types of objects from the specified region:

 Node groups
 Link groups
 Free text
 Tackpoints

 Select objects in region is useful when you want to select a majority of
 objects in a region. You can select a region, choose Select objects in region,
 then deselect the individual objects that you do not want.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Node groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Node groups on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the
nodes in the specified region. When you select node groups, you automatically
select any text that the application program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Link groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Link groups on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the
links in the specified region. When you select link groups, you automatically
select any text that the application program provides for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Free text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Free text on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the text
that you have added within the specified region. This selects the text that you
added to the view, not the text that the application program provides for
resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Tackpoints on the Select Objects in Region window, to select all the
tackpoints in the selected region.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cut, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move objects from a selected region
to the clipboard. To select Cut, you first select a region from which to cut an
object or objects.

To cut objects from one region in a view and paste them onto another region in
the same view, you would do the following:

  1. Select the region from which you want to cut objects.

  2. Select Cut. A window then appears, in which you select the types of
     objects you want to cut. Select the types of objects you want to cut.

     You can cut the following types of objects from the region:

    Node groups
    Link groups
    Free Text

  3. Select the Cut pushbutton.

  4. Select Paste.

     You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts
     the objects within the box.

     If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the
     center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box.

     Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 within the region to paste the
     objects.

     If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them.

 To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cut, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move objects from a selected region
to the clipboard.

In this window, select one or more types of objects to cut from the selected
region, then select Cut.

You can cut the following types of objects from the region you selected:

 Node groups
 Link groups
 Free Text

 When you cut links, you also cut their corresponding nodes.

 To exit Cut, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Node groups on the Cut window, to cut all of the nodes in the selected
region. When you cut nodes, you automatically cut all objects grouped with
those nodes, including text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Link groups on the Cut window, to cut all of the links in the selected
region.

The links check box is disabled (grayed-out) until you select Node groups. When
you cut links you cut their attached nodes.

When you cut links, you automatically cut all objects grouped with those links,
such as text and tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Free text on the Cut window, to cut all of the text that you have added
in the selected region.

This function does not cut text grouped with other objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy, in the Edit pull-down menu, to copy objects from a selected region
into the clipboard. To select Copy, you must first select a region from which
to copy objects.

To copy objects from one region in a view onto another region in the same view,
you would do the following:

  1. Select the region from which you want to copy objects.

  2. Select Copy. A window then appears, in which you select the types of
     objects you want to copy. Select the types of objects you want to copy.

     You can copy the following types of objects from the region:

    Node groups
    Link groups (with or without Tackpoints)
    Free text

  3. Select the Copy pushbutton.

  4. Select Paste.

     You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts
     the objects within the box.

     If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the
     center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box.

     Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 to paste the objects.

     If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them.

 To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy, in the Edit pull-down menu, to copy objects from a selected region
into the clipboard.

In this window, select one or more types of objects to copy from the selected
region, then select Copy.

You can copy the following types of objects from the region you selected:

 Node groups
 Link groups
 Free text

 When you copy links, you also copy their corresponding nodes.

 To exit Copy without copying any objects, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Node groups on the Copy window, to copy all of the nodes in the selected
region. When you copy nodes, you automatically copy all objects grouped with
nodes, including text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Link groups on the Copy window, to copy all of the links in the selected
region.

When you copy links you also copy their attached nodes. If you do not select
nodes, the links check box remains disabled. If you are copying a region, the
link's endpoint nodes must be included in the region for the links and nodes to
be copied.

When you copy links, you automatically copy all objects grouped with links,
such as text and tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Free text on the Copy window, to copy all of the text in the selected
region.

When you copy text, you automatically copy all objects grouped with text, such
as nodes and links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Paste, in the Edit pull-down menu, to place objects that have been
copied or cut into the clipboard onto the selected region which may be
positioned.

To paste objects from view ABC onto view XYZ, you would do the following:

  1. Select the region in view ABC from which you want to copy or cut objects
     to be pasted.

  2. Select Copy or Cut from view ABC. A window lets you select the types of
     objects you want to copy or cut.

  3. Select the types of objects you want to copy or cut.

  4. Select the Copy or Cut pushbutton.

  5. Select Paste in view XYZ.

     You can create a selection box in which to paste the objects. Paste puts
     the objects within the box.

     If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the
     center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box.

     Press the Enter key or click mouse button 1 within the region to paste the
     objects.

     If the objects overlap when you paste them, you can move them.

 Paste remains available with the same objects until you select other objects
 to copy or cut.

 To cancel the paste function, press Esc or double-click on mouse button 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add background picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add background picture, in the Edit pull-down menu, to add a background
picture to a view. A window will allow you to select the background picture you
want to add to the view. Any valid OS/2 * metafile can be added as a background
picture.

You can create a selection box in which to add the background picture.

If you do not create a selection box, the graphic facility puts one in the
center of the view. You can move or change the size of the selection box. The
picture is placed inside the selection box and behind all view information.

You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view,
or with Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a
background picture.

You can add only one background picture to a view.

To use a different background picture, you first remove the current picture.

The following is an example of a background picture:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add Background Picture mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter search criteria in the Background Picture field or use the default to
receive a list of possible background pictures.

Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or
double-click on the background picture filename.

To exit Add background picture without adding a picture to the view, select
Cancel or Stop adding objects.

You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view,
or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a
background picture.

You can add only one background picture to a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add Background Picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter search criteria in the Background Picture field or use the default to
receive a list of possible background pictures.

Select the background picture that you want to add, then select Add, or
double-click on the background picture filename.

To exit Add background picture without adding a picture to the view, select
Cancel or Stop adding objects.

You can remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the view,
or Delete background picture. You cannot directly select or manipulate a
background picture.

You can add only one background picture to a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Background Picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type in the file name of the background picture or enter search criteria, in
this field on the Add Background Picture window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Type of File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field on the Add Background Picture window, lists the types of file that
the system will search for.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Current Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the current drive in which the file system will search for the file
name or search criteria that you specify in the file name field on the Add
Background Picture window.

Click mouse button 1 to select a drive or double-click to open the drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a list of files that satisfies the search criteria in the file name
field on the Add Background Picture window.

Click mouse button 1 to select a file from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Directory List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a list of all sub-directories in the current directory on the current
disk.

To change the current directory on the Add Background Picture window,
double-click on the directory that you want to access.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Delete background picture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete background picture, in the Edit pull-down menu, to remove a
background picture that you have added to a view.

You can also remove a background picture with Undo, if you have not saved the
view. You cannot directly select or manipulate a background picture.

Delete background picture is available only when a view has a background
picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Move, in the Edit pull-down menu, to move a selected object (text,
tackpoints, or nodes) or a selected region of objects to a different location
in a view. To select Move, first select an object or a region.

You can move links, nodes, text, tackpoints, individually or all at once in a
selected region. The two methods for moving objects or regions are:

 o Using Move.

 o Dragging the object or region with mouse button 2.

 Moving an Object By Selecting Move

 To move an object by selecting Move from the pull-down menu:

  1. Select the object or region that you want to move.

  2. Select Move from the Edit pull-down menu. A box appears around the
     selected object or region, with a move pointer inside it.

  3. Move the mouse pointer to where you want to place the object or region of
     objects. The box moves with the mouse pointer. To move the mouse pointer
     and selection box, use either the mouse or the mouse pointer movement keys
     on the keyboard.

  4. When you have the box at the new location, either click mouse button 2 or
     press the space bar.

 Moving an Object by Dragging It

 To move an object by dragging it:

  1. Position the mouse pointer on the object or region you want to move. Press
     and hold down mouse button 2. A box appears around the object or region,
     with a move pointer inside it.

  2. While holding down the button, drag the box to the new location.

  3. Release the mouse button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu, to remove selected objects from a
view. To select Clear, you first select an object or a region to clear.

You can clear links, nodes, text, and tackpoints individually, or you can clear
all the objects in a selected region.

When you clear a node from the view, you also remove the links that connect the
node to other nodes and the text that is grouped with the node or link.

If you accidentally clear one or more objects from a view, you can retrieve
them in one of the following ways:

 o Select Undo Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel the deletions, one
   by one, beginning with the most recent.

 o Select Undo last x changes, in the Edit pull-down menu, to cancel all
   editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the view.

 o Select Close from the system menu and do not save the editing. This cancels
   all the editing changes you have made since you opened or saved the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, to add an object to a view.

To add objects to a view:

  1. Press either mouse button 1 or the space bar to select a type of object in
     the Add objects pull-down menu.

     You can add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links.

  2. Use mouse button 1 or the space bar to select the location in the view in
     which to place the object.

  3. Press the Esc key, double-click mouse button 2, or select Stop adding
     objects in the Edit pull-down menu to exit Add objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects to add objects to the view.

 To add an object to a view:

  1. Press either mouse button 1 or the space bar to select a type of object in
     the Add objects pull-down menu.

     You can add text, tackpoints, nodes, and links.

  2. Use mouse button 1 or the space bar to select the location in the view in
     which to place the object.

  3. Press the Esc key, double-click mouse button 2, or select Stop adding
     objects in the Edit pull-down menu to exit Add objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add text in the
Add objects pull-down menu, to add text to a view.

This function enables you to add information, such as phone numbers or
customers' names, for your own reference.

When you select Add text, the pointer changes into an I-beam pointer:

To identify where you want to add the new text, move the I-beam pointer to the
location and click mouse button 1 or press the space bar. A window appears in
which you can add up to 511 characters of text. The text is added where you
positioned the I-beam pointer.

You remain in Add text until you do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.

 You can remove text by using Undo, if you have not saved the changes, or
 Clear.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text that you want to add to the view, then select the Add
pushbutton.

  1. Enter as much text as fits in the Text field, then select Add.

     If the text you want to add is too long to fit in the Text field, you can
     add more text by doing the following:

  2. Move the I-beam pointer to the end of the text or to a position below it.
     Then click mouse button 1 or press Enter. The Add Text window appears
     again.

  3. Enter additional text in the Text field.

  4. The text may be up to 511 characters.

 To remove the Add Text window, select Cancel.

 To exit Add text entirely, first select Cancel to remove the window, then do
 one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can enter up to 511 characters of text on the Add Text window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add tackpoints,
in the Add Objects pull-down menu to add tackpoints to a view. You can use
tackpoints to bend the links in your views.

When you select Add tackpoints, the mouse pointer changes to an illegal pointer
until you move the pointer over a link. Then the pointer changes into a
tackpoint pointer:

Adding a Tackpoint

  1. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position on the link where you want the
     tackpoint, click mouse button 1, and drag the mouse to position the
     tackpoint. The link bends as you move the tackpoint. When the tackpoint is
     in the correct position, release the mouse button to set the tackpoint in
     place.

  2. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view.

 The following is an example of a view with two links, each containing a single
 tackpoint. The tackpoints are represented by small, white squares. Tackpoints
 are not normally visible unless the links they are contained in are selected.

 You remain in Add tackpoints until you do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.
 (You can also use the keyboard to add tackpoints.)

 You can move, delete, and hide tackpoints.

 To select a tackpoint, first select the link it is in. Deselect the link and
 the tackpoint is ready to be worked with.

 To move a tackpoint, select it, click and hold mouse button 2, and drag the
 mouse until you have positioned it in the link.

 To delete a tackpoint, do one of the following:

 o Select the tackpoints individually or all at once and delete them one at a
   time by selecting Clear, in the Edit pull-down menu.

 o Select Undo add, in the Edit pull-down menu to delete the tackpoints you
   added, one at a time, beginning with the most recent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add nodes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add nodes to
add nodes to a view.

To add a node:

  1. Select the node type from the pull-down menu for Add objects.

  2. Click mouse button 1 or press the space bar to add the node to the view.

  3. Repeat step 2 until you finish adding this type of node.

 To cancel Add nodes do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.

 You can move, delete, and hide nodes.

 o Select the nodes and delete them one at a time by selecting Clear, in the
   Edit pull-down menu.

 o If you have just added the nodes, select Undo add, in the Edit pull-down
   menu to delete the nodes you added, one at a time beginning with the most
   recent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Add links ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, and then select Add links to
add links to a view.

To add a link:

  1. Select the link type from the pull-down menu for Add objects.

  2. Click mouse button 1 or press the space bar to enter the first endpoint.
     To enter any link endpoints, you must be positioned over a node. After you
     enter the first endpoint, you can add tackpoints.

  3. To enter the second endpoint, you must position the mouse pointer over a
     node.

  4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you finish adding this type of link.

 To cancel Add links, do one of the following:

 o Press the Esc key.
 o Double-click on mouse button 2.
 o Select Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.

 You can delete and hide links.

 o If you have just added the links, select Undo add in the Edit pull-down menu
   to delete the nodes you added, one at a time beginning with the most recent.

 o Select the nodes and delete them one at a time by selecting Clear, in the
   Edit pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Stop adding objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Stop adding objects, in the Edit pull-down menu, to exit Add objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Modify text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Modify text, in the Edit pull-down menu, to revise existing text.

To modify text, you first select the text you want to modify.

When you select Modify text, a window that contains the existing text appears.
You can make your changes in this window, totalling up to 511 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Modify Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can make changes to the existing text. Select Modify text, in the Edit
pull-down menu, to change the text on the view.

To exit Modify text without making any changes, select Cancel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the text on the Modify Text window. You can type in a total of
511 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View to use the following functions:

 Zoom in
      To magnify a specific area in a view.

 Zoom out
      To widen your perspective of a view.

 Undo zoom
      To return the view to its configuration prior to the last Zoom in.

 Zoom fit
      To zoom in or zoom out to show all displayable objects contained in the
      view.

 Display labels
      To indicate the resource labels (such as names and icons) to display at a
      specific zoom level.

 Subnet
      To display all the resources that are attached up to nine links away from
      a specific node.

 Hide
      To temporarily hide a selected object or region in a view.

 Show only
      To temporarily hide everything in a view except a selected object or
      region.

 Show all
      To redisplay all objects hidden by Hide, Show only, or Subnet.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Zoom in ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Zoom in, located in the View pull-down menu, to magnify a selected
region in the view. This is what a view looks like after you have zoomed-in on
it.

To select Zoom in you first select a region to zoom-in on.

You can store different zoom levels for each view. When you close a view, you
remove all these stored zooms.

Subnet and Find automatically perform zooms. These zooms are stored along with
zooms that you create using the Zoom in and Zoom out functions.

When you zoom in on a region, resource labels that were not displayed to you at
the higher level might appear. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource
names, you want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, in the
View pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Zoom out ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Zoom out, in the View pull-down menu, to widen your perspective of a
view. Zoom out quadruples the display area of the view. This is what a view
looks like after you have zoomed-out on it. The white box shows where the
information in the original zoom is located in the new zoom.

You can store up to 50 zoom levels for each view. When you close a view, you
remove all these stored zooms.

When you zoom-out on a view, resource labels that appeared at the lower level
might not display. To specify the labels, such as icons or resource names, you
want to display at different zoom levels, use Display labels, in the View
pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Undo zoom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Undo zoom, in the View pull-down menu, to return the view to its
configuration prior to the last zoom.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Zoom fit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Zoom fit, in the View pull-down menu, to zoom in or zoom out to show all
displayable objects contained in the view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Display labels, in the View pull-down menu, to specify the labels to
display at a specific zoom level.

When you select Display labels, a window appears in which you can select the
labels you want to display at the current zoom level. If you select a type of
label, you display it at the current zoom level and all levels below this one.
If you deselect a type of label, you hide it for all zoom levels.

This is what a view looks like after you have selected to display certain
labels.

For example, if you are displaying a view of a large communication network,
displaying labels might clutter the screen and make it hard to read. However,
when you zoom in on a particular area, you might want to see the icons that
indicate the resource type. You can do the following:

  1. Zoom-in on the area.

  2. Select Display labels.

  3. A window appears, in which you select the types of labels to show. Select
     Icon. The icons are displayed when you view the area at that zoom level.

 Save the view before you close it. Then the labels will automatically appear
 every time you zoom in to that level and all levels below.

 When you reduce the size of the window, the zoom level is decreased.
 Therefore, you might not see the labels you requested to display at this zoom
 level when you reduce the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Display Labels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one or more labels that you want to display or hide at this zoom level.
Selecting an item will show it; deselecting it will hide it.

After you make your selections, select the Display pushbutton.

To exit Display labels without making any changes, select Cancel.

For example, if you are displaying a view of a large communication network,
displaying labels might clutter the screen and make it hard to read. However,
when you zoom in on a particular area, you might want to see the icons that
indicate the resource type. You can do the following:

  1. Zoom-in on the area.

  2. Select Display labels.

  3. A window appears in which you select the types of labels you want to show.
     Select Icon. The icons are displayed when you view the area at that zoom
     level.

 Save the view before you close it. Then, the labels will automatically appear
 every time you zoom in to that level and all levels above this one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Subnet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Subnet, in the View pull-down menu, to display all resources that are
located a specific number of links (or hop count) from the selected node.

To select Subnet, you first select a node.

Subnet lets you display a subset of your network by zooming in on resources
that are part of that subset and hiding resources that are not. You might want
to display a subset of your network if there is only a particular area of the
view on which you want to concentrate.

After you select Subnet, a window appears, in which you can specify the hop
count.

For example, if you request a subnet of Resource A with a hop count of 2, you
would see every resource attached up to two links away from Resource A, but no
other resources.

Following is an example of a subnet with a hop count of 2.

When you redisplay resources, you will see any changes that indicate status
updates.

The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the resources
hidden by Subnet, select Show all.

You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Subnet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Subnet allows you to display all resources that are located a specific number
of links (hop count) from the selected node. This function lets you view a
subset of your network. You might want to display a subset of your network if
there is only a particular area of the view on which you want to concentrate.

Set a hop count number of up to 9, then select the Subnet pushbutton.

For example, if you want to see a subnet of Resource A, with a hop count of 2,
select 2 for the Hop Count field. You will then see every resource attached up
to two links away from Resource A, but no further.

When you redisplay these resources, you will see any changes that indicates
status updates.

The subnet is displayed until you close the view. To redisplay the view as it
was before Subnet, select Show all, in the View pull-down menu.

To exit Subnet, select Cancel.

You cannot select hidden resources until you redisplay them.

Following is an example of a resource that has been subnetted with a hop count
of 2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Hop Count ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the hop count to specify the number of node-to-node links to display for
the selected node. The hop count can be any number from 1 to 9.

For example, to see all resources up to 5 links away from Resource A, select 5
in the Hop Count field on the Subnet window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 457. Hide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Hide, in the View pull-down menu, to temporarily conceal selected
objects or a region in the view.

To select Hide, you first select an object or region to hide.

The following are examples of a view before and after objects have been hidden.

If you hide a node, its attached links will remain visible. To hide links,
select them or select the region in which they are located.

The selected objects or region remain hidden until you close the view. To
redisplay the view as it was before Hide, select Show all, located in the View
pull-down menu.

You cannot select hidden objects until you redisplay them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Show only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Show only, in the View pull-down menu, to temporarily remove everything
in the view except the objects or region you select.

To select Show only, you first select an object or region.

The following are examples of a view before and after selecting Show only for
certain objects.

If you select a node for Show only, its attached links are hidden. To display
links, you must select them also.

The unselected objects remain hidden until you show all the objects, using Show
all.

You cannot select hidden objects until you redisplay them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Show all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Show all, in the View pull-down menu, to redisplay all objects that you
hid from the view by using Hide, Show only, or Subnet.

Show all will not redisplay objects that you delete from the view with Clear.
Objects that you delete from the view are permanently removed when you save the
edit.

Show all does not affect resource labels or tackpoints.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options to use the following functions:

 Ignore         To stop receiving status updates for selected resources.

 Monitor        To begin receiving status updates for selected resources.

 Legend         To display a description of the nodes, links, and status of the
                view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Ignore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Ignore, in the Options pull-down menu, to stop receiving status updates
for selected resources or for all the resources in a selected region. To select
Ignore, you first select a resource or a region.

To begin receiving status updates for an ignored resource or region, select
Monitor, in the Options pull-down menu. When you begin to monitor these
resources again, any changes in their colors or patterns indicate status
updates.

This is an example of a view with some resources ignored. The ignored resources
are blue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Monitor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Monitor, in the Options pull-down menu, to begin receiving status
updates for selected resources or a region that is currently ignored. To select
Monitor, you first select a resource or a region.

To stop receiving status updates for a monitored resource or region, select
Ignore, in the Options pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Legend ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Legend, in the Options pull-down menu, to see a description of the
nodes, links, and status in views.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Legend Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The legend window defines all the nodes, links, and status in views. Use the
scroll bar to move through the listing.

You can move and change the size of the legend window, like you can any other
window, but you cannot move it outside the view window. To close the legend,
select Close from the pull-down menu for the system icon in the title bar of
the legend.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Switch to graphics area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you use the keyboard rather than the mouse, select Switch to graphics area,
in the pull-down menu for the system icon, to switch to the graphics area, so
that you can move the mouse pointer with the keyboard.

To use the keyboard to move the pointer, you first select Keyboard moves
pointer, in the pull-down menu for the system icon in the title bar of a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Keyboard moves mouse pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Keyboard moves pointer, in the pull-down menu for the system icon in the
title bar of a view, to move the mouse pointer with the keyboard. This option
remains in effect until you turn it off. To turn this option off, click mouse
button 1 to reselect it.

Because the mouse pointer movement keys usually move the scroll bars in the
view, if you select this option and want to use the arrow keys to move the
scroll bar, press the Scroll Lock key.

If you want to use the keyboard for mouse pointer movement for every view you
display, press and hold the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off
this option for all views, press and hold the Shift key and click mouse button
1 to reselect the option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 458. Hide frame controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Hide frame controls, in the pull-down menu for the system icon, in the
title bar of a view, to hide all frame controls for this window. Frame controls
are:

 o The action bar
 o The minimize and maximize arrows at the right corner of the title bar of the
   window
 o The title bar
 o The scroll bars.

 Hide frame controls remains in effect until you close the view.

 If you want these controls hidden for every view you display, press and hold
 the Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all
 views, press and hold the Shift key and reselect the option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 459. Hide scroll bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Hide scroll bars, in the pull-down menu for the system icon, in the
title bar of a view, to hide all scroll bars for this window. Hide scroll bars
remains in effect for all future occurrences of this view until you turn it
off. To turn this option off, reselect it.

If you want scroll bars hidden for every view you display, press and hold the
Shift key when you select this option. To turn off this option for all views,
press and hold the Shift key and reselect the option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> View, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A view is a picture that can include nodes, links, text, tackpoints, and a
background picture.

This is an example of a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Double-Click, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double-click means to press and release the mouse button twice, quickly,
without moving the mouse.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using the keyboard to move the mouse pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use the keyboard to move the mouse pointer, do the following:

  1. Select Keyboard moves mouse pointer, from the pull-down menu for the
     system icon.

  2. Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer.

 The following is a list of the mouse pointer movements and the keys used to
 make those movements:

 Movement      Key
 Up            Up arrow
 Down          Down arrow
 Right         Right arrow
 Left          Left arrow

 To move the mouse pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any
 of the keys above.

 If Scroll Lock is on, the arrow keys scroll the window instead of moving the
 mouse pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using the keyboard to create and change a selection box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can create a selection box in a view to select all the items in a region.

Ensure that Keyboard moves pointer is enabled.

To use the keyboard to create a selection box, do one of the following:

 o Press and hold down the Shift key then use the arrow keys to move the mouse
   pointer to create the selection box.

 o Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region you
   want to select and press the space bar. Then, move the mouse pointer to the
   opposite corner, press and hold down the Shift key, and press the space bar
   to create a selection box.

 To change the size of the selection box, put the mouse pointer on the square
 on one side of the box. Then press and hold down the Shift key and move the
 mouse pointer.

 You cannot use the keyboard to move the selection box. Therefore, create the
 box in the region that you want to select in the view.

 Press the space bar to remove the selection box.

 This is a selection box surrounding three nodes and two links.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Selecting a region ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You use the region selection box to select a region in a view. The region
selection box looks different from the box that surrounds a selected object.
The box around a selected object is composed of only solid lines, but the
region selection box has a square in each corner and a square in the middle of
each side.

You can create, change the size of the selection box or move it to any region
in the view. To remove the box at any time, click mouse button 1 while the
mouse pointer is outside of the box.

For keyboard instructions, double-click on keyboard.

Creating the Selection Box

  1. Move the mouse pointer to one corner of the region of the view you want to
     select.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. While holding down the mouse button,
     move the pointer to the opposite corner to create the box. Continue moving
     the mouse pointer until the box is the size you want.

  3. Release the mouse button when the box is the correct size.

 This is an example of creating a selection box.

 Changing the Size of the Selection Box

 You can change the box size by moving one or two sides at a time.

 To move one side:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to a square in the middle of a side of the box. The
     mouse pointer will change to a sizing pointer.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move that
     side of the box.

 To move two sides of the box at once:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the square at a corner of the box, where two
     sides meet.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the two
     sides of the box at once.

 This is an example of changing the size of a selection box.

 Moving the Selection Box

 To move the selection box, do the following:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to the inside of the box. The mouse pointer will
     change to a move pointer.

  2. Press and hold down mouse button 1. Move the mouse pointer to move the box
     in any direction.

  3. When the box is in the correct location, release the mouse button.

 This is an example of moving a selection box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Text, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can add text to a view. For example, you can add a note, a name, a phone
number, or the name of a city.

You add text in an entry field in the Add Text window.

Up to four separate entries of text can be associated with each node and link.
You can also enter free or unassociated text.

You can select text individually.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Selecting and deselecting objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To perform a task, you first select an object and then select the task to apply
to that object. You can select or deselect an object and select or deselect a
region of objects.

You can also use the keyboard to select and deselect an object.

Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object

To select a single object, move the mouse pointer to the object and click mouse
button 1.

To select text associated with a node or a link, move the mouse pointer to the
text and click mouse button 2.

To deselect a single object, click mouse button 1 anywhere in the view except
on the selected object.

Selecting and Deselecting a Collection of Objects

To select a region in a view, you use a selection box.

To select more than one object, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you use the
mouse to click on the objects you want.

To deselect more than one object, press and hold down the Ctrl key as you use
the mouse to click on the objects you want to deselect.

This is an example of a region of selected objects:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using the keyboard to select and deselect objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the keyboard to select and deselect one or more objects. You can
select or deselect an object and select or deselect a region of objects.

Selecting and Deselecting a Single Object

To select a single object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer to the object
and press the space bar.

To deselect a single object, use the arrow keys to move the pointer to the
object. Press the space bar again.

Selecting and Deselecting a Group of Objects

To select a region in a view, you use a selection box.

To select a group of objects, use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to
each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the space
bar. Repeat this until you finish selecting all the objects you want to select.

To deselect a group of objects, use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to
each object. Then press and hold down the Ctrl key while you press the space
bar to deselect each object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Tackpoint, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A tackpoint is a graphic object that is used as a visual bending point in a
link in a view. Tackpoints generally do not represent physical objects and are
visible only when the select function is used to select either tackpoints or
the links in which they are contained. A visible tackpoint is a small, white
square at a bend in a link.

Tackpoints can be added, deleted, hidden, and moved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using the keyboard to add tackpoints ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To use the keyboard to add tackpoints in a view, do the following:

  1. Select Add tackpoints in the Edit pull-down menu. The mouse pointer will
     change to a tackpoint pointer when it is positioned over a link.

  2. Move the tackpoint pointer to the position in the link where you want the
     tackpoint. The link bends as you position the tackpoint. Press the space
     bar.

  3. Continue in this manner until you add all the tackpoints to the view.

 This picture is an example of what a view looks like after you've added
 tackpoints.

 You can exit Add Tackpoints by:

 o Pressing the Esc key.
 o Double-clicking mouse button 2.
 o Selecting Stop adding objects in the Edit pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Unavailable actions, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The items that are listed in a pull-down menu from the action bar are sometimes
in a muted color, which means that they are not available.

An action is not available because an object or region is not selected. For
example, you cannot delete an object until you select the object you want to
delete.

Help is always available for any action, whether or not the action is currently
available. To access help, click and hold mouse button 1 on the option, then
press F1. If you are using a keyboard, press F10 to move to the action bar,
then use the arrow keys to select the option and press F1.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Hop count, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The hop count is the number of node-to-node links you want to display for a
selected node. The hop count can be any number from 0 to 9.

For example, to see all the resources that are up to five links away from
Resource A, you specify a hop count of 5.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Clipboard, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The clipboard is an information area in which you store copied or cut objects.
Items in the clipboard are stored there until you paste them into a view or
until other information is cut or copied into the clipboard. The new
information replaces the current information in the clipboard.

Items in the clipboard are invisible until they are pasted into a view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Node, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A node is a graphic symbol in a view. A node represents one resource or a group
of resources. A node can be whatever your application program manages, such as
a networked computer, a security sensor, or a city.

You can select Legend in the Options pull-down menu to see a description of the
nodes, links, and status in views.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Resource, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A resource is an object in your network. A resource can be either a node or a
link.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Link, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A link is a resource that represents a connection or relationship between two
nodes.

You can select Legend in the Options pull-down menu to see a description of the
nodes, links, and status in views.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Label, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A label is an identifier that the application program associates with a
particular node or link. A resource label might be an address, an icon, or a
name. You can move, delete, or change a resource label independent of its node
or link.

You can show or hide these labels at specific zoom levels by selecting Display
labels in the View pull-down menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Background picture, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A background picture is an image that you can add to a view. Background
pictures can be complex images, such as maps, floor plans, or school layouts.
Background pictures are OS/2 * metafiles. You can add and delete, but not
modify, background pictures.

OS/2 allows you to convert other picture file types to metafiles.

This is an example of a background picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Scroll bar, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A scroll bar is a narrow section of a view window that allows you to move the
view so you can see a part that is not currently displayed.

A view window has horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You can use the vertical
scroll bar to move the view display up and down. You can use the horizontal
scroll bar to move the view display left and right.

The slider box on the scroll bar indicates how much of the view is displayed.
When you first open a view, the entire view is displayed. Therefore, the
sliders fill both the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. You cannot use the
slider to move outside the view area. However, by clicking on the scroll bar
arrows or using the arrow keys, you can continue to scroll outside of the
actual view.

To scroll one screen at a time in any direction, click on the area between the
slider and the scroll bar arrows. You can also scroll using the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Scrolling using the keyboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the keyboard to scroll one line at a time or one screen at a time.
To scroll one line at a time, use the arrow keys. To scroll one screen at a
time, use Page Up, Page Down, Ctrl-Page Up (left), or Ctrl-Page Down (right).
If the Keyboard moves mouse pointer option is in effect, you must put scroll
lock on (press the Scroll Lock key) to use the arrow keys to scroll.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Group, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A group is a collection of objects or resources that you can select and
manipulate as a single unit. When you select a group, a selection box surrounds
all the objects in the group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Object, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An object is an individual graphic unit such as text, in a view.

You can move the text associated with a link or a node by clicking mouse button
2 and dragging the text into position.

Background pictures and icons are not considered objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Asterisk, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use an asterisk (*) to indicate that any text can replace a portion of the word
or phrase.

For example, you can specify *CP, NCP*, NCP*004.

You can also use a question mark (?) to represent a single character in the
word or phrase.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Question mark, definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use a question mark (?) to indicate that any single character can replace one
character in the name.

For example, if you are looking for a view named VIEW1234, and cannot remember
the 2 or 3, enter VIEW1??4.

You can also use an asterisk (*) to replace several characters at once.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0402E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0402E  An operating system error has occurred.

 Module Name:      name

 Error Code:       code

 Detect Point:     dp

 The view will or will not continue.

 Explanation:  An error has occurred in an OS/2 * base function call.

 The message variables are:

 name        The name of the module in which the error occurred.

 code        The error code.

 dp          The line number in the source module where the error was detected.

 System Action:  The error is logged. If the error is severe, the window in
 which the error occurred will close.

 User Response:  Select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix
 the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact the IBM Support Center to check records
 of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0403E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0403E  The following operating system error has occurred.

error text

 Module Name:    name

 Error Code:     code

 Detect Point:   dp

 The view will or will not continue.

 Explanation:  An error has occurred in an OS/2 * Presentation Manager *
 function call.

 The message variables are:

 error text  The system error codes or return codes that are provided by OS/2.

 name        The name of the module in which the error occurred.

 code        The error code.

 dp          The line number in the source module where the error was detected.

 System Action:  The error is logged. If the error is severe, the window in
 which the error occurred will close.

 User Response:  Select Cancel to close the message window. If you cannot fix
 the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact the IBM Support Center to check records
 of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0404W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0404W  Changes will be lost if you do not save the view.

Explanation:  You have made edits that you have not saved. If you want to keep
them, save the view.

User Response:  Do one of the following:

 o Select Save to save the edits using the current view name.

 o Select Save as to save the edits using a new view name.

 o Select Discard to close the view without saving it.

 o Select Cancel to not close the view. If the application has closed the view
   then Cancel is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0405E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0405E  Unable to zoom to this level.

Explanation:  Because of system limitations, the view cannot be zoomed in or
zoomed out any further.

System Action:  The zoom is not performed.

User Response:  Select Cancel to deselect the selected region.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0406E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0406E  No resources found with the specified search arguments. They may have
been deleted or hidden, or they do not exist in the current view.

Explanation:  The resource you requested is not currently visible or does not
exist.

User Response:  Do one of the following:

 o Select Retry to retry the command. Ensure that you enter the find search
   arguments correctly and that the selected resources are not hidden.

 o Select Cancel to end Find and remove the message box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0408W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0408W  You have requested to undo multiple edits. This will undo multiple
edit changes made to the view.

Explanation:  You have requested to remove multiple edit changes that you have
made to the entire view since it was last opened, saved, or replaced. You must
verify the request. Your application program determines the number of changes
that can be removed.

System Action:

 o If you select Undo, multiple edit changes to this view are removed.

 o If you select Cancel, the view is not changed.

 User Response:  Do one of the following:

 o Select Undo all to undo multiple edit changes.

 o Select Cancel to cancel Undo.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0409W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0409W  You have requested to undo all edits. This will undo any edit changes
made to the view.

Explanation:  Undo all removes any changes you have made to the entire view
since it was last opened, saved, or replaced. You must verify the request.

System Action:

 o If you select Undo all, all edits to this view are undone.

 o If you select Cancel, Undo all is cancelled.

 User Response:  Do one of the following:

 o Select Undo all to undo all edits.

 o Select Cancel to cancel Undo all.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0410E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0410E  There is not enough memory for the last edit. Edit will be ignored.

Explanation:  You edited a view but the change cannot be logged into the undo
list because of insufficient memory.

System Action:  The change is ignored.

User Response:  Either close other running application programs to free up some
memory, or free space on your hard disk. If you cannot fix the problem, notify
your system programmer.

System Programmer Response:  Obtain more memory either by closing other
application programs that are running on the operating system or by installing
more memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0411E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0411E  An error has occurred.

 Module Name:      name

 Major Error Code:  code

 Minor Error Code:  code

 Detect Point:     dp

 The view will or will not continue.

 Explanation:  The error is logged. An internal error has occurred and the
 window in which the error occurred might close.

 The message variables are:

 name        The name of the module in which the error occurred.

 code        The major error code.

 code        The minor error code.

 dp          The line number in the source module where the error was detected.

 System Action:  The error is logged, and the window in which the error
 occurred will close.

 User Response:  Select Cancel to close the message window. Notify your system
 programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact the IBM Support Center to check records
 of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0414E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0414E  There is not enough memory for the last zoom. The zoom will be
ignored.

Explanation:  The zoom that you performed to the view cannot be logged in the
zoom list because of insufficient memory.

System Action:  The zoom will not be performed.

User Response:  Select Cancel to close the message window. When you select
Cancel, the zoom will also be cancelled. Close other running application
programs to free some memory. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system
programmer.

System Programmer Response:  Obtain more memory by either installing more
memory or closing other application programs on the operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0416I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0416I  The selected region did not contain any objects of the type expected.
The function will be ignored.

Explanation:  You tried a function on a region that contains no objects of the
type required for that action.

System Action:  The function is ignored.

User Response:  Select OK to close the message window and cancel the function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0417W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0417W  The view does not appear to be initialized. Do you want to continue?
Select No to close the view.

Explanation:  A view that you requested was not formatted correctly.

User Response:  Do one of the following:

 o Select Yes to close the message window and try to continue.
 o Select No to close the view.

 If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Make sure the layout utility was used on the
 view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0418I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0418I  The output device does not support printing of icons. The view will
be printed without icons.

Explanation:  The output device that you selected cannot print icons. This
occurs on such devices as plotters.

User Response:  Select OK to remove the message box and print the view without
the icons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0420I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0420I  The requested zoom level cannot be displayed because of added
objects. Press OK to remove this zoom and display the zoom level prior to the
one requested.

Explanation:  The view contains objects whose coordinates will cause an OS/2 *
error in the previous zoom level.

User Response:  Select OK to remove this zoom from the zoom ring, and display
the zoom level prior to the one you requested.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0421I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0421I  The output device does not support the printing of background
pictures with bitmaps. The view will be printed without the background picture.

Explanation:   You tried to print out a view with a background picture that
contained one or more bitmaps. The output device does not support the printing
of bitmaps.

User Response:  Select OK to close the message box and print the view without
the background picture.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0439E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0439E  The graphic facility cannot complete the function because it has run
out of memory.

The view will or will not continue.

Explanation:  The graphic facility does not have enough memory to complete your
request.

System Action:  If the error is severe, the window in which the error occurred
might close.

User Response:  Select Cancel to remove the message. Close other running
application programs to free some memory. If you cannot fix the problem, notify
your system programmer.

System Programmer Response:  Obtain more memory either by installing more
memory or by closing other application programs in the operating system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0440I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0440I  The icon file (file) cannot be opened.

The message variable is:

 file        The name of the icon file which could not be opened.

 System Action:  The icon will not display.

 User Response:  Select OK to close the message window and open the view
 without the icon.

 System Programmer Response:  Ensure that the icon file is in either the
 current directory or a directory specified in the DPATH statement in your
 CONFIG.SYS file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0441I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0441I  The icon file (file) is not in the proper format.

Explanation:  The icon file is not in the correct OS/2 * 1.3 format.

The message variable is:

 file        The name of the icon file that was not loaded.

 System Action:  The icon will not display.

 User Response:  Select OK to close the message window and open the view
 without the icon. Ensure that the icon file is in the correct OS/2 1.3 format.

 System Programmer Response:   Ensure that the icon file is valid. Use the OS/2
 1.3 Icon Editor to assure the file is in the correct format.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0442I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0442I  The font (name) of the specified size is not installed.

Font point size = point size

Explanation:  The font of the specified size is not installed.

The message variables are:

 name        The name of the font which is not installed.

 point size  The point size of the font.

 System Action:  The default font is used.

 User Response:  Select OK to close the message window and open the view with
 the system font rather than the name font.

 System Programmer Response:  Ensure that the font is installed on the system
 by using the OS/2 * font installation utility in the Control Panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0443I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0443I  The system ran out of file handles, or one of the listed help files
cannot be found (files). Make sure all help files exist and are in HELP path
specified in CONFIG.SYS. Help will not be available.

Explanation:  If the help file is located in the HELP path, OS/2 * might have
run out of file handles.

The message variable is:

 files       A list of one or more files which include a help file which could
             not be found.

 System Action:  The graphic facility continues without help available.

 User Response:  Record the error and then select OK to close the message
 window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact your IBM Support Center to check the
 records of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0444I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0444I  One of the listed help libraries is invalid (files). Help will not be
available.

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program.

The message variable is:

 files       A list of one or more help libraries

 System Action:  The graphic facility continues without help available.

 User Response:  Record the error and then select OK to close the message
 window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact your IBM Support Center to check the
 records of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0445I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0445I  Information Presentation Facility error.  Message Code:  code  mp1:
mp1  mp2:  mp2

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program.

The message variables are:

 code        Returned from the Information Presentation Facility

 mp1         Message parameter 1

 mp2         Message parameter 2

 System Action:  The graphic facility continues without help available.

 User Response:  Record the error and then select OK to close the message
 window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Contact your IBM Support Center to check the
 records of logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0446E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0446E  A field is not in the help subtable. Topic:  topic  Subtopic:
subtopic

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program.

The message variables are:

 topic       the help topic

 subtopic    the help subtopic

 System Action:  The graphic facility continues.

 User Response:  Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message
 window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

 System Programmer Response:  Check the help subtable definition to ensure that
 the field is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of
 logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0447E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0447E  A help panel is not in the help library.

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program.

System Action:  The graphic facility continues.

User Response:  Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message
window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

System Programmer Response:  Check the IPF script file to ensure that the panel
is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of logged
errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0448E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0448E  A window ID was not defined in the main help table.

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to start the online help program.

System Action:  The graphic facility continues.

User Response:  Record the error and then select Cancel to close the message
window. If you cannot fix the problem, notify your system programmer.

System Programmer Response:  Check the help table definition to ensure that the
window is defined. Contact your IBM Support Center to check the records of
logged errors for more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0450E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0450E  An error occurred loading the background picture file (file).  Either
the file could not be found or it may not be in the background picture format.

Explanation:  You selected a file in the Add Background Picture window, but the
file either was not found or it is not in the correct OS/2 * metafile format.
A system error may also cause this message to appear.

The message variable is:

 file        The file that could not be added to the view because it either
             could not be found or it is not in the correct OS/2 metafile
             format.

 System Action:

 o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system returns you to the Add
   Background Picture window to select another file.

 o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the Add Background
   Picture window.

 User Response:  Ensure that you correctly specified the file and that it is in
 the correct format. Then do one of the following:

 o Select the Retry pushbutton to return to the window, then select another
   file.

 o Select the Cancel pushbutton to cancel Add background picture.

 System Programmer Response:  Ensure that each background picture is in the
 correct OS/2 metafile format. The file must have been created using a product
 that produces OS/2 metafiles. If this is the case, the file contains errors
 and must be recreated. If the suggested actions do not correct the problem,
 contact your IBM Support Center.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0453I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0453I  No resources that met the specified search arguments were found in
the view. Do you want to search other views?

Explanation:  The graphic facility is unable to locate any more resources that
satisfy the Find request. It will send a request to the application program to
search its views.

System Action:

 o If you select the Search pushbutton, the system searches other views.

 o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the Find window.

 o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system returns you to the Find
   window.

 User Response:

 You should do the following:

 o Select Search to have other views searched.

 o Select Cancel to cancel the Find function.

 o Select Retry to return to the Find function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0454E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0454E  You have entered a non-valid view name.

Explanation:  You entered a view name in the Save As window, but the name does
not conform to view naming conventions.

System Action:

 o If you select the Cancel pushbutton, the system closes the message window
   and the Save As window.

 o If you select the Retry pushbutton, the system closes the message window and
   returns you to the Save As window.

 User Response:

 Do the following:

 o Select Cancel to close the message window and end Save as.

 o Select Retry to close the message window and return to the Save As window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EXQ0455E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EXQ0455E  You have entered a non-valid view descriptor.

Explanation:  You entered a view descriptor in the Save As window but the
descriptor does not conform to descriptor naming conventions.

System Action:  The graphic facility continues.

User Response:

You should do one of the following:

 o Select Cancel to close the message window and end Save as.

 o Select Retry to close the message window and return to the Save As window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help on the action bar to see the following types of help:

 Using help            A brief guide to how to use the help system.

 Keys help             Information about using your keyboard in GraphicsView/2.

 Help index            A list of specific help topics that you can select.

 General help          A brief overview of the product and its functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Using help to see descriptions of the help facility, the different types
of help available to you, and how to access that help.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can access the online help by:

 o Selecting the item or function and then pressing the F1 key.

 o Double-clicking on a highlighted word or phrase, or tabbing to the
   highlighted word or phrase and pressing the Enter key while in a help
   window. Try it!

 o Selecting the Help index, in the Help pull-down menu, to see an alphabetical
   list of topics in the help information.

 o Locating a phrase with search by selecting Search from the Services
   pull-down menu of the Help window when you want to find information by
   looking for certain words.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Success! ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You correctly used the highlighted words to get more information.

After you read this information, press the Esc key to return to where you were.

Press the Esc key now.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Keys help to see help information about using your keyboard in the
GraphicsView/2 program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The keys are listed below in groups according to their function.

When two keys are joined by a plus sign (+), hold down the first key while
pressing the second key.

Graphic Area Keys

Use the following keys to move the pointer in the graphic area of a window with
the keyboard.

Select Keyboard Moves Pointer located under the system menu icon in the upper
left corner of your view to use your keyboard to move the pointer.

 Up
      Up arrow
 Down
      Down arrow
 Right
      Right arrow
 Left
      Left arrow

 To move the pointer faster, press and hold the Ctrl key while using any of the
 keys above.

 Window Keys

 Use the following keys to act on a window.

 F1
      Help
 F10 or Alt
      Go to or from the action bar
 Arrow keys
      Move among choices on the action bar, in pull-downs, in pop-up windows,
      or in list boxes
 End
      Go to the last choice in a pull-down or the last item in a list box
 Home
      Go to the first choice in a pull-down or the first item in a list box
 Underlined letter
      Selects choice on the action bar or pull-down menu.
 Alt+F4
      Exit
 Alt+F5
      Restore the window
 Alt+F7
      Move the window
 Alt+F8
      Size the window
 Alt+F9
      Minimize the window
 Alt+F10
      Maximize the window
 Shift+Esc or Alt+Spacebar
      Go to or from the system menu
 Esc
      Cancel a pull-down or the system menu

 Dialog Window Keys

 Use the following keys to act on a dialog window.

 Enter
      Perform the action indicated on the selected pushbutton
 Esc
      Cancel the pop-up window
 Spacebar
      Set a check box on or off or perform the action indicated on the selected
      pushbutton
 Tab
      Move to the next entry field or check box.

 Editing Keys

 Use the following keys to perform editing functions.

 Ctrl+/
      Select object types
 Ctrl+\
      Deselect all
 Alt+Backspace
      Undo
 Ctrl+Backspace
      Undo last x changes
 Ctrl+Ins
      Copy
 Shift+Del
      Cut
 Shift+Ins
      Paste
 Del
      Delete the character under the cursor in input fields and selected
      material when editing a view
 Backspace (left arrow delete)
      Delete the character to the left of the cursor in input fields
 End or Ctrl+Right Arrow Key
      Move to the end of a field
 Home or Ctrl+Left Arrow Key
      Move to the beginning of a field

 Help Keys

 Use the following keys to get help from the application, or to get different
 kinds of help when you are within a help window.

 F1
      Help
 F2
      General help (from within a help window)
 F9
      Keys help (from within a help window)
 F11 or Shift+F1
      Help index (from within a help window)
 Esc
      Cancel current help
 Shift+F10
      Help for help (from within a help window)

 All OS/2* keys are functional while you are using this product. See the OS/2
 keys help for a complete list of these keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for General help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select General help to see a general overview of the GraphicsView/2 program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Graphic Facility Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The GraphicsView/2 program includes a graphic facility that enables you to
display a view of objects in a system or a network.

There are four categories of actions that are displayed on the action bar of a
view. When you select one of the actions from the action bar, the graphic
facility displays a pull-down menu that lists the items available for that
action. Depending on how you display a view, you can perform tasks, such as
monitor views, make editorial changes to views, or print or plot views.

Some items in the pull-down menus are not always available to you. These
options are grayed out. An item in a pull-down menu is grayed out for the
following reason:

 The item is not available until you select an object or a region on which to
 take action. For example, you cannot clear an object until you select the
 object you want to remove.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Using the F1 key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can get help on action bar and pull-down items by selecting the item and
pressing the F1 key.

Do one of the following:

 o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the item on which you
   want help. Click and hold down mouse button 1, and then press the F1 key.

 o To use the keyboard to get help, press the F10 key to move to the action
   bar. Use the arrow keys to select the choice on which you want help, and
   press the F1 key.

 You can get help for a field or selectable item in a dialog window.

 o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the field or item on
   which you want help and click mouse button 1. Then either move the pointer
   to the Help pushbutton at the bottom of the dialog window and click mouse
   button 1, or press the F1 key.

 o To use the keyboard to get help, tab to the field and press the F1 key. Use
   the arrow keys to select individual fields or items.

 To get general help on an entire dialog window, tab to the Help pushbutton,
 and then click mouse button 1, press the F1 key, or press Enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Highlighted Phrases ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Many words or phrases are highlighted in color in the help windows. This
highlighting indicates that more help information is available on that text. To
get help from highlighted words or phrases, do the following:

 o To use your mouse to get help in a panel, move the pointer to the
   highlighted word or phrase on which you want help and double-click.

 o To use the keyboard to get help, tab to the highlighted word or phrase and
   press the F1 key. Use the arrow keys to select the highlighted words and
   phrases.

 After you read the displayed information, press the Esc key to return to where
 you were.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Application Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To get an overview of the application program that you are using, select
General help in the help pull-down menu, or press F2 while you are in any help
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To see a list of all help topics, select Help index in the Help pull-down menu,
or press F11 while you are viewing any help window.

 o To use your mouse to get help, move the pointer to the topic on which you
   want help and double-click.

 o To use the keyboard to get help, use the arrow keys to select the topic.
   Press Enter.

 Messages are not listed in the index. Use the Search function to find the help
 for the message that you want.

 Substitute the wildcard characters asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for a
 search that is based on a partial text string. For example, to find all the
 messages that begin with the letters EXQ, enter

  EXQ*
 .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Searching for help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the Search selection from the action bar of a Help window to access
the help information for phrases or words. By choosing words that relate to the
task you are trying to perform, you can find the help information that you
need. For example, if you are trying to copy a resource, you might search on
the word copy. To search the help,

  1. Bring up any help panel and select Search, in the Services pull-down menu,
     on the help action bar.

  2. In the Search dialog window, select one of the following:

    o All Sections, to search the text in all the help panels, or

    o Index, to search the help index, which will also look for synonyms to
      your search text.

  3. Type the word or the phrase about which you want to see information.
     Substitute the wildcard characters asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for a
     search that is based on a partial text string. For example, to find all
     the messages that begin with the letters EXQ, enter

          EXQ*

  4. Then select the Search pushbutton.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Getting Help for Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can receive two types of messages while you are using the GraphicsView/2
program at your workstation. Following is a description of these types of
messages and how to get help on them.

 Presentation Manager Pop-up Messages
   These messages come up in a pop-up window while you are in the Presentation
   Manager * environment. To get help for such a message, click on the Help
   pushbutton in the window.

   If you record the message number, you can get help for the message after you
   have closed its window by doing the following:

     1. Bring up any help panel and select Search, located under Services on
        the help action bar.

     2. On the Search dialog window, select All Sections and type in the
        message number. Enter the message number exactly, including the message
        number's prefix and suffix, or substitute the wildcard characters
        asterisk (*) or question mark (?) for part of the message number. For
        example, enter EXQ* to see a list of all error messages beginning with
        the letters EXQ. If you want to see the help for message EXQ0405E, then
        you could enter the message number exactly.

        If you forget the suffix and do not substitute a wildcard character,
        you will not find the message.

     3. Then select the Search pushbutton.

 OS/2 Pop-up Messages
   Some messages come up on an OS/2 * full screen. To get help on an OS/2
   pop-up message, do the following:

     1. Note the error number, such as EXQ0402

     2. Now press Enter. You will be returned to the Presentation Manager
        environment.

     3. Next bring up an OS/2 full screen.

     4. From the command prompt, type the following:

                help yyynnnn

        where

                yyy
         is the prefix of the message (such as EXQ) and

                nnnn
         is the number of the message. For example, typing:

                help EXQ0402

        would display the help for message EXQ0402.

 Occasionally, you will see messages with both reasons and reason codes. In
 most cases, these reason codes are already explained in the reason text, so
 you can ignore them. However, if the reason is unknown, these OS/2 reason
 codes provide valuable information you can use to find the problem. The help
 for the message will tell you where to find more information on the reason
 code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Trademark of IBM Corporation